diff options
Diffstat (limited to '17286.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 17286.txt | 10051 |
1 files changed, 10051 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/17286.txt b/17286.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e0f6b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/17286.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10051 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Indian Linguistic Families Of America, +North Of Mexico, by John Wesley Powell + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Indian Linguistic Families Of America, North Of Mexico + Seventh Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the + Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, 1885-1886, + Government Printing Office, Washington, 1891, pages 1-142 + +Author: John Wesley Powell + +Release Date: December 12, 2005 [EBook #17286] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES *** + + + + +Produced by Louise Hope, Carlo Traverso, the Library of +Congress Geography and Map Division, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net. This +file was produced from images generously made available +by the Bibliotheque nationale de France (BnF/Gallica) at +http://gallica.bnf.fr + + + + + +[Transcriber's Note: + +This text is intended for readers who cannot use the "real" (unicode, +utf-8) version of the file or even the simplified Latin-1 form. Letters +that could not be shown accurately have been "unpacked" and shown in +brackets: + + ['] syllable stress (angled line similar t acute accent) + [-A] [-a] [-e] ... vowel with macron + [vA] [va] [ve] ... vowel with breve _or_ hacek (see below) + [.z] dot above letter + [eo] e with small ring _under_ it + ['a] ['e] ['s] ... [^a] [^e] ... [`a] [`e] letter with accent + (acute, circumflex, grave; accents on European names are generally + not marked) + [:a] letter with dieresis or umlaut + [t_] [l_] underlined letter + [ch] (Greek) chi + [K] [S] [k] [t] upside-down letters + [n] small superscript n + c with cedilla and n with tilde have been reduced to c and n + +Where this "unpacking" results in an unreadable word, a simplified form +has been added in brackets with an asterisk: [*Unugun]. + +In the printed text it is not clear whether the author intended +hacek (Unicode "caron", angled) or breve (curved). Breve was used in +the utf-8 versions of this document, as it is phonetically plausible +and the characters are more widely available. Hacek is used here +because the bracketed form [va] is less ambiguous visually than the +breve [)a].] + + + * * * * * + * * * * + * * * * * + + + INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES OF AMERICA + + NORTH OF MEXICO. + + + by + J. W. POWELL. + + + * * * * * + + + CONTENTS. + +Nomenclature of linguistic families 7 +Literature relating to the classification of Indian languages 12 +Linguistic map 25 + Indian tribes sedentary 30 + Population 33 + Tribal land 40 + Village sites 40 + Agricultural land 41 + Hunting claims 42 + Summary of deductions 44 +Linguistic families 45 + Adaizan family 45 + Algonquian family 47 + Algonquian area 47 + Principal Algonquian tribes 48 + Population 48 + Athapascan family 51 + Boundaries 52 + Northern group 53 + Pacific group 53 + Southern group 54 + Principal tribes 55 + Population 55 + Attacapan family 56 + Beothuakan family 57 + Geographic distribution 58 + Caddoan family 58 + Northern group 60 + Middle group 60 + Southern group 60 + Principal tribes 61 + Population 62 + Chimakuan family 62 + Principal tribes 63 + Chimarikan family 63 + Principal tribes 63 + Chimmesyan family 63 + Principal tribes or villages 64 + Population 64 + Chinookan family 65 + Principal tribes 66 + Population 66 + Chitimachan family 66 + Chumashan family 67 + Population 68 + Coahuiltecan family 68 + Principal tribes 69 + Copehan family 69 + Geographic distribution 69 + Principal tribes 70 + Costanoan family 70 + Geographic distribution 71 + Population 71 + Eskimauan family 71 + Geographic distribution 72 + Principal tribes and villages 74 + Population 74 + Esselenian family 75 + Iroquoian family 76 + Geographic distribution 77 + Principal tribes 79 + Population 79 + Kalapooian family 81 + Principal tribes 82 + Population 82 + Karankawan family 82 + Keresan family 83 + Villages 83 + Population 83 + Kiowan family 84 + Population 84 + Kitunahan family 85 + Tribes 85 + Population 85 + Koluschan family 85 + Tribes 87 + Population 87 + Kulanapan family 87 + Geographic distribution 88 + Tribes 88 + Kusan family 89 + Tribes 89 + Population 89 + Lutuamian family 89 + Tribes 90 + Population 90 + Mariposan family 90 + Geographic distribution 91 + Tribes 91 + Population 91 + Moquelumnan family 92 + Geographic distribution 93 + Principal tribes 93 + Population 93 + Muskhogean family 94 + Geographic distribution 94 + Principal tribes 95 + Population 95 + Natchesan family 95 + Principal tribes 97 + Population 97 + Palaihnihan family 97 + Geographic distribution 98 + Principal tribes 98 + Piman family 98 + Principal tribes 99 + Population 99 + Pujunan family 99 + Geographic distribution 100 + Principal tribes 100 + Quoratean family 100 + Geographic distribution 101 + Tribes 101 + Population 101 + Salinan family 101 + Population 102 + Salishan family 102 + Geographic distribution 104 + Principal tribes 104 + Population 105 + Sastean family 105 + Geographic distribution 106 + Shahaptian family 106 + Geographic distribution 107 + Principal tribes and population 107 + Shoshonean family 108 + Geographic distribution 109 + Principal tribes and population 110 + Siouan family 111 + Geographic distribution 112 + Principal tribes 114 + Population 116 + Skittagetan family 118 + Geographic distribution 120 + Principal tribes 120 + Population 121 + Takilman family 121 + Geographic distribution 121 + Tanoan family 121 + Geographic distribution 122 + Population 123 + Timuquanan family 123 + Geographic distribution 123 + Principal tribes 124 + Tonikan family 125 + Geographic distribution 125 + Tonkawan family 125 + Geographic distribution 126 + Uchean family 126 + Geographic distribution 126 + Population 127 + Waiilatpuan family 127 + Geographic distribution 127 + Principal tribes 127 + Population 128 + Wakashan family 128 + Geographic distribution 130 + Principal Aht tribes 130 + Population 130 + Principal Haeltzuk tribes 131 + Population 131 + Washoan family 131 + Weitspekan family 131 + Geographic distribution 132 + Tribes 132 + Wishoskan family 132 + Geographic distribution 133 + Tribes 133 + Yakonan family 133 + Geographic distribution 134 + Tribes 134 + Population 135 + Yanan family 135 + Geographic distribution 135 + Yukian family 135 + Geographic distribution 136 + Yuman family 136 + Geographic distribution 137 + Principal tribes 138 + Population 138 + Zunian family 138 + Geographic distribution 139 + Population 139 +Concluding remarks 139 + + +ILLUSTRATION + + +Plate I. Map. Linguistic stocks of North America north of Mexico. +In pocket at end of volume + +[Transcriber's Note: + +The Map is available in the "images" directory accompanying the html +version of this file. There are two sizes in addition to the thumbnail: + + mapsmall.jpg: 615x732 pixels (about 9x11 in / 23x28 cm, 168K) + maplarge.jpg: 1521x1818 pixels (about 22x27 in / 56x70 cm, 1MB) ] + + + * * * * * + + + INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES. + + By J. W. POWELL. + + + * * * * * + + + NOMENCLATURE OF LINGUISTIC FAMILIES. + + +The languages spoken by the pre-Columbian tribes of North America were +many and diverse. Into the regions occupied by these tribes travelers, +traders, and missionaries have penetrated in advance of civilization, +and civilization itself has marched across the continent at a rapid +rate. Under these conditions the languages of the various tribes have +received much study. Many extensive works have been published, +embracing grammars and dictionaries; but a far greater number of minor +vocabularies have been collected and very many have been published. In +addition to these, the Bible, in whole or in part, and various religious +books and school books, have been translated into Indian tongues to be +used for purposes of instruction; and newspapers have been published in +the Indian languages. Altogether the literature of these languages and +that relating to them are of vast extent. + +While the materials seem thus to be abundant, the student of Indian +languages finds the subject to be one requiring most thoughtful +consideration, difficulties arising from the following conditions: + +(1) A great number of linguistic stocks or families are discovered. + +(2) The boundaries between the different stocks of languages are not +immediately apparent, from the fact that many tribes of diverse stocks +have had more or less association, and to some extent linguistic +materials have been borrowed, and thus have passed out of the exclusive +possession of cognate peoples. + +(3) Where many peoples, each few in number, are thrown together, an +intertribal language is developed. To a large extent this is gesture +speech; but to a limited extent useful and important words are adopted +by various tribes, and out of this material an intertribal "jargon" is +established. Travelers and all others who do not thoroughly study a +language are far more likely to acquire this jargon speech than the real +speech of the people; and the tendency to base relationship upon such +jargons has led to confusion. + +(4) This tendency to the establishment of intertribal jargons was +greatly accelerated on the advent of the white man, for thereby many +tribes were pushed from their ancestral homes and tribes were mixed with +tribes. As a result, new relations and new industries, especially of +trade, were established, and the new associations of tribe with tribe +and of the Indians with Europeans led very often to the development of +quite elaborate jargon languages. All of these have a tendency to +complicate the study of the Indian tongues by comparative methods. + +The difficulties inherent in the study of languages, together with the +imperfect material and the complicating conditions that have arisen by +the spread of civilization over the country, combine to make the problem +one not readily solved. + +In view of the amount of material on hand, the comparative study of the +languages of North America has been strangely neglected, though perhaps +this is explained by reason of the difficulties which have been pointed +out. And the attempts which have been made to classify them has given +rise to much confusion, for the following reasons: First, later authors +have not properly recognized the work of earlier laborers in the field. +Second, the attempt has more frequently been made to establish an ethnic +classification than a linguistic classification, and linguistic +characteristics have been confused with biotic peculiarities, arts, +habits, customs, and other human activities, so that radical differences +of language have often been ignored and slight differences have been +held to be of primary value. + +The attempts at a classification of these languages and a corresponding +classification of races have led to the development of a complex, mixed, +and inconsistent synonymy, which must first be unraveled and a selection +of standard names made therefrom according to fixed principles. + +It is manifest that until proper rules are recognized by scholars the +establishment of a determinate nomenclature is impossible. It will +therefore be well to set forth the rules that have here been adopted, +together with brief reasons for the same, with the hope that they will +commend themselves to the judgment of other persons engaged in +researches relating to the languages of North America. + +A fixed nomenclature in biology has been found not only to be +advantageous, but to be a prerequisite to progress in research, as the +vast multiplicity of facts, still ever accumulating, would otherwise +overwhelm the scholar. In philological classification fixity of +nomenclature is of corresponding importance; and while the analogies +between linguistic and biotic classification are quite limited, many of +the principles of nomenclature which biologists have adopted having no +application in philology, still in some important particulars the +requirements of all scientific classifications are alike, and though +many of the nomenclatural points met with in biology will not occur in +philology, some of them do occur and may be governed by the same rules. + +Perhaps an ideal nomenclature in biology may some time be established, +as attempts have been made to establish such a system in chemistry; and +possibly such an ideal system may eventually be established in +philology. Be that as it may, the time has not yet come even for its +suggestion. What is now needed is a rule of some kind leading scholars +to use the same terms for the same things, and it would seem to matter +little in the case of linguistic stocks what the nomenclature is, +provided it becomes denotive and universal. + +In treating of the languages of North America it has been suggested that +the names adopted should be the names by which the people recognize +themselves, but this is a rule of impossible application, for where the +branches of a stock diverge very greatly no common name for the people +can be found. Again, it has been suggested that names which are to go +permanently into science should be simple and euphonic. This also is +impossible of application, for simplicity and euphony are largely +questions of personal taste, and he who has studied many languages loses +speedily his idiosyncrasies of likes and dislikes and learns that words +foreign to his vocabulary are not necessarily barbaric. + +Biologists have decided that he who first distinctly characterizes and +names a species or other group shall thereby cause the name thus used to +become permanently affixed, but under certain conditions adapted to a +growing science which is continually revising its classifications. This +law of priority may well be adopted by philologists. + +By the application of the law of priority it will occasionally happen +that a name must be taken which is not wholly unobjectionable or which +could be much improved. But if names may be modified for any reason, the +extent of change that may be wrought in this manner is unlimited, and +such modifications would ultimately become equivalent to the +introduction of new names, and a fixed nomenclature would thereby be +overthrown. The rule of priority has therefore been adopted. + +Permanent biologic nomenclature dates from the time of Linnaeus simply +because this great naturalist established the binominal system and +placed scientific classification upon a sound and enduring basis. As +Linnaeus is to be regarded as the founder of biologic classification, so +Gallatin may be considered the founder of systematic philology relating +to the North American Indians. Before his time much linguistic work had +been accomplished, and scholars owe a lasting debt of gratitude to +Barton, Adelung, Pickering, and others. But Gallatin's work marks an era +in American linguistic science from the fact that he so thoroughly +introduced comparative methods, and because he circumscribed the +boundaries of many families, so that a large part of his work remains +and is still to be considered sound. There is no safe resting place +anterior to Gallatin, because no scholar prior to his time had properly +adopted comparative methods of research, and because no scholar was +privileged to work with so large a body of material. It must further be +said of Gallatin that he had a very clear conception of the task he was +performing, and brought to it both learning and wisdom. Gallatin's work +has therefore been taken as the starting point, back of which we may not +go in the historic consideration of the systematic philology of North +America. The point of departure therefore is the year 1836, when +Gallatin's "Synopsis of Indian Tribes" appeared in vol. 2 of the +Transactions of the American Antiquarian Society. + +It is believed that a name should be simply a denotive word, and that no +advantage can accrue from a descriptive or connotive title. It is +therefore desirable to have the names as simple as possible, consistent +with other and more important considerations. For this reason it has +been found impracticable to recognize as family names designations based +on several distinct terms, such as descriptive phrases, and words +compounded from two or more geographic names. Such phrases and compound +words have been rejected. + +There are many linguistic families in North America, and in a number of +them there are many tribes speaking diverse languages. It is important, +therefore, that some form should be given to the family name by which it +may be distinguished from the name of a single tribe or language. In +many cases some one language within a stock has been taken as the type +and its name given to the entire family; so that the name of a language +and that of the stock to which it belongs are identical. This is +inconvenient and leads to confusion. For such reasons it has been +decided to give each family name the termination "an" or "ian." + +Conforming to the principles thus enunciated, the following rules have +been formulated: + + I. The law of priority relating to the nomenclature of the + systematic philology of the North American tribes shall not extend + to authors whose works are of date anterior to the year 1836. + + II. The name originally given by the founder of a linguistic group + to designate it as a family or stock of languages shall be + permanently retained to the exclusion of all others. + + III. No family name shall be recognized if composed of more than one + word. + + IV. A family name once established shall not be canceled in any + subsequent division of the group, but shall be retained in a + restricted sense for one of its constituent portions. + + V. Family names shall be distinguished as such by the termination + "an" or "ian." + + VI. No name shall be accepted for a linguistic family unless used to + designate a tribe or group of tribes as a linguistic stock. + + VII. No family name shall be accepted unless there is given the + habitat of tribe or tribes to which it is applied. + + VIII. The original orthography of a name shall be rigidly preserved + except as provided for in rule III, and unless a typographical error + is evident. + +The terms "family" and "stock" are here applied interchangeably to a +group of languages that are supposed to be cognate. + +A single language is called a stock or family when it is not found to be +cognate with any other language. Languages are said to be cognate when +such relations between them are found that they are supposed to have +descended from a common ancestral speech. The evidence of cognation is +derived exclusively from the vocabulary. Grammatic similarities are not +supposed to furnish evidence of cognation, but to be phenomena, in part +relating to stage of culture and in part adventitious. It must be +remembered that extreme peculiarities of grammar, like the vocal +mutations of the Hebrew or the monosyllabic separation of the Chinese, +have not been discovered among Indian tongues. It therefore becomes +necessary in the classification of Indian languages into families to +neglect grammatic structure, and to consider lexical elements only. But +this statement must be clearly understood. It is postulated that in the +growth of languages new words are formed by combination, and that these +new words change by attrition to secure economy of utterance, and also +by assimilation (analogy) for economy of thought. In the comparison of +languages for the purposes of systematic philology it often becomes +necessary to dismember compounded words for the purpose of comparing the +more primitive forms thus obtained. The paradigmatic words considered in +grammatic treatises may often be the very words which should be +dissected to discover in their elements primary affinities. But the +comparison is still lexic, not grammatic. + +A lexic comparison is between vocal elements; a grammatic comparison is +between grammatic methods, such, for example, as gender systems. The +classes into which things are relegated by distinction of gender may be +animate and inanimate, and the animate may subsequently be divided into +male and female, and these two classes may ultimately absorb, in part at +least, inanimate things. The growth of a system of genders may take +another course. The animate and inanimate may be subdivided into the +standing, the sitting, and the lying, or into the moving, the erect and +the reclined; or, still further, the superposed classification may be +based upon the supposed constitution of things, as the fleshy, the +woody, the rocky, the earthy, the watery. Thus the number of genders may +increase, while further on in the history of a language the genders may +decrease so as almost to disappear. All of these characteristics are in +part adventitious, but to a large extent the gender is a phenomenon of +growth, indicating the stage to which the language has attained. A +proper case system may not have been established in a language by the +fixing of case particles, or, having been established, it may change by +the increase or diminution of the number of cases. A tense system also +has a beginning, a growth, and a decadence. A mode system is variable in +the various stages of the history of a language. In like manner a +pronominal system undergoes changes. Particles may be prefixed, infixed, +or affixed in compounded words, and which one of these methods will +finally prevail can be determined only in the later stage of growth. All +of these things are held to belong to the grammar of a language and to +be grammatic methods, distinct from lexical elements. + +With terms thus defined, languages are supposed to be cognate when +fundamental similarities are discovered in their lexical elements. When +the members of a family of languages are to be classed in subdivisions +and the history of such languages investigated, grammatic +characteristics become of primary importance. The words of a language +change by the methods described, but the fundamental elements or roots +are more enduring. Grammatic methods also change, perhaps even more +rapidly than words, and the changes may go on to such an extent that +primitive methods are entirely lost, there being no radical grammatic +elements to be preserved. Grammatic structure is but a phase or accident +of growth, and not a primordial element of language. The roots of a +language are its most permanent characteristics, and while the words +which are formed from them may change so as to obscure their elements or +in some cases even to lose them, it seems that they are never lost from +all, but can be recovered in large part. The grammatic structure or plan +of a language is forever changing, and in this respect the language may +become entirely transformed. + + + * * * * * + + + LITERATURE RELATING TO THE CLASSIFICATION + + OF INDIAN LANGUAGES. + + +While the literature relating to the languages of North America is very +extensive, that which relates to their classification is much less +extensive. For the benefit of future students in this line it is thought +best to present a concise account of such literature, or at least so +much as has been consulted in the preparation of this paper. + + 1836. Gallatin (Albert). + + A synopsis of the Indian tribes within the United States east of the + Rocky Mountains, and in the British and Russian possessions in North + America. In Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian + Society (Archaeologia Americana) Cambridge, 1836, vol. 2. + +The larger part of the volume consists of Gallatin's paper. A short +chapter is devoted to general observations, including certain historical +data, and the remainder to the discussion of linguistic material and the +affinities of the various tribes mentioned. Vocabularies of many of the +families are appended. Twenty-eight linguistic divisions are recognized +in the general table of the tribes. Some of these divisions are purely +geographic, such as the tribes of Salmon River, Queen Charlotte's +Island, etc. Vocabularies from these localities were at hand, but of +their linguistic relations the author was not sufficiently assured. Most +of the linguistic families recognized by Gallatin were defined with much +precision. Not all of his conclusions are to be accepted in the presence +of the data now at hand, but usually they were sound, as is attested by +the fact that they have constituted the basis for much classificatory +work since his time. + +The primary, or at least the ostensible, purpose of the colored map +which accompanies Gallatin's paper was, as indicated by its title, to +show the distribution of the tribes, and accordingly their names appear +upon it, and not the names of the linguistic families. Nevertheless, it +is practically a map of the linguistic families as determined by the +author, and it is believed to be the first attempted for the area +represented. Only eleven of the twenty-eight families named in this +table appear, and these represent the families with which he was best +acquainted. As was to be expected from the early period at which the map +was constructed, much of the western part of the United States was left +uncolored. Altogether the map illustrates well the state of knowledge of +the time. + + 1840. Bancroft (George). + + History of the colonization of the United States, Boston. 1840, + vol. 3. + +In Chapter XXII of this volume the author gives a brief synopsis of the +Indian tribes east of the Mississippi, under a linguistic +classification, and adds a brief account of the character and methods of +Indian languages. A linguistic map of the region is incorporated, which +in general corresponds with the one published by Gallatin in 1836. A +notable addition to the Gallatin map is the inclusion of the Uchees in +their proper locality. Though considered a distinct family by Gallatin, +this tribe does not appear upon his map. Moreover, the Choctaws and +Muskogees, which appear as separate families upon Gallatin's map (though +believed by that author to belong to the same family), are united upon +Bancroft's map under the term Mobilian. + +The linguistic families treated of are, I. Algonquin, II. Sioux or +Dahcota, III. Huron-Iroquois, IV. Catawba, V. Cherokee, VI. Uchee, VII. +Natchez, VIII. Mobilian. + + 1841. Scouler (John). + + Observations of the indigenous tribes of the northwest coast of + America. In Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London. + London, 1841, vol. 11. + +The chapter cited is short, but long enough to enable the author to +construct a very curious classification of the tribes of which he +treats. In his account Scouler is guided chiefly, to use his own words, +"by considerations founded on their physical character, manners and +customs, and on the affinities of their languages." As the linguistic +considerations are mentioned last, so they appear to be the least +weighty of his "considerations." + +Scouler's definition of a family is very broad indeed, and in his +"Northern Family," which is a branch of his "Insular Group," he includes +such distinct linguistic stocks as "all the Indian tribes in the Russian +territory," the Queen Charlotte Islanders, Koloshes, Ugalentzes, Atnas, +Kolchans, Ken['a][:i]es, Tun Ghaase, Haidahs, and Chimmesyans. His +Nootka-Columbian family is scarcely less incongruous, and it is evident +that the classification indicated is only to a comparatively slight +extent linguistic. + + 1846. Hale (Horatio). + + United States exploring expedition, during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, + 1841, 1842, under the command of Charles Wilkes, U.S. Navy, vol. 6, + ethnography and philology. Philadelphia, 1846. + +In addition to a large amount of ethnographic data derived from the +Polynesian Islands, Micronesian Islands, Australia, etc., more than +one-half of this important volume is devoted to philology, a large share +relating to the tribes of northwestern America. + +The vocabularies collected by Hale, and the conclusions derived by him +from study of them, added much to the previous knowledge of the +languages of these tribes. His conclusions and classification were in +the main accepted by Gallatin in his linguistic writings of 1848. + + 1846. Latham (Robert Gordon). + + Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnography of North America. In + Proceedings of the Philological Society of London. London, 1816, + vol. 2. + +In this article, which was read before the Philological Society, January +24, 1845, a large number of North American languages are examined and +their affinities discussed in support of the two following postulates +made at the beginning of the paper: First, "No American language has an +isolated position when compared with the other tongues en masse rather +than with the language of any particular class;" second, "The affinities +between the language of the New World, as determined by their +_vocabularies_, is not less real than that inferred from the analogies +of their _grammatical structure_." The author's conclusions are that +both statements are substantiated by the evidence presented. The paper +contains no new family names. + + 1847. Prichard (James Cowles). + + Researches into the physical history of mankind (third edition), vol. + 5, containing researches into the history of the Oceanic and of the + American nations. London, 1847. + +It was the purpose of this author, as avowed by himself, to determine +whether the races of men are the cooffspring of a single stock or have +descended respectively from several original families. Like other +authors on this subject, his theory of what should constitute a race was +not clearly defined. The scope of the inquiry required the consideration +of a great number of subjects and led to the accumulation of a vast body +of facts. In volume 5 the author treats of the American Indians, and in +connection with the different tribes has something to say of their +languages. No attempt at an original classification is made, and in the +main the author follows Gallatin's classification and adopts his +conclusions. + + 1848. Gallatin (Albert). + + Hale's Indians of Northwest America, and vocabularies of North + America, with an introduction. In Transactions of the American + Ethnological Society, New York, 1848, vol. 2. + +The introduction consists of a number of chapters, as follows: First, +Geographical notices and Indian means of subsistence; second, Ancient +semi-civilization of New Mexico, Rio Gila and its vicinity; third, +Philology; fourth, Addenda and miscellaneous. In these are brought +together much valuable information, and many important deductions are +made which illustrate Mr. Gallatin's great acumen. The classification +given is an amplification of that adopted in 1836, and contains changes +and additions. The latter mainly result from a consideration of the +material supplied by Mr. Hale, or are simply taken from his work. + +The groups additional to those contained in the Archaeologia Americana +are: + + 1. Arrapahoes. + 2. Jakon. + 3. Kalapuya. + 4. Kitunaha. + 5. Lutuami. + 6. Palainih. + 7. Sahaptin. + 8. Selish (Tsihaili-Selish). + 9. Saste. + 10. Waiilatpu. + + 1848, Latham (Robert Gordon). + + On the languages of the Oregon Territory. In Journal of the + Ethnological Society of London, Edinburgh, 1848, vol. 1. + +This paper was read before the Ethnological Society on the 11th of +December. The languages noticed are those that lie between "Russian +America and New California," of which the author aims to give an +exhaustive list. He discusses the value of the groups to which these +languages have been assigned, viz, Athabascan and Nootka-Columbian, and +finds that they have been given too high value, and that they are only +equivalent to the primary subdivisions of _stocks_, like the Gothic, +Celtic, and Classical, rather than to the stocks themselves. He further +finds that the Athabascan, the Kolooch, the Nootka-Columbian, and the +Cadiak groups are subordinate members of one large and important +class--the Eskimo. + +No new linguistic groups are presented. + + 1848. Latham (Robert Gordon). + + On the ethnography of Russian America. In Journal of the Ethnological + Society of London, Edinburgh, 1848, vol. 1. + +This essay was read before the Ethnological Society February 19, 1845. +Brief notices are given of the more important tribes, and the languages +are classed in two groups, the Eskimaux and the Kolooch. Each of these +groups is found to have affinities-- + +(1) With the Athabascan tongues, and perhaps equal affinities. + +(2) Each has affinities with the Oregon languages, and each perhaps +equally. + +(3) Each has definite affinities with the languages of New California, +and each perhaps equal ones. + +(4) Each has miscellaneous affinities with all the other tongues of +North and South America. + + 1848. Berghaus (Heinrich). + + Physikalischer Atlas oder Sammlung von Karten, auf denen die + hauptsaechlichsten erscheinungen der anorganischen und organischen + Natur nach ihrer geographischen Verbreitung und Vertheilung bildlich + dargestellt sind. Zweiter Band, Gotha, 1848. + +This, the first edition of this well known atlas, contains, among other +maps, an ethnographic map of North America, made in 1845. It is based, +as is stated, upon material derived from Gallatin, Humboldt, Clavigero, +Hervas, Vater, and others. So far as the eastern part of the United +States is concerned it is largely a duplication of Gallatin's map of +1836, while in the western region a certain amount of new material is +incorporated. + +1852. In the edition of 1852 the ethnographic map bears date of 1851. +Its eastern portion is substantially a copy of the earlier edition, but +its western half is materially changed, chiefly in accordance with the +knowledge supplied by Hall in 1848. + +Map number 72 of the last edition of Berghaus by no means marks an +advance upon the edition of 1852. Apparently the number of families is +much reduced, but it is very difficult to interpret the meaning of the +author, who has attempted on the same map to indicate linguistic +divisions and tribal habitats with the result that confusion is made +worse confounded. + + 1853. Gallatin (Albert). + + Classification of the Indian Languages; a letter inclosing a table of + generic Indian Families of languages. In Information respecting the + History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian Tribes of the United + States, by Henry E. Schoolcraft. Philadelphia, 1853, vol. 3. + +This short paper by Gallatin consists of a letter addressed to W. +Medill, Commissioner of Indian Affairs, requesting his cooperation in an +endeavor to obtain vocabularies to assist in a more complete study of +the grammar and structure of the languages of the Indians of North +America. It is accompanied by a "Synopsis of Indian Tribes," giving the +families and tribes so far as known. In the main the classification is a +repetition of that of 1848, but it differs from that in a number of +particulars. Two of the families of 1848 do not appear in this paper, +viz, Arapaho and Kinai. Queen Charlotte Island, employed as a family +name in 1848, is placed under the Wakash family, while the Skittagete +language, upon which the name Queen Charlotte Island was based in 1848, +is here given as a family designation for the language spoken at "Sitka, +bet. 52 and 59 lat." The following families appear which are not +contained in the list of 1848: + + 1. Cumanches. + 2. Gros Ventres. + 3. Kaskaias. + 4. Kiaways. + 5. Natchitoches. + 6. Pani, Towiacks. + 7. Ugaljachmatzi. + + 1853. Gibbs (George). + + Observations on some of the Indian dialects of northern California. In + Information respecting the History, Condition, and Prospects of the + Indian tribes of the United States, by Henry E. Schoolcraft. + Philadelphia, 1853, vol. 3. + +The "Observations" are introductory to a series of vocabularies +collected in northern California, and treat of the method employed in +collecting them and of the difficulties encountered. They also contain +notes on the tribes speaking the several languages as well as on the +area covered. There is comparatively little of a classificatory nature, +though in one instance the name Quoratem is proposed as a proper one for +the family "should it be held one." + + 1854. Latham (Robert Gordon). + + On the languages of New California. In Proceedings of the Philological + Society of London for 1852 and 1853. London, 1854, vol. 6. + +Read before the Philological Society, May 13, 1853. A number of +languages are examined in this paper for the purpose of determining the +stocks to which they belong and the mutual affinities of the latter. +Among the languages mentioned are the Saintskla, Umkwa, Lutuami, Paduca, +Athabascan, Dieguno, and a number of the Mission languages. + + 1855. Lane (William Carr). + + Letter on affinities of dialects in New Mexico. In Information + respecting the History, Condition, and Prospects of the Indian + tribes of the United States, by Henry R. Schoolcraft. Philadelphia, + 1855, vol. 5. + +The letter forms half a page of printed matter. The gist of the +communication is in effect that the author has heard it said that the +Indians of certain pueblos speak three different languages, which he has +heard called, respectively, (1) Chu-cha-cas and Kes-whaw-hay; (2) +E-nagh-magh; (3) Tay-waugh. This can hardly be called a classification, +though the arrangement of the pueblos indicated by Lane is quoted at +length by Keane in the Appendix to Stanford's Compendium. + + 1856. Latham (Robert Gordon). + + On the languages of Northern, Western, and Central America. In + Transactions of the Philological Society of London, for 1856. London + [1857?]. + +This paper was read before the Philological Society May 9, 1856, and is +stated to be "a supplement to two well known contributions to American +philology by the late A. Gallatin." + +So far as classification of North American languages goes, this is +perhaps the most important paper of Latham's, as in it a number of new +names are proposed for linguistic groups, such as Copeh for the +Sacramento River tribes, Ehnik for the Karok tribes, Mariposa Group and +Mendocino Group for the Yokut and Pomo tribes respectively, Moquelumne +for the Mutsun, Pujuni for the Meidoo, Weitspek for the Eurocs. + + 1856. Turner (William Wadden). + + Report upon the Indian tribes, by Lieut. A. W. Whipple, Thomas + Ewbank, esq., and Prof. William W. Turner, Washington, D.C., + 1855. In Reports of Explorations and Surveys to ascertain the most + practicable and economical route for a railroad from the Mississippi + to the Pacific Ocean. Washington, 1856, vol. 3. part 3. + +Chapter V of the above report is headed "Vocabularies of North American +Languages," and is by Turner, as is stated in a foot-note. Though the +title page of Part III is dated 1855, the chapter by Turner was not +issued till 1856, the date of the full volume, as is stated by Turner +on page 84. The following are the vocabularies given, with their +arrangement in families: + + I. Delaware. } + II. Shawnee. } Algonkin. + III. Choctaw. + IV. Kichai. } + V. Hu['e]co. } Pawnee? + VI. Caddo. + VII. Comanche. } + VIII. Chemehuevi. } Shoshonee. + IX. Cahuillo. } + X. Kioway. + XI. Navajo. } + XII. Pinal Leno. } Apache. + XIII. Kiwomi. } + XIV. Cochitemi. } Keres. + XV. Acoma. } + XVI. Zuni. + XVII. Pima. + XVIII. Cuchan. } + XIX. Coco-Maricopa. } + XX. Mojave. } Yuma. + XXI. Diegeno. } + +Several of the family names, viz, Keres, Kiowa, Yuma, and Zuni, have +been adopted under the rules formulated above. + + 1858. Buschmann (Johann Carl Eduard). + + Die Voelker und Sprachen Neu-Mexiko's und der Westseite des britischen + Nordamerika's, dargestellt von Hrn. Buschmann. In Abhandlungen (aus + dem Jahre 1857) der koeniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu + Berlin. Berlin, 1858. + +This work contains a historic review of early discoveries in New Mexico +and of the tribes living therein, with such vocabularies as were +available at the time. On pages 315-414 the tribes of British America, +from about latitude 54 deg. to 60 deg., are similarly treated, the various +discoveries being reviewed; also those on the North Pacific coast. Much +of the material should have been inserted in the volume of 1859 (which +was prepared in 1854), to which cross reference is frequently made, and +to which it stands in the nature of a supplement. + + 1859. Buschmann (Johann Carl Eduard). + + Die Spuren der aztekischen Sprache im noerdlichen Mexico und hoeheren + amerikanischen Norden. Zugleich eine Musterung der Voelker und + Sprachen des noerdlichen Mexico's und der Westseite Nordamerika's von + Guadalaxara an bis zum Eismeer. In Abhandlungen aus dem Jahre 1854 + der koeniglichen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin. Berlin, 1859. + +The above, forming a second supplemental volume of the Transactions for +1854, is an extensive compilation of much previous literature treating +of the Indian tribes from the Arctic Ocean southward to Guadalajara, and +bears specially upon the Aztec language and its traces in the languages +of the numerous tribes scattered along the Pacific Ocean and inland +to the high plains. A large number of vocabularies and a vast amount +of linguistic material are here brought together and arranged in +a comprehensive manner to aid in the study attempted. In his +classification of the tribes east of the Rocky Mountains, Buschmann +largely followed Gallatin. His treatment of those not included in +Gallatin's paper is in the main original. Many of the results obtained +may have been considered bold at the time of publication, but recent +philological investigations give evidence of the value of many of the +author's conclusions. + + 1859. Kane (Paul). + + Wanderings of an artist among the Indians of North America from Canada + to Vancouver's Island and Oregon through the Hudson's Bay Company's + territory and back again. London, 1859. + +The interesting account of the author's travels among the Indians, +chiefly in the Northwest, and of their habits, is followed by a four +page supplement, giving the names, locations, and census of the tribes +of the Northwest coast. They are classified by language into Chymseyan, +including the Nass, Chymseyans, Skeena and Sabassas Indians, of whom +twenty-one tribes are given; Ha-eelb-zuk or Ballabola, including the +Milbank Sound Indians, with nine tribes; Klen-ekate, including twenty +tribes; Hai-dai, including the Kygargey and Queen Charlotte's Island +Indians, nineteen tribes being enumerated; and Qua-colth, with +twenty-nine tribes. No statement of the origin of these tables is given, +and they reappear, with no explanation, in Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, +volume V, pp. 487-489. + +In his Queen Charlotte Islands, 1870, Dawson publishes the part of this +table relating to the Haida, with the statement that he received it from +Dr. W. F. Tolmie. The census was made in 1836-'41 by the late Mr. John +Work, who doubtless was the author of the more complete tables published +by Kane and Schoolcraft. + + 1862. Latham (Robert Gordon). + + Elements of comparative philology. London, 1862. + +The object of this volume is, as the author states in his preface, "to +lay before the reader the chief facts and the chief trains of reasoning +in Comparative Philology." Among the great mass of material accumulated +for the purpose a share is devoted to the languages of North America. +The remarks under these are often taken verbatim from the author's +earlier papers, to which reference has been made above, and the family +names and classification set forth in them are substantially repeated. + + 1862. Hayden (Ferdinand Vandeveer). + + Contributions to the ethnography and philology of the Indian tribes of + the Missouri Valley. Philadelphia, 1862. + +This is a valuable contribution to our knowledge of the Missouri River +tribes, made at a time when the information concerning them was none too +precise. The tribes treated of are classified as follows: + + I. Knisteneaux, or Crees. } + II. Blackfeet. } Algonkin Group, A. + III. Shyennes. } + IV. Arapohos. } Arapoho Group, B. + V. Atsinas. } + VI. Pawnees. } Pawnee Group, C. + VII. Arikaras. } + VIII. Dakotas. } + IX. Assiniboins. } + X. Crows. } + XI. Minnitarees. } Dakota Group, D. + XII. Mandans. } + XIII. Omahas. } + XIV. Iowas. } + + 1864. Orozco y Berra (Manuel). + + Geografia de las Lenguas y Carta Etnografica de Mexico Precedidas de + un ensayo de clasificacion de las mismas lenguas y de apuntes para + las inmigraciones de las tribus. Mexico, 1864. + +The work is divided into three parts. (1) Tentative classification of +the languages of Mexico; (2) notes on the immigration of the tribes of +Mexico; (3) geography of the languages of Mexico. + +The author states that he has no knowledge whatever of the languages he +treats of. All he attempts to do is to summarize the opinions of others. +His authorities were (1) writers on native grammars; (2) missionaries; +(3) persons who are reputed to be versed in such matters. He professes +to have used his own judgment only when these authorities left him free +to do so. + +His stated method in compiling the ethnographic map was to place before +him the map of a certain department, examine all his authorities bearing +on that department, and to mark with a distinctive color all localities +said to belong to a particular language. When this was done he drew a +boundary line around the area of that language. Examination of the map +shows that he has partly expressed on it the classification of languages +as given in the first part of his text, and partly limited himself to +indicating the geographic boundaries of languages, without, however, +giving the boundaries of all the languages mentioned in his lists. + + 1865. Pimentel (Francisco). + + Cuadro Descriptivo y Comparativo de las Lenguas Indigenas de Mexico. + Mexico, 1865. + +According to the introduction this work is divided into three parts: (1) +descriptive; (2) comparative; (3) critical. + +The author divides the treatment of each language into (1) its +mechanism; (2) its dictionary; (3) its grammar. By "mechanism" he means +pronunciation and composition; by "dictionary" he means the commonest or +most notable words. + +In the case of each language he states the localities where it is +spoken, giving a short sketch of its history, the explanation of its +etymology, and a list of such writers on that language as he has become +acquainted with. Then follows: "mechanism, dictionary, and grammar." +Next he enumerates its dialects if there are any, and compares specimens +of them when he is able. He gives the Our Father when he can. + +Volume I (1862) contains introduction and twelve languages. Volume II +(1865) contains fourteen groups of languages, a vocabulary of the Opata +language, and an appendix treating of the Comanche, the Coahuilteco, and +various languages of upper California. + +Volume III (announced in preface of Volume II) is to contain the +"comparative part" (to be treated in the same "mixed" method as the +"descriptive part"), and a scientific classification of all the +languages spoken in Mexico. + +In the "critical part" (apparently dispersed through the other two +parts) the author intends to pass judgment on the merits of the +languages of Mexico, to point out their good qualities and their +defects. + + 1870. Dall (William Healey). + + On the distribution of the native tribes of Alaska and the adjacent + territory. In Proceedings of the American Association for the + Advancement of Science. Cambridge, 1870, vol. 18. + +In this important paper is presented much interesting information +concerning the inhabitants of Alaska and adjacent territories. The +natives are divided into two groups, the Indians of the interior, and +the inhabitants of the coast, or Esquimaux. The latter are designated by +the term Orarians, which are composed of three lesser groups, Eskimo, +Aleutians, and Tuski. The Orarians are distinguished, first, by their +language; second, by their distribution; third, by their habits; fourth, +by their physical characteristics. + + 1870. Dall (William Healey). + + Alaska and its Resources. Boston, 1870. + +The classification followed is practically the same as is given in the +author's article in the Proceedings of the American Association for the +Advancement of Science. + + 1877. Dall (William Healey). + + Tribes of the extreme northwest. In Contributions to North American + Ethnology (published by United States Geographical and Geological + Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region). Washington, 1877, vol. 1. + +This is an amplification of the paper published in the Proceedings of +the American Association, as above cited. The author states that +"numerous additions and corrections, as well as personal observations of +much before taken at second hand, have placed it in my power to enlarge +and improve my original arrangement." + +In this paper the Orarians are divided into "two well marked groups," +the Innuit, comprising all the so-called Eskimo and Tuskis, and the +Aleuts. The paper proper is followed by an appendix by Gibbs and Dall, +in which are presented a series of vocabularies from the northwest, +including dialects of the Tlinkit and Haida nations, T'sim-si-ans, and +others. + + 1877. Gibbs (George). + + Tribes of Western Washington and Northwestern Oregon. In Contributions + to North American Ethnology. Washington, 1887, vol. 1. + +This is a valuable article, and gives many interesting particulars of +the tribes of which it treats. References are here and there made to the +languages of the several tribes, with, however, no attempt at their +classification. A table follows the report, in which is given by Dall, +after Gibbs, a classification of the tribes mentioned by Gibbs. Five +families are mentioned, viz: N[-u]tka, Sahaptin, Tinneh, Selish, and +T'sin[-u]k. The comparative vocabularies follow Part II. + + 1877. Powers (Stephen). + + Tribes of California. In Contributions to North American Ethnology. + Washington, 1877, vol. 3. + +The extended paper on the Californian tribes which makes up the bulk of +this volume is the most important contribution to the subject ever made. +The author's unusual opportunities for personal observation among these +tribes were improved to the utmost and the result is a comparatively +full and comprehensive account of their habits and character. + +Here and there are allusions to the languages spoken, with reference to +the families to which the tribes belong. No formal classification is +presented. + + 1877. Powell (John Wesley). + + Appendix. Linguistics edited by J. W. Powell. In Contributions to + North American Ethnology. Washington, 1877, vol. 3. + +This appendix consists of a series of comparative vocabularies collected +by Powers, Gibbs and others, classified into linguistic families, as +follows: + + Family. + 1. K['a]-rok. + 2. Y['u]-rok. + 3. Chim-a-r['i]-ko. + 4. Wish-osk. + 5. Y['u]-ki. + 6. P['o]mo. + 7. Win-t[-u]n[']. + 8. M[-u]t[']-s[-u]n. + 9. Santa Barbara. + 10. Y['o]-kuts. + 11. Mai[']-du. + 12. A-cho-m[^a][']-wi. + 13. Sha['s]-ta. + + 1877. Gatschet (Albert Samuel). + + Indian languages of the Pacific States and Territories. In Magazine of + American History. New York, 1877, vol. 1. + +After some remarks concerning the nature of language and of the special +characteristics of Indian languages, the author gives a synopsis of the +languages of the Pacific region. The families mentioned are: + + 1. Sh['o]shoni. 15. Cahrok. + 2. Yuma. 16. Tolewa. + 3. Pima. 17. Shasta. + 4. Santa Barbara. 18. Pit River. + 5. Mutsun. 19. Klamath. + 6. Yocut. 20. Tinn['e]. + 7. Meewoc. 21. Yakon. + 8. Meidoo. 22. Cayuse. + 9. Wintoon. 23. Kalapuya. + 10. Yuka. 24. Chinook. + 11. Pomo. 25. Sahaptin. + 12. Wishosk. 26. Selish. + 13. Eurok. 27. Nootka. + 14. Weits-pek. 28. Kootenai. + +This is an important paper, and contains notices of several new stocks, +derived from a study of the material furnished by Powers. + +The author advocates the plan of using a system of nomenclature similar +in nature to that employed in zoology in the case of generic and +specific names, adding after the name of the tribe the family to which +it belongs; thus: Warm Springs, Sahaptin. + + 1878. Powell (John Wesley). + + The nationality of the Pueblos. In the Rocky Mountain Presbyterian. + Denver, November, 1878. + +This is a half-column article, the object of which is to assign the +several Pueblos to their proper stocks. A paragraph is devoted to +contradicting the popular belief that the Pueblos are in some way +related to the Aztecs. No vocabularies are given or cited, though the +classification is stated to be a linguistic one. + + 1878. Keane (Augustus H). + + Appendix. Ethnography and philology of America. In Stanford's + Compendium of Geography and Travel, edited and extended by + H. W. Bates. London, 1878. + +In the appendix are given, first, some of the more general +characteristics and peculiarities of Indian languages, followed by a +classification of all the tribes of North America, after which is given +an alphabetical list of American tribes and languages, with their +habitats and the stock to which they belong. + +The classification is compiled from many sources, and although it +contains many errors and inconsistencies, it affords on the whole a good +general idea of prevalent views on the subject. + + 1880. Powell (John Wesley). + + Pueblo Indians. In the American Naturalist. Philadelphia, 1880, + vol. 14. + +This is a two-page article in which is set forth a classification of the +Pueblo Indians from linguistic considerations. The Pueblos are divided +into four families or stocks, viz: + + 1. Sh['i]numo. + 2. Zunian. + 3. K['e]ran. + 4. T['e]wan. + +Under the several stocks is given a list of those who have collected +vocabularies of these languages and a reference to their publication. + + 1880. Eells (Myron). + + The Twana language of Washington Territory. In the American + Antiquarian. Chicago, 1880-'81, vol. 3. + +This is a brief article--two and a half pages--on the Twana, Clallam, +and Chemakum Indians. The author finds, upon a comparison of +vocabularies, that the Chemakum language has little in common with +its neighbors. + + 1885. Dall (William Healey). + + The native tribes of Alaska. In Proceedings of the American + Association for the Advancement of Science, thirty-fourth meeting, + held at Ann Arbor, Mich., August, 1885. Salem, 1886. + +This paper is a timely contribution to the subject of the Alaska tribes, +and carries it from the point at which the author left it in 1869 to +date, briefly summarizing the several recent additions to knowledge. It +ends with a geographical classification of the Innuit and Indian tribes +of Alaska, with estimates of their numbers. + + 1885. Bancroft (Hubert Howe). + + The works of Hubert Howe Bancroft, vol. 3: the native races, vol. 3, + myths and languages. San Francisco, 1882. + + [Transcriber's Note: + Vols. 1-5 collectively are "The Native Races"; vol. 3 is _Myths and + Languages_.] + +In the chapter on that subject the languages are classified by divisions +which appear to correspond to groups, families, tribes, and dialects. + +The classification does not, however, follow any consistent plan, and is +in parts unintelligible. + + 1882. Gatschet (Albert Samuel). + + Indian languages of the Pacific States and Territories and of the + Pueblos of New Mexico. In the Magazine of American History. New + York, 1882, vol. 8. + +This paper is in the nature of a supplement to a previous one in the +same magazine above referred to. It enlarges further on several of the +stocks there considered, and, as the title indicates, treats also of the +Pueblo languages. The families mentioned are: + + 1. Chimariko. + 2. Washo. + 3. Y['a]kona. + 4. Say['u]skla. + 5. K['u]sa. + 6. Takilma. + 7. Rio Grande Pueblo. + 8. Kera. + 9. Zuni. + + 1883. Hale (Horatio). + + Indian migrations, as evidenced by language. In The American + Antiquarian and Oriental Journal. Chicago, 1888, vol. 5. + +In connection with the object of this paper--the study of Indian +migrations--several linguistic stocks are mentioned, and the linguistic +affinities of a number of tribes are given. The stocks mentioned are: + + Huron-Cherokee. + Dakota. + Algonkin. + Chahta-Muskoki. + + 1885. Tolmie (W. Fraser) and Dawson (George M.) + + Comparative vocabularies of the Indian tribes of British Columbia, + with a map illustrating distribution (Geological and Natural History + Survey of Canada). Montreal, 1884. + +The vocabularies presented constitute an important contribution to +linguistic science. They represent "one or more dialects of every Indian +language spoken on the Pacific slope from the Columbia River north to +the Tshilkat River, and beyond, in Alaska; and from the outermost +sea-board to the main continental divide in the Rocky Mountains." +A colored map shows the area occupied by each linguistic family. + + + * * * * * + + + LINGUISTIC MAP. + + +In 1836 Gallatin conferred a great boon upon linguistic students by +classifying all the existing material relating to this subject. Even in +the light of the knowledge of the present day his work is found to rest +upon a sound basis. The material of Gallatin's time, however, was too +scanty to permit of more than an outline of the subject. Later writers +have contributed to the work, and the names of Latham, Turner, Prichard, +Buschmann, Hale, Gatschet, and others are connected with important +classificatory results. + +The writer's interest in linguistic work and the inception of a plan for +a linguistic classification of Indian languages date back about 20 +years, to a time when he was engaged in explorations in the West. Being +brought into contact with many tribes, it was possible to collect a +large amount of original material. Subsequently, when the Bureau of +Ethnology was organized, this store was largely increased through the +labors of others. Since then a very large body of literature published +in Indian languages has been accumulated, and a great number of +vocabularies have been gathered by the Bureau assistants and by +collaborators in various parts of the country. The results of a study of +all this material, and of much historical data, which necessarily enters +largely into work of this character, appear in the accompanying map. + +The contributions to the subject during the last fifty years have been +so important, and the additions to the material accessible to the +student of Gallatin's time have been so large, that much of the reproach +which deservedly attached to American scholars because of the neglect of +American linguistics has been removed. The field is a vast one, however, +and the workers are comparatively few. Moreover, opportunities for +collecting linguistic material are growing fewer day by day, as tribes +are consolidated upon reservations, as they become civilized, and as the +older Indians, who alone are skilled in their language, die, leaving, it +may be, only a few imperfect vocabularies as a basis for future study. +History has bequeathed to us the names of many tribes, which became +extinct in early colonial times, of whose language not a hint is left +and whose linguistic relations must ever remain unknown. + +It is vain to grieve over neglected opportunities unless their +contemplation stimulates us to utilize those at hand. There are yet many +gaps to be filled, even in so elementary a part of the study as the +classification of the tribes by language. As to the detailed study of +the different linguistic families, the mastery and analysis of the +languages composing them, and their comparison with one another and with +the languages of other families, only a beginning has been made. + +After the above statement it is hardly necessary to add that the +accompanying map does not purport to represent final results. On the +contrary, it is to be regarded as tentative, setting forth in visible +form the results of investigation up to the present time, as a guide and +aid to future effort. + +Each of the colors or patterns upon the map represents a distinct +linguistic family, the total number of families contained in the whole +area being fifty-eight. It is believed that the families of languages +represented upon the map can not have sprung from a common source; they +are as distinct from one another in their vocabularies and apparently in +their origin as from the Aryan or the Scythian families. Unquestionably, +future and more critical study will result in the fusion of some of +these families. As the means for analysis and comparison accumulate, +resemblances now hidden will be brought to light, and relationships +hitherto unsuspected will be shown to exist. Such a result may be +anticipated with the more certainty inasmuch as the present +classification has been made upon a conservative plan. Where +relationships between families are suspected, but can not be +demonstrated by convincing evidence, it has been deemed wiser not to +unite them, but to keep them apart until more material shall have +accumulated and proof of a more convincing character shall have been +brought forward. While some of the families indicated on the map may in +future be united to other families, and the number thus be reduced, +there seems to be no ground for the belief that the total of the +linguistic families of this country will be materially diminished, at +least under the present methods of linguistic analysis, for there is +little reason to doubt that, as the result of investigation in the +field, there will be discovered tribes speaking languages not +classifiable under any of the present families; thus the decrease in the +total by reason of consolidation may be compensated by a corresponding +increase through discovery. It may even be possible that some of the +similarities used in combining languages into families may, on further +study, prove to be adventitious, and the number may be increased +thereby. To which side the numerical balance will fall remains for the +future to decide. + +As stated above, all the families occupy the same basis of dissimilarity +from one another--i.e., none of them are related--and consequently no +two of them are either more or less alike than any other two, except +in so far as mere coincidences and borrowed material may be said to +constitute likeness and relationship. Coincidences in the nature of +superficial word resemblances are common in all languages of the world. +No matter how widely separated geographically two families of languages +may be, no matter how unlike their vocabularies, how distinct their +origin, some words may always be found which appear upon superficial +examination to indicate relationship. There is not a single Indian +linguistic family, for instance, which does not contain words similar +in sound, and more rarely similar in both sound and meaning, to words +in English, Chinese, Hebrew, and other languages. Not only do such +resemblances exist, but they have been discovered and pointed out, not +as mere adventitious similarities, but as proof of genetic relationship. +Borrowed linguistic material also appears in every family, tempting the +unwary investigator into making false analogies and drawing erroneous +conclusions. Neither coincidences nor borrowed material, however, can be +properly regarded as evidence of cognation. + +While occupying the same plane of genetic dissimilarity, the families +are by no means alike as regards either the extent of territory +occupied, the number of tribes grouped under them respectively, or the +number of languages and dialects of which they are composed. Some of +them cover wide areas, whose dimensions are stated in terms of latitude +and longitude rather than by miles. Others occupy so little space that +the colors representing them are hardly discernible upon the map. Some +of them contain but a single tribe; others are represented by scores of +tribes. In the case of a few, the term "family" is commensurate with +language, since there is but one language and no dialects. In the case +of others, their tribes spoke several languages, so distinct from one +another as to be for the most part mutually unintelligible, and the +languages shade into many dialects more or less diverse. + +The map, designed primarily for the use of students who are engaged in +investigating the Indians of the United States, was at first limited to +this area; subsequently its scope was extended to include the whole of +North America north of Mexico. Such an extension of its plan was, +indeed, almost necessary, since a number of important families, largely +represented in the United States, are yet more largely represented in +the territory to the north, and no adequate conception of the size and +relative importance of such families as the Algonquian, Siouan, +Salishan, Athapascan, and others can be had without including +extralimital territory. + +To the south, also, it happens that several linguistic stocks extend +beyond the boundaries of the United States. Three families are, indeed, +mainly extralimital in their position, viz: Yuman, the great body of the +tribes of which family inhabited the peninsula of Lower California; +Piman, which has only a small representation in southern Arizona; and +the Coahuiltecan, which intrudes into southwestern Texas. The Athapascan +family is represented in Arizona and New Mexico by the well known Apache +and Navajo, the former of whom have gained a strong foothold in northern +Mexico, while the Tanoan, a Pueblo family of the upper Rio Grande, has +established a few pueblos lower down the river in Mexico. For the +purpose of necessary comparison, therefore, the map is made to include +all of North America north of Mexico, the entire peninsula of Lower +California, and so much of Mexico as is necessary to show the range of +families common to that country and to the United States. It is left to +a future occasion to attempt to indicate the linguistic relations of +Mexico and Central America, for which, it may be remarked in passing, +much material has been accumulated. + +It is apparent that a single map can not be made to show the locations +of the several linguistic families at different epochs; nor can a single +map be made to represent the migrations of the tribes composing the +linguistic families. In order to make a clear presentation of the latter +subject, it would be necessary to prepare a series of maps showing the +areas successively occupied by the several tribes as they were disrupted +and driven from section to section under the pressure of other tribes or +the vastly more potent force of European encroachment. Although the data +necessary for a complete representation of tribal migration, even for +the period subsequent to the advent of the European, does not exist, +still a very large body of material bearing upon the subject is at hand, +and exceedingly valuable results in this direction could be presented +did not the amount of time and labor and the large expense attendant +upon such a project forbid the attempt for the present. + +The map undertakes to show the habitat of the linguistic families only, +and this is for but a single period in their history, viz, at the time +when the tribes composing them first became known to the European, or +when they first appear on recorded history. As the dates when the +different tribes became known vary, it follows as a matter of course +that the periods represented by the colors in one portion of the map are +not synchronous with those in other portions. Thus the data for the +Columbia River tribes is derived chiefly from the account of the journey +of Lewis and Clarke in 1803-'05, long before which period radical +changes of location had taken place among the tribes of the eastern +United States. Again, not only are the periods represented by the +different sections of the map not synchronous, but only in the case of a +few of the linguistic families, and these usually the smaller ones, is +it possible to make the coloring synchronous for different sections of +the same family. Thus our data for the location of some of the northern +members of the Shoshonean family goes back to 1804, a date at which +absolutely no knowledge had been gained of most of the southern members +of the group, our first accounts of whom began about 1850. Again, our +knowledge of the eastern Algonquian tribes dates back to about 1600, +while no information was had concerning the Atsina, Blackfeet, Cheyenne, +and the Arapaho, the westernmost members of the family, until two +centuries later. + +Notwithstanding these facts, an attempt to fix upon the areas formerly +occupied by the several linguistic families, and of the pristine homes +of many of the tribes composing them, is by no means hopeless. For +instance, concerning the position of the western tribes during the +period of early contact of our colonies and its agreement with their +position later when they appear in history, it may be inferred that as a +rule it was stationary, though positive evidence is lacking. When +changes of tribal habitat actually took place they were rarely in the +nature of extensive migration, by which a portion of a linguistic family +was severed from the main body, but usually in the form of encroachment +by a tribe or tribes upon neighboring territory, which resulted simply +in the extension of the limits of one linguistic family at the expense +of another, the defeated tribes being incorporated or confined within +narrower limits. If the above inference be correct, the fact that +different chronologic periods are represented upon the map is of +comparatively little importance, since, if the Indian tribes were in the +main sedentary, and not nomadic, the changes resulting in the course of +one or two centuries would not make material differences. Exactly the +opposite opinion, however, has been expressed by many writers, viz, that +the North American Indian tribes were nomadic. The picture presented by +these writers is of a medley of ever-shifting tribes, to-day here, +to-morrow there, occupying new territory and founding new homes--if +nomads can be said to have homes--only to abandon them. Such a picture, +however, is believed to convey an erroneous idea of the former condition +of our Indian tribes. As the question has significance in the present +connection it must be considered somewhat at length. + + + + + INDIAN TRIBES SEDENTARY. + + +In the first place, the linguistic map, based as it is upon the earliest +evidence obtainable, itself offers conclusive proof, not only that the +Indian tribes were in the main sedentary at the time history first +records their position, but that they had been sedentary for a very long +period. In order that this may be made plain, it should be clearly +understood, as stated above, that each of the colors or patterns upon +the map indicates a distinct linguistic family. It will be noticed that +the colors representing the several families are usually in single +bodies, i.e., that they represent continuous areas, and that with some +exceptions the same color is not scattered here and there over the map +in small spots. Yet precisely this last state of things is what would be +expected had the tribes representing the families been nomadic to a +marked degree. If nomadic tribes occupied North America, instead of +spreading out each from a common center, as the colors show that the +tribes composing the several families actually did, they would have been +dispersed here and there over the whole face of the country. That they +are not so dispersed is considered proof that in the main they were +sedentary. It has been stated above that more or less extensive +migrations of some tribes over the country had taken place prior to +European occupancy. This fact is disclosed by a glance at the present +map. The great Athapascan family, for instance, occupying the larger +part of British America, is known from linguistic evidence to have sent +off colonies into Oregon (Wilopah, Tlatskanai, Coquille), California +(Smith River tribes, Kenesti or Wailakki tribes, Hupa), and Arizona and +New Mexico (Apache, Navajo). How long before European occupancy of this +country these migrations took place can not be told, but in the case of +most of them it was undoubtedly many years. By the test of language it +is seen that the great Siouan family, which we have come to look upon as +almost exclusively western, had one offshoot in Virginia (Tutelo), +another in North and South Carolina (Catawba), and a third in +Mississippi (Biloxi); and the Algonquian family, so important in the +early history of this country, while occupying a nearly continuous area +in the north and east, had yet secured a foothold, doubtless in very +recent times, in Wyoming and Colorado. These and other similar facts +sufficiently prove the power of individual tribes or gentes to sunder +relations with the great body of their kindred and to remove to distant +homes. Tested by linguistic evidence, such instances appear to be +exceptional, and the fact remains that in the great majority of cases +the tribes composing linguistic families occupy continuous areas, and +hence are and have been practically sedentary. Nor is the bond of a +common language, strong and enduring as that bond is usually thought to +be, entirely sufficient to explain the phenomenon here pointed out. When +small in number the linguistic tie would undoubtedly aid in binding +together the members of a tribe; but as the people speaking a common +language increase in number and come to have conflicting interests, the +linguistic tie has often proved to be an insufficient bond of union. In +the case of our Indian tribes feuds and internecine conflicts were +common between members of the same linguistic family. In fact, it is +probable that a very large number of the dialects into which Indian +languages are split originated as the result of internecine strife. +Factions, divided and separated from the parent body, by contact, +intermarriage, and incorporation with foreign tribes, developed distinct +dialects or languages. + +But linguistic evidence alone need not be relied upon to prove that the +North American Indian was not nomadic. + +Corroborative proof of the sedentary character of our Indian tribes is +to be found in the curious form of kinship system, with mother-right +as its chief factor, which prevails. This, as has been pointed out in +another place, is not adapted to the necessities of nomadic tribes, +which need to be governed by a patriarchal system, and, as well, to be +possessed of flocks and herds. + +There is also an abundance of historical evidence to show that, when +first discovered by Europeans, the Indians of the eastern United States +were found living in fixed habitations. This does not necessarily imply +that the entire year was spent in one place. Agriculture not being +practiced to an extent sufficient to supply the Indian with full +subsistence, he was compelled to make occasional changes from his +permanent home to the more or less distant waters and forests to procure +supplies of food. When furnished with food and skins for clothing, the +hunting parties returned to the village which constituted their true +home. At longer periods, for several reasons--among which probably the +chief were the hostility of stronger tribes, the failure of the fuel +supply near the village, and the compulsion exercised by the ever lively +superstitious fancies of the Indians--the villages were abandoned and +new ones formed to constitute new homes, new focal points from which to +set out on their annual hunts and to which to return when these were +completed. The tribes of the eastern United States had fixed and +definitely bounded habitats, and their wanderings were in the nature of +temporary excursions to established points resorted to from time +immemorial. As, however, they had not yet entered completely into the +agricultural condition, to which they were fast progressing from the +hunter state, they may be said to have been nomadic to a very limited +extent. The method of life thus sketched was substantially the one which +the Indians were found practicing throughout the eastern part of the +United States, as also, though to a less degree, in the Pacific States. +Upon the Pacific coast proper the tribes were even more sedentary than +upon the Atlantic, as the mild climate and the great abundance and +permanent supply of fish and shellfish left no cause for a seasonal +change of abode. + +When, however, the interior portions of the country were first visited +by Europeans, a different state of affairs was found to prevail. There +the acquisition of the horse and the possession of firearms had wrought +very great changes in aboriginal habits. The acquisition of the former +enabled the Indian of the treeless plains to travel distances with ease +and celerity which before were practically impossible, and the +possession of firearms stimulated tribal aggressiveness to the utmost +pitch. Firearms were everywhere doubly effective in producing changes in +tribal habitats, since the somewhat gradual introduction of trade placed +these deadly weapons in the hands of some tribes, and of whole congeries +of tribes, long before others could obtain them. Thus the general state +of tribal equilibrium which had before prevailed was rudely disturbed. +Tribal warfare, which hitherto had been attended with inconsiderable +loss of life and slight territorial changes, was now made terribly +destructive, and the territorial possessions of whole groups of tribes +were augmented at the expense of those less fortunate. The horse made +wanderers of many tribes which there is sufficient evidence to show were +formerly nearly sedentary. Firearms enforced migration and caused +wholesale changes in the habitats of tribes, which, in the natural order +of events, it would have taken many centuries to produce. The changes +resulting from these combined agencies, great as they were, are, +however, slight in comparison with the tremendous effects of the +wholesale occupancy of Indian territory by Europeans. As the acquisition +of territory by the settlers went on, a wave of migration from east to +west was inaugurated which affected tribes far remote from the point of +disturbance, ever forcing them within narrower and narrower bounds, and, +as time went on, producing greater and greater changes throughout the +entire country. + +So much of the radical change in tribal habitats as took place in the +area remote from European settlements, mainly west of the Mississippi, +is chiefly unrecorded, save imperfectly in Indian tradition, and is +chiefly to be inferred from linguistic evidence and from the few facts +in our possession. As, however, the most important of these changes +occurred after, and as a result of, European occupancy, they are noted +in history, and thus the map really gives a better idea of the pristine +or prehistoric habitat of the tribes than at first might be thought +possible. + +Before speaking of the method of establishing the boundary lines between +the linguistic families, as they appear upon the map, the nature of the +Indian claim to land and the manner and extent of its occupation should +be clearly set forth. + + + + + POPULATION. + + +As the question of the Indian population of the country has a direct +bearing upon the extent to which the land was actually occupied, a few +words on the subject will be introduced here, particularly as the area +included in the linguistic map is so covered with color that it may +convey a false impression of the density of the Indian population. +As a result of an investigation of the subject of the early Indian +population, Col. Mallery long ago arrived at the conclusion that their +settlements were not numerous, and that the population, as compared with +the enormous territory occupied, was extremely small.[1] + + [Footnote 1: Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Science, 1877, vol. 26.] + +Careful examination since the publication of the above tends to +corroborate the soundness of the conclusions there first formulated. +The subject may be set forth as follows: + +The sea shore, the borders of lakes, and the banks of rivers, where fish +and shell-fish were to be obtained in large quantities, were naturally +the Indians' chief resort, and at or near such places were to be found +their permanent settlements. As the settlements and lines of travel of +the early colonists were along the shore, the lakes and the rivers, +early estimates of the Indian population were chiefly based upon the +numbers congregated along these highways, it being generally assumed +that away from the routes of travel a like population existed. Again, +over-estimates of population resulted from the fact that the same body +of Indians visited different points during the year, and not +infrequently were counted two or three times; change of permanent +village sites also tended to augment estimates of population. + +For these and other reasons a greatly exaggerated idea of the Indian +population was obtained, and the impressions so derived have been +dissipated only in comparatively recent times. + +As will be stated more fully later, the Indian was dependent to no small +degree upon natural products for his food supply. Could it be affirmed +that the North American Indians had increased to a point where they +pressed upon the food supply, it would imply a very much larger +population than we are justified in assuming from other considerations. +But for various reasons the Malthusian law, whether applicable elsewhere +or not, can not be applied to the Indians of this country. Everywhere +bountiful nature had provided an unfailing and practically inexhaustible +food supply. The rivers teemed with fish and mollusks, and the forests +with game, while upon all sides was an abundance of nutritious roots and +seeds. All of these sources were known, and to a large extent they were +drawn upon by the Indian, but the practical lesson of providing in the +season of plenty for the season of scarcity had been but imperfectly +learned, or, when learned, was but partially applied. Even when taught +by dire experience the necessity of laying up adequate stores, it was +the almost universal practice to waste great quantities of food by a +constant succession of feasts, in the superstitious observances of which +the stores were rapidly wasted and plenty soon gave way to scarcity and +even to famine. + +Curiously enough, the hospitality which is so marked a trait among our +North American Indians had its source in a law, the invariable practice +of which has had a marked effect in retarding the acquisition by the +Indian of the virtue of providence. As is well known, the basis of the +Indian social organization was the kinship system. By its provisions +almost all property was possessed in common by the gens or clan. Food, +the most important of all, was by no means left to be exclusively +enjoyed by the individual or the family obtaining it. + +For instance, the distribution of game among the families of a party was +variously provided for in different tribes, but the practical effect of +the several customs relating thereto was the sharing of the supply. The +hungry Indian had but to ask to receive and this no matter how small the +supply, or how dark the future prospect. It was not only his privilege +to ask, it was his right to demand. Undoubtedly what was originally a +right, conferred by kinship connections, ultimately assumed broader +proportions, and finally passed into the exercise of an almost +indiscriminate hospitality. By reason of this custom, the poor hunter +was virtually placed upon equality with the expert one, the lazy with +the industrious, the improvident with the more provident. Stories of +Indian life abound with instances of individual families or parties +being called upon by those less fortunate or provident to share their +supplies. + +The effect of such a system, admirable as it was in many particulars, +practically placed a premium upon idleness. Under such communal rights +and privileges a potent spur to industry and thrift is wanting. + +There is an obverse side to this problem, which a long and intimate +acquaintance with the Indians in their villages has forced upon the +writer. The communal ownership of food and the great hospitality +practiced by the Indian have had a very much greater influence upon his +character than that indicated in the foregoing remarks. The peculiar +institutions prevailing in this respect gave to each tribe or clan a +profound interest in the skill, ability and industry of each member. He +was the most valuable person in the community who supplied it with the +most of its necessities. For this reason the successful hunter or +fisherman was always held in high honor, and the woman, who gathered +great store of seeds, fruits, or roots, or who cultivated a good +corn-field, was one who commanded the respect and received the highest +approbation of the people. The simple and rude ethics of a tribal people +are very important to them, the more so because of their communal +institutions; and everywhere throughout the tribes of the United States +it is discovered that their rules of conduct were deeply implanted in +the minds of the people. An organized system of teaching is always +found, as it is the duty of certain officers of the clan to instruct the +young in all the industries necessary to their rude life, and simple +maxims of industry abound among the tribes and are enforced in diverse +and interesting ways. The power of the elder men in the clan over its +young members is always very great, and the training of the youth is +constant and rigid. Besides this, a moral sentiment exists in favor of +primitive virtues which is very effective in molding character. This may +be illustrated in two ways. + +Marriage among all Indian tribes is primarily by legal appointment, as +the young woman receives a husband from some other prescribed clan or +clans, and the elders of the clan, with certain exceptions, control +these marriages, and personal choice has little to do with the affair. +When marriages are proposed, the virtues and industry of the candidates, +and more than all, their ability to properly live as married couples and +to supply the clan or tribe with a due amount of subsistence, are +discussed long and earnestly, and the young man or maiden who fails in +this respect may fail in securing an eligible and desirable match. And +these motives are constantly presented to the savage youth. + +A simple democracy exists among these people, and they have a variety of +tribal offices to fill. In this way the men of the tribe are graded, and +they pass from grade to grade by a selection practically made by the +people. And this leads to a constant discussion of the virtues and +abilities of all the male members of the clan, from boyhood to old age. +He is most successful in obtaining clan and tribal promotion who is most +useful to the clan and the tribe. In this manner all of the ambitious +are stimulated, and this incentive to industry is very great. + +When brought into close contact with the Indian, and into intimate +acquaintance with his language, customs, and religious ideas, there is a +curious tendency observable in students to overlook aboriginal vices and +to exaggerate aboriginal virtues. It seems to be forgotten that after +all the Indian is a savage, with the characteristics of a savage, and he +is exalted even above the civilized man. The tendency is exactly the +reverse of what it is in the case of those who view the Indian at a +distance and with no precise knowledge of any of his characteristics. In +the estimation of such persons the Indian's vices greatly outweigh his +virtues; his language is a gibberish, his methods of war cowardly, his +ideas of religion utterly puerile. + +The above tendencies are accentuated in the attempt to estimate the +comparative worth and position of individual tribes. No being is more +patriotic than the Indian. He believes himself to be the result of a +special creation by a partial deity and holds that his is the one +favored race. The name by which the tribes distinguish themselves from +other tribes indicates the further conviction that, as the Indian is +above all created things, so in like manner each particular tribe is +exalted above all others. "Men of men" is the literal translation of one +name; "the only men" of another, and so on through the whole category. A +long residence with any one tribe frequently inoculates the student with +the same patriotic spirit. Bringing to his study of a particular tribe +an inadequate conception of Indian attainments and a low impression of +their moral and intellectual plane, the constant recital of its virtues, +the bravery and prowess of its men in war, their generosity, the chaste +conduct and obedience of its women as contrasted with the opposite +qualities of all other tribes, speedily tends to partisanship. He +discovers many virtues and finds that the moral and intellectual +attainments are higher than he supposed; but these advantages he +imagines to be possessed solely, or at least to an unusual degree, by +the tribe in question. Other tribes are assigned much lower rank in the +scale. + +The above is peculiarly true of the student of language. He who studies +only one Indian language and learns its manifold curious grammatic +devices, its wealth of words, its capacity of expression, is speedily +convinced of its superiority to all other Indian tongues, and not +infrequently to all languages by whomsoever spoken. + +If like admirable characteristics are asserted for other tongues he is +apt to view them but as derivatives from one original. Thus he is led to +overlook the great truth that the mind of man is everywhere practically +the same, and that the innumerable differences of its products are +indices merely of different stages of growth or are the results of +different conditions of environment. In its development the human mind +is limited by no boundaries of tribe or race. + +Again, a long acquaintance with many tribes in their homes leads to the +belief that savage people do not lack industry so much as wisdom. They +are capable of performing, and often do perform, great and continuous +labor. The men and women alike toil from day to day and from year to +year, engaged in those tasks that are presented with the recurring +seasons. In civilization, hunting and fishing are often considered +sports, but in savagery they are labors, and call for endurance, +patience, and sagacity. And these are exercised to a reasonable degree +among all savage peoples. + +It is probable that the real difficulty of purchasing quantities of food +from Indians has, in most cases, not been properly understood. Unless +the alien is present at a time of great abundance, when there is more on +hand or easily obtainable than sufficient to supply the wants of the +people, food can not be bought of the Indians. This arises from the fact +that the tribal tenure is communal, and to get food by purchase requires +a treaty at which all the leading members of the tribe are present and +give consent. + +As an illustration of the improvidence of the Indians generally, the +habits of the tribes along the Columbia River may be cited. The Columbia +River has often been pointed to as the probable source of a great part +of the Indian population of this country, because of the enormous supply +of salmon furnished by it and its tributaries. If an abundant and +readily obtained supply of food was all that was necessary to insure a +large population, and if population always increased up to the limit of +food supply, unquestionably the theory of repeated migratory waves of +surplus population from the Columbia Valley would be plausible enough. +It is only necessary, however, to turn to the accounts of the earlier +explorers of this region, Lewis and Clarke, for example, to refute the +idea, so far at least as the Columbia Valley is concerned, although a +study of the many diverse languages spread over the United States would +seem sufficiently to prove that the tribes speaking them could not have +originated at a common center, unless, indeed, at a period anterior to +the formation of organized language. + +The Indians inhabiting the Columbia Valley were divided into many +tribes, belonging to several distinct linguistic families. They all were +in the same culture status, however, and differed in habits and arts +only in minor particulars. All of them had recourse to the salmon of the +Columbia for the main part of their subsistence, and all practiced +similar crude methods of curing fish and storing it away for the winter. +Without exception, judging from the accounts of the above mentioned and +of more recent authors, all the tribes suffered periodically more or +less from insufficient food supply, although, with the exercise of due +forethought and economy, even with their rude methods of catching and +curing salmon, enough might here have been cured annually to suffice for +the wants of the Indian population of the entire Northwest for several +years. + +In their ascent of the river in spring, before the salmon run, it was +only with great difficulty that Lewis and Clarke were able to provide +themselves by purchase with enough food to keep themselves from +starving. Several parties of Indians from the vicinity of the Dalles, +the best fishing station on the river, were met on their way down in +quest of food, their supply of dried salmon having been entirely +exhausted. + +Nor is there anything in the accounts of any of the early visitors to +the Columbia Valley to authorize the belief that the population there +was a very large one. As was the case with all fish-stocked streams, the +Columbia was resorted to in the fishing season by many tribes living at +considerable distance from it; but there is no evidence tending to show +that the settled population of its banks or of any part of its drainage +basin was or ever had been by any means excessive. + +The Dalles, as stated above, was the best fishing station on the river, +and the settled population there may be taken as a fair index of that of +other favorable locations. The Dalles was visited by Ross in July, 1811, +and the following is his statement in regard to the population: + + The main camp of the Indians is situated at the head of the narrows, + and may contain, during the salmon season, 3,000 souls, or more; but + the constant inhabitants of the place do not exceed 100 persons, and + are called Wy-am-pams; the rest are all foreigners from different + tribes throughout the country, who resort hither, not for the + purpose of catching salmon, but chiefly for gambling and + speculation.[2] + + [Footnote 2: Adventures on the Columbia River, 1849, p. 117.] + +And as it was on the Columbia with its enormous supply of fish, so was +it elsewhere in the United States. + +Even the practice of agriculture, with its result of providing a more +certain and bountiful food supply, seems not to have had the effect of +materially augmenting the Indian population. At all events, it is in +California and Oregon, a region where agriculture was scarcely practiced +at all, that the most dense aboriginal population lived. There is no +reason to believe that there ever existed within the limits of the +region included in the map, with the possible exception of certain areas +in California, a population equal to the natural food supply. On the +contrary, there is every reason for believing that the population at the +time of the discovery might have been many times more than what it +actually was had a wise economy been practised. + +The effect of wars in decimating the people has often been greatly +exaggerated. Since the advent of the white man on the continent, wars +have prevailed to a degree far beyond that existing at an earlier time. +From the contest which necessarily arose between the native tribes and +invading nations many wars resulted, and their history is well known. +Again, tribes driven from their ancestral homes often retreated to lands +previously occupied by other tribes, and intertribal wars resulted +therefrom. The acquisition of firearms and horses, through the agency of +white men, also had its influence, and when a commercial value was given +to furs and skins, the Indian abandoned agriculture to pursue hunting +and traffic, and sought new fields for such enterprises, and many new +contests arose from this cause. Altogether the character of the Indian +since the discovery of Columbus has been greatly changed, and he has +become far more warlike and predatory. Prior to that time, and far away +in the wilderness beyond such influence since that time, Indian tribes +seem to have lived together in comparative peace and to have settled +their difficulties by treaty methods. A few of the tribes had distinct +organizations for purposes of war; all recognized it to a greater or +less extent in their tribal organization; but from such study as has +been given the subject, and from the many facts collected from time to +time relating to the intercourse existing between tribes, it appears +that the Indians lived in comparative peace. Their accumulations were +not so great as to be tempting, and their modes of warfare were not +excessively destructive. Armed with clubs and spears and bows and +arrows, war could be prosecuted only by hand-to-hand conflict, and +depended largely upon individual prowess, while battle for plunder, +tribute, and conquest was almost unknown. Such intertribal wars as +occurred originated from other causes, such as infraction of rights +relating to hunting grounds and fisheries, and still oftener prejudices +growing out of their superstitions. + +That which kept the Indian population down sprang from another source, +which has sometimes been neglected. The Indians had no reasonable or +efficacious system of medicine. They believed that diseases were caused +by unseen evil beings and by witchcraft, and every cough, every +toothache, every headache, every chill, every fever, every boil, and +every wound, in fact, all their ailments, were attributed to such cause. +Their so-called medicine practice was a horrible system of sorcery, and +to such superstition human life was sacrificed on an enormous scale. The +sufferers were given over to priest doctors to be tormented, bedeviled, +and destroyed; and a universal and profound belief in witchcraft made +them suspicious, and led to the killing of all suspected and obnoxious +people, and engendered blood feuds on a gigantic scale. It may be safely +said that while famine, pestilence, disease, and war may have killed +many, superstition killed more; in fact, a natural death in a savage +tent is a comparatively rare phenomenon; but death by sorcery, medicine, +and blood feud arising from a belief in witchcraft is exceedingly +common. + +Scanty as was the population compared with the vast area teeming with +natural products capable of supporting human life, it may be safely said +that at the time of the discovery, and long prior thereto, practically +the whole of the area included in the present map was claimed and to +some extent occupied by Indian tribes; but the possession of land by the +Indian by no means implies occupancy in the modern or civilized sense of +the term. In the latter sense occupation means to a great extent +individual control and ownership. Very different was it with the +Indians. Individual ownership of land was, as a rule, a thing entirely +foreign to the Indian mind, and quite unknown in the culture stage to +which he belonged. All land, of whatever character or however utilized, +was held in common by the tribe, or in a few instances by the clan. +Apparently an exception to this broad statement is to be made in the +case of the Haida of the northwest coast, who have been studied by +Dawson. According to him[3] the land is divided among the different +families and is held as strictly personal property, with hereditary +rights or possessions descending from one generation to another. "The +lands may be bartered or given away. The larger salmon streams are, +however, often the property jointly of a number of families." The +tendency in this case is toward personal right in land. + + [Footnote 3: Report on the Queen Charlotte Islands, 1878, p. 117.] + + + + + TRIBAL LAND. + + +For convenience of discussion, Indian tribal land may be divided into +three classes: First, the land occupied by the villages; second, the +land actually employed in agriculture; third, the land claimed by the +tribe but not occupied, except as a hunting ground. + + +_Village sites_.--The amount of land taken up as village sites varied +considerably in different parts of the country. It varied also in the +same tribe at different times. As a rule, the North American Indians +lived in communal houses of sufficient size to accommodate several +families. In such cases the village consisted of a few large structures +closely grouped together, so that it covered very little ground. When +territory was occupied by warlike tribes, the construction of rude +palisades around the villages and the necessities of defense generally +tended to compel the grouping of houses, and the permanent village sites +of even the more populous tribes covered only a very small area. In the +case of confederated tribes and in the time of peace the tendency was +for one or more families to establish more or less permanent settlements +away from the main village, where a livelihood was more readily +obtainable. Hence, in territory which had enjoyed a considerable +interval of peace the settlements were in the nature of small +agricultural communities, established at short distances from each other +and extending in the aggregate over a considerable extent of country. In +the case of populous tribes the villages were probably of the character +of the Choctaw towns described by Adair.[4] "The barrier towns, which +are next to the Muskohge and Chikkasah countries, are compactly settled +for social defense, according to the general method of other savage +nations; but the rest, both in the center and toward the Mississippi, +are only scattered plantations, as best suits a separate easy way of +living. A stranger might be in the middle of one of their populous, +extensive towns without seeing half a dozen houses in the direct course +of his path." More closely grouped settlements are described by Wayne in +American State Papers, 1793, in his account of an expedition down the +Maumee Valley, where he states that "The margins of the Miamis of the +Lake and the Au Glaize appear like one continuous village for a number +of miles, nor have I ever beheld such immense fields of corn in any part +of America from Canada to Florida." Such a chain of villages as this was +probably highly exceptional; but even under such circumstances the +village sites proper formed but a very small part of the total area +occupied. + + [Footnote 4: Hist. of Am. Ind., 1775, p. 282.] + +From the foregoing considerations it will be seen that the amount of +land occupied as village sites under any circumstances was +inconsiderable. + + +_Agricultural land_.--It is practically impossible to make an accurate +estimate of the relative amount of land devoted to agricultural purposes +by any one tribe or by any family of tribes. None of the factors which +enter into the problem are known to us with sufficient accuracy to +enable reliable estimates to be made of the amount of land tilled or of +the products derived from the tillage; and only in few cases have we +trustworthy estimates of the population of the tribe or tribes +practicing agriculture. Only a rough approximation of the truth can be +reached from the scanty data available and from a general knowledge of +Indian methods of subsistence. + +The practice of agriculture was chiefly limited to the region south of +the St. Lawrence and east of the Mississippi. In this region it was far +more general and its results were far more important than is commonly +supposed. To the west of the Mississippi only comparatively small areas +were occupied by agricultural tribes and these lay chiefly in New Mexico +and Arizona and along the Arkansas, Platte, and Missouri Rivers. The +rest of that region was tenanted by non-agricultural tribes--unless +indeed the slight attention paid to the cultivation of tobacco by a few +of the west coast tribes, notably the Haida, may be considered +agriculture. Within the first mentioned area most of the tribes, perhaps +all, practiced agriculture to a greater or less extent, though +unquestionably the degree of reliance placed upon it as a means of +support differed much with different tribes and localities. + +Among many tribes agriculture was relied upon to supply an +important--and perhaps in the case of a few tribes, the most +important--part of the food supply. The accounts of some of the early +explorers in the southern United States, where probably agriculture was +more systematized than elsewhere, mention corn fields of great extent, +and later knowledge of some northern tribes, as the Iroquois and some of +the Ohio Valley tribes, shows that they also raised corn in great +quantities. The practice of agriculture to a point where it shall prove +the main and constant supply of a people, however, implies a degree of +sedentariness to which our Indians as a rule had not attained and an +amount of steady labor without immediate return which was peculiarly +irksome to them. Moreover, the imperfect methods pursued in clearing, +planting, and cultivating sufficiently prove that the Indians, though +agriculturists, were in the early stages of development as such--a fact +also attested by the imperfect and one-sided division of labor between +the sexes, the men as a rule taking but small share of the burdensome +tasks of clearing land, planting, and harvesting. + +It is certain that by no tribe of the United States was agriculture +pursued to such an extent as to free its members from the practice of +the hunter's or fisher's art. Admitting the most that can be claimed for +the Indian as an agriculturist, it may be stated that, whether because +of the small population or because of the crude manner in which his +operations were carried on, the amount of land devoted to agriculture +within the area in question was infinitesimally small as compared with +the total. Upon a map colored to show only the village sites and +agricultural land, the colors would appear in small spots, while by far +the greater part of the map would remain uncolored. + + +_Hunting claims_.--The great body of the land within the area mapped +which was occupied by agricultural tribes, and all the land outside it, +was held as a common hunting ground, and the tribal claim to territory, +independent of village sites and corn fields, amounted practically to +little else than hunting claims. The community of possession in the +tribe to the hunting ground was established and practically enforced by +hunting laws, which dealt with the divisions of game among the village, +or among the families of the hunters actually taking part in any +particular hunt. As a rule, such natural landmarks as rivers, lakes, +hills, and mountain chains served to mark with sufficient accuracy the +territorial tribal limits. In California, and among the Haida and +perhaps other tribes of the northwest coast, the value of certain +hunting and fishing claims led to their definition by artificial +boundaries, as by sticks or stones.[5] + + [Footnote 5: Powers, Cont. N.A. Eth. 1877, vol. 3, p. 109: Dawson, + Queen Charlotte Islands, 1880, p. 117.] + +Such precautions imply a large population, and in such regions as +California the killing of game upon the land of adjoining tribes was +rigidly prohibited and sternly punished. + +As stated above, every part of the vast area included in the present map +is to be regarded as belonging, according to Indian ideas of land title, +to one or another of the Indian tribes. To determine the several tribal +possessions and to indicate the proper boundary lines between individual +tribes and linguistic families is a work of great difficulty. This is +due more to the imperfection and scantiness of available data concerning +tribal claims than to the absence of claimants or to any ambiguity in +the minds of the Indians as to the boundaries of their several +possessions. + +Not only is precise data wanting respecting the limits of land actually +held or claimed by many tribes, but there are other tribes, which +disappeared early in the history of our country, the boundaries to whose +habitat is to be determined only in the most general way. Concerning +some of these, our information is so vague that the very linguistic +family they belonged to is in doubt. In the case of probably no one +family are the data sufficient in amount and accuracy to determine +positively the exact areas definitely claimed or actually held by the +tribes. Even in respect of the territory of many of the tribes of the +eastern United States, much of whose land was ceded by actual treaty +with the Government, doubt exists. The fixation of the boundary points, +when these are specifically mentioned in the treaty, as was the rule, is +often extremely difficult, owing to the frequent changes of geographic +names and the consequent disagreement of present with ancient maps. +Moreover, when the Indian's claim to his land had been admitted by +Government, and the latter sought to acquire a title through voluntary +cession by actual purchase, land assumed a value to the Indian never +attaching to it before. + +Under these circumstances, either under plea of immemorial occupancy or +of possession by right of conquest, the land was often claimed, and the +claims urged with more or less plausibility by several tribes, sometimes +of the same linguistic family, sometimes of different families. + +It was often found by the Government to be utterly impracticable to +decide between conflicting claims, and not infrequently the only way out +of the difficulty lay in admitting the claim of both parties, and in +paying for the land twice or thrice. It was customary for a number of +different tribes to take part in such treaties, and not infrequently +several linguistic families were represented. It was the rule for each +tribe, through its representatives, to cede its share of a certain +territory, the natural boundaries of which as a whole are usually +recorded with sufficient accuracy. The main purpose of the Government in +treaty-making being to obtain possession of the land, comparatively +little attention was bestowed to defining the exact areas occupied by +the several tribes taking part in a treaty, except in so far as the +matter was pressed upon attention by disputing claimants. Hence the +territory claimed by each tribe taking part in the treaty is rarely +described, and occasionally not all the tribes interested in the +proposed cession are even mentioned categorically. The latter statement +applies more particularly to the territory west of the Mississippi, the +data for determining ownership to which is much less precise, and the +doubt and confusion respecting tribal boundary lines correspondingly +greater than in the country east of that river. Under the above +circumstances, it will be readily understood that to determine tribal +boundaries within accurately drawn lines is in the vast majority of +cases quite impossible. + +Imperfect and defective as the terms of the treaties frequently are as +regards the definition of tribal boundaries, they are by far the most +accurate and important of the means at our command for fixing boundary +lines upon the present map. By their aid the territorial possessions of +a considerable number of tribes have been determined with desirable +precision, and such areas definitely established have served as checks +upon the boundaries of other tribes, concerning the location and extent +of whose possessions little is known. + +For establishing the boundaries of such tribes as are not mentioned in +treaties, and of those whose territorial possessions are not given with +sufficient minuteness, early historical accounts are all important. Such +accounts, of course, rarely indicate the territorial possessions of the +tribes with great precision. In many cases, however, the sites of +villages are accurately given. In others the source of information +concerning a tribe is contained in a general statement of the occupancy +of certain valleys or mountain ranges or areas at the heads of certain +rivers, no limiting lines whatever being assigned. In others, still, the +notice of a tribe is limited to a brief mention of the presence in a +certain locality of hunting or war parties. + +Data of this loose character would of course be worthless in an attempt +to fix boundary lines in accordance with the ideas of the modern +surveyor. The relative positions of the families and the relative size +of the areas occupied by them, however, and not their exact boundaries, +are the chief concern in a linguistic map, and for the purpose of +establishing these, and, in a rough way, the boundaries of the territory +held by the tribes composing them, these data are very important, and +when compared with one another and corrected by more definite data, when +such are at hand, they have usually been found to be sufficient for the +purpose. + + + + + SUMMARY OF DEDUCTIONS. + + +In conclusion, the more important deductions derivable from the data +upon which the linguistic map is based, or that are suggested by it, may +be summarized as follows: + +First, the North American Indian tribes, instead of speaking related +dialects, originating in a single parent language, in reality speak many +languages belonging to distinct families, which have no apparent unity +of origin. + +Second, the Indian population of North America was greatly exaggerated +by early writers, and instead of being large was in reality small as +compared with the vast territory occupied and the abundant food supply; +and furthermore, the population had nowhere augmented sufficiently, +except possibly in California, to press upon the food supply. + +Third, although representing a small population, the numerous tribes had +overspread North America and had possessed themselves of all the +territory, which, in the case of a great majority of tribes, was owned +in common by the tribe. + +Fourth, prior to the advent of the European, the tribes were probably +nearly in a state of equilibrium, and were in the main sedentary, and +those tribes which can be said with propriety to have been nomadic +became so only after the advent of the European, and largely as the +direct result of the acquisition of the horse and the introduction of +firearms. + +Fifth, while agriculture was general among the tribes of the eastern +United States, and while it was spreading among western tribes, its +products were nowhere sufficient wholly to emancipate the Indian from +the hunter state. + + + * * * * * + + + LINGUISTIC FAMILIES. + + +Within the area covered by the map there are recognized fifty-eight +distinct linguistic families. + +These are enumerated in alphabetical order and each is accompanied by +a table of the synonyms of the family name, together with a brief +statement of the geographical area occupied by each family, so far as it +is known. A list of the principal tribes of each family also is given. + + + + +ADAIZAN FAMILY. + + + = Adaize, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 306, + 1836. Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc., Lond., II, 31-59, 1846. Latham, + Opuscula, 293, 1860. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, xcix, 1848. + Gallatin in Schoolcraft Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Latham, Elements + Comp. Phil., 477, 1862 (referred to as one of the most isolated + languages of N.A.). Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. + Am.), 478, 1878 (or Adees). + + = Adaizi, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847. + + = Adaise, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848. + + = Adahi, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 342, 1850. Latham in Trans. Philolog. + Soc., Lond., 103, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 366, 368, 1860. Latham, + Elements Comp., Phil., 473, 477, 1863 (same as his Adaize above). + + = Adaes, Buschmann, Spuren der aztekischen Sprache, 424, 1859. + + = Adees. Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.) 478, 1878 + (same as his Adaize). + + = Ad['a]i, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Leg., 41, 1884. + + +Derivation: From a Caddo word hadai, sig. "brush wood." + +This family was based upon the language spoken by a single tribe who, +according to Dr. Sibley, lived about the year 1800 near the old Spanish +fort or mission of Adaize, "about 40 miles from Natchitoches, below the +Yattassees, on a lake called Lac Macdon, which communicates with the +division of Red River that passes by Bayau Pierre."[6] A vocabulary of +about two hundred and fifty words is all that remains to us of their +language, which according to the collector, Dr. Sibley, "differs from +all others, and is so difficult to speak or understand that no nation +can speak ten words of it." + + [Footnote 6: Travels of Lewis and Clarke, London, 1809, p. 189.] + +It was from an examination of Sibley's vocabulary that Gallatin reached +the conclusion of the distinctness of this language from any other +known, an opinion accepted by most later authorities. A recent +comparison of this vocabulary by Mr. Gatschet, with several Caddoan +dialects, has led to the discovery that a considerable percentage of the +Ad['a]i words have a more or less remote affinity with Caddoan, and he +regards it as a Caddoan dialect. The amount of material, however, +necessary to establish its relationship to Caddoan is not at present +forthcoming, and it may be doubted if it ever will be, as recent inquiry +has failed to reveal the existence of a single member of the tribe, or +of any individual of the tribes once surrounding the Ad['a]i who +remembers a word of the language. + +Mr. Gatschet found that some of the older Caddo in the Indian Territory +remembered the Ad['a]i as one of the tribes formerly belonging to the +Caddo Confederacy. More than this he was unable to learn from them. + +Owing to their small numbers, their remoteness from lines of travel, and +their unwarlike character the Ad['a]i have cut but a small figure in +history, and accordingly the known facts regarding them are very meager. +The first historical mention of them appears to be by Cabeca de Vaca, +who in his "Naufragios," referring to his stay in Texas, about 1530, +calls them Atayos. Mention is also made of them by several of the early +French explorers of the Mississippi, as d'Iberville and Joutel. + +The Mission of Adayes, so called from its proximity to the home of the +tribe, was established in 1715. In 1792 there was a partial emigration +of the Ad['a]i to the number of fourteen families to a site south of San +Antonio de Bejar, southwest Texas, where apparently they amalgamated +with the surrounding Indian population and were lost sight of. (From +documents preserved at the City Hall, San Antonio, and examined by Mr. +Gatschet in December, 1886.) The Ad['a]i who were left in their old homes +numbered one hundred in 1802, according to Baudry de Lozieres. According +to Sibley, in 1809 there were only "twenty men of them remaining, but +more women." In 1820 Morse mentions only thirty survivors. + + + + +ALGONQUIAN FAMILY. + + + > Algonkin-Lenape, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 23, 305, + 1836. Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid, 1852. + + > Algonquin, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 337, 1840. Prichard Phys. + Hist. Mankind, V, 381, 1847 (follows Gallatin). + + > Algonkins, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, + 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. + + > Algonkin, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rept., III, pt. 3, 55, 1856 (gives + Delaware and Shawnee vocabs.). Hayden, Cont. Eth. and Phil. Missouri + Inds., 232, 1862 (treats only of Crees, Blackfeet, Shyennes). Hale in + Am. Antiq., 112, April, 1883 (treated with reference to migration). + + < Algonkin, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 1856 (adds to + Gallatin's list of 1836 the Bethuck, Shyenne, Blackfoot, and + Arrapaho). Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860 (as in preceding). Latham, + Elements Comp. Phil, 447, 1862. + + < Algonquin, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp., (Cent. and S. Am.), 460, + 465, 1878 (list includes the Maquas, an Iroquois tribe). + + > Saskatschawiner, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848 (probably + designates the Arapaho). + + > Arapahoes, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. + + X Algonkin und Beothuk, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. + + +Derivation: Contracted from Algomequin, an Algonkin word, signifying +"those on the other side of the river," i.e., the St. Lawrence River. + + +ALGONQUIAN AREA. + +The area formerly occupied by the Algonquian family was more extensive +than that of any other linguistic stock in North America, their +territory reaching from Labrador to the Rocky Mountains, and from +Churchill River of Hudson Bay as far south at least as Pamlico Sound of +North Carolina. In the eastern part of this territory was an area +occupied by Iroquoian tribes, surrounded on almost all sides by their +Algonquian neighbors. On the south the Algonquian tribes were bordered +by those of Iroquoian and Siouan (Catawba) stock, on the southwest and +west by the Muskhogean and Siouan tribes, and on the northwest by the +Kitunahan and the great Athapascan families, while along the coast of +Labrador and the eastern shore of Hudson Bay they came in contact with +the Eskimo, who were gradually retreating before them to the north. In +Newfoundland they encountered the Beothukan family, consisting of but a +single tribe. A portion of the Shawnee at some early period had +separated from the main body of the tribe in central Tennessee and +pushed their way down to the Savannah River in South Carolina, where, +known as Savannahs, they carried on destructive wars with the +surrounding tribes until about the beginning of the eighteenth century +they were finally driven out and joined the Delaware in the north. Soon +afterwards the rest of the tribe was expelled by the Cherokee and +Chicasa, who thenceforward claimed all the country stretching north to +the Ohio River. + +The Cheyenne and Arapaho, two allied tribes of this stock, had become +separated from their kindred on the north and had forced their way +through hostile tribes across the Missouri to the Black Hills country of +South Dakota, and more recently into Wyoming and Colorado, thus forming +the advance guard of the Algonquian stock in that direction, having the +Siouan tribes behind them and those of the Shoshonean family in front. + + +PRINCIPAL ALGONQUINIAN TRIBES. + + Abnaki. Menominee. Ottawa. + Algonquin. Miami. Pamlico. + Arapaho. Micmac. Pennacook. + Cheyenne. Mohegan. Pequot. + Conoy. Montagnais. Piankishaw. + Cree. Montauk. Pottawotomi. + Delaware. Munsee. Powhatan. + Fox. Nanticoke. Sac. + Illinois. Narraganset. Shawnee. + Kickapoo. Nauset. Siksika. + Mahican. Nipmuc. Wampanoag. + Massachuset. Ojibwa. Wappinger. + + +_Population._--The present number of the Algonquian stock is about +95,600, of whom about 60,000 are in Canada and the remainder in the +United States. Below is given the population of the tribes officially +recognized, compiled chiefly from the United States Indian +Commissioner's report for 1889 and the Canadian Indian report for 1888. +It is impossible to give exact figures, owing to the fact that in many +instances two or more tribes are enumerated together, while many +individuals are living with other tribes or amongst the whites: + + Abnaki: + "Oldtown Indians," Maine 410 + Passamaquoddy Indians, Maine 215? + Abenakis of St. Francis and Becancour, Quebec 369 + "Amalecites" of Temiscouata and Viger, Quebec 198 + "Amalecites" of Madawaska, etc., New Brunswick 683 + ----- 1,874? + Algonquin: + Of Renfrew, Golden Lake and Carleton, Ontario 797 + With Iroquois (total 131) at Gibson, Ontario 31? + With Iroquois at Lake of Two Mountains, Quebec 30 + Quebec Province 3,909 + ----- 4,767? + Arapaho: + Cheyenne and Arapaho Agency, Indian Territory 1,272 + Shoshone Agency, Wyoming (Northern Arapaho) 885 + Carlisle school, Pennsylvania, + and Lawrence school, Kansas 55 + ----- 2,212 + Cheyenne: + Pine Ridge Agency, South Dakota (Northern Cheyenne) 517 + Cheyenne and Arapaho Agency, Indian Territory 2,091 + Carlisle school, Pennsylvania, + and Lawrence school, Kansas 153 + Tongue River Agency, Montana (Northern Cheyenne) 865 + ----- 3,626 + Cree: + With Salteau in Manitoba, etc., British America + (treaties Nos. 1, 2, and 5: total, 6,066) 3,066? + Plain and Wood Cree, treaty No. 6, Manitoba, etc. 5,790 + Cree (with Salteau, etc.), treaty No. 4, + Manitoba, etc. 8,530 + ----- 17,386? + Delaware, etc.: + Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Agency, Indian Territory 95 + Incorporated with Cherokee, Indian Territory 1,000? + Delaware with the Seneca in New York 3 + Hampton and Lawrence schools 3 + Muncie in New York, + principally with Onondaga and Seneca 36 + Munsee with Stockbridge (total 133), + Green Bay Agency, Wis. 23? + Munsee with Chippewa at Pottawatomie and + Great Nemaha Agency, Kansas (total 75) 37? + Munsee with Chippewa on the Thames, Ontario 131 + "Moravians" of the Thames, Ontario 288 + Delaware with Six Nations on Grand River, Ontario 134 + ----- 1,750? + Kickapoo: + Sac and Fox Agency, Indian Territory 325 + Pottawatomie and Great Nemaha Agency, Kansas 237 + In Mexico 200? + ----- 762? + Menominee: + Green Bay Agency, Wisconsin 1,311 + Carlisle school 1 + ----- 1,312 + Miami: + Quapaw Agency, Indian Territory 67 + Indiana, no agency 300? + Lawrence and Carlisle schools 7 + ----- 374? + Micmac: + Restigouche, Maria, and Gaspe, Quebec 732 + In Nova Scotia 2,145 + New Brunswick 912 + Prince Edward Island 319 + ----- 4,108 + Misisauga: + Alnwick, New Credit, etc., Ontario 774 + + Monsoni, Maskegon, etc.: + Eastern Rupert's Land, British America 4,016 + + Montagnais: + Betsiamits, Lake St. John, Grand Romaine, etc., Quebec 1,607 + Seven Islands, Quebec 312 + ----- 1,919 + Nascapee: + Lower St. Lawrence, Quebec 2,860 + + Ojibwa: + White Earth Agency, Minnesota 6,263 + La Pointe Agency, Wisconsin 4,778 + Mackinac Agency, Michigan + (about one-third of 5,563 Ottawa and Chippewa) 1,854? + Mackinac Agency, Michigan (Chippewa alone) 1,351 + Devil's Lake Agency, North Dakota + (Turtle Mountain Chippewa) 1,340 + Pottawatomie and Great Nemaha Agency, Kansas + (one-half of 75 Chippewa and Muncie) 38? + Lawrence and Carlisle schools 15 + "Ojibbewas" of Lake Superior and Lake Huron, Ontario 5,201 + "Chippewas" of Sarnia, etc., Ontario 1,956 + "Chippewas" with Munsees on Thames, Ontario 454 + "Chippewas" with Pottawatomies + on Walpole Island, Ontario 658 + "Ojibbewas" with Ottawas (total 1,856) + on Manitoulin and Cockburn Islands, Ontario 928? + "Salteaux" of treaty Nos. 3 and 4, etc., + Manitoba, etc. 4,092 + "Chippewas" with Crees in Manitoba, etc., + treaties Nos. 1, 2, and 5 (total Chippewa + and Cree, 6,066) 3,000? + ----- 31,928? + Ottawa: + Quapaw Agency, Indian Territory 137 + Mackinac Agency, Michigan (5,563 Ottawa and Chippewa) 3,709? + Lawrence and Carlisle schools 20 + With "Ojibbewas" on Manitoulin and Cockburn + Islands, Ontario 928 + ----- 4,794? + Peoria, etc.: + Quapaw Agency, Indian Territory 160 + Lawrence and Carlisle schools 5 + ----- 165 + Pottawatomie: + Sac and Fox Agency, Indian Territory 480 + Pottawatomie and Great Nemaha Agency, Kansas 462 + Mackinac Agency, Michigan 77 + Prairie band, Wisconsin 280 + Carlisle, Lawrence and Hampton schools 117 + With Chippewa on Walpole Island, Ontario 166 + ----- 1,582 + Sac and Fox: + Sac and Fox Agency, Indian Territory 515 + Sac and Fox Agency, Iowa 381 + Pottawatomie and Great Nemaha Agency, Kansas 77 + Lawrence, Hampton, and Carlisle schools 8 + ----- 981 + Shawnee: + Quapaw Agency, Indian Territory 79 + Sac and Fox Agency, Indian Territory 640 + Incorporated with Cherokee, Indian Territory 800? + Lawrence, Carlisle, and Hampton schools 40 + ----- 1,559? + Siksika: + Blackfoot Agency, Montana. (Blackfoot, Blood, Piegan) 1,811 + Blackfoot reserves in Alberta, British America + (with Sarcee and Assiniboine) 4,932 + ----- 6,743 + Stockbridge (Mahican): + Green Bay Agency, Wisconsin 110 + In New York (with Tuscarora and Seneca) 7 + Carlisle school 4 + ----- 121 + + + + +ATHAPASCAN FAMILY. + + + > Athapascas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 16, + 305, 1836. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 375, 1847. Gallatin in + Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Berghaus (1845), + Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. Turner in "Literary World," + 281, April 17, 1852 (refers Apache and Navajo to this family on + linguistic evidence). + + > Athapaccas, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. + (Evident misprint.) [Transcriber's Note: In original text.] + + > Athapascan, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 84, 1856. (Mere + mention of family; Apaches and congeners belong to this family, as + shown by him in "Literary World." Hoopah also asserted to be + Athapascan.) + + > Athabaskans, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 302, 1850. (Under Northern + Athabaskans, includes Chippewyans Proper, Beaver Indians, Daho-dinnis, + Strong Bows, Hare Indians, Dog-ribs, Yellow Knives, Carriers. Under + Southern Athabaskans, includes (p. 308) Kwalioqwa, Tlatskanai, Umkwa.) + + = Athabaskan, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 65, 96, 1856. + Buschmann (1854), Der athapaskische Sprachstamm, 250, 1856 (Hoopahs, + Apaches, and Navajoes included). Latham, Opuscula, 333, 1860. Latham, + El. Comp. Phil., 388, 1862. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, + 31-50, 1846 (indicates the coalescence of Athabascan family with + Esquimaux). Latham (1844), in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 161, 1848 + (Nagail and Taculli referred to Athabascan). Scouler (1846), in Jour. + Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 230, 1848. Latham, Opuscula, 257, 259, 276, 1860. + Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 463, 1878. + + > Kinai, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 14, 305, + 1836 (Kinai and Ugaljachmutzi; considered to form a distinct family, + though affirmed to have affinities with western Esquimaux and with + Athapascas). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 440-448, 1847 (follows + Gallatin; also affirms a relationship to Aztec). Gallatin in Trans. + Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848. + + > Kenay, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 32-34, 1846. + Latham, Opuscula, 275, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 389, 1862 + (referred to Esquimaux stock). + + > Kinaetzi, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 441, 1847 (same as his + Kinai above). + + > Kenai, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, xcix, 1848 (see Kinai + above). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 695, 1856 (refers it to + Athapaskan). + + X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 218, 1841. + (Includes Atnas, Kolchans, and Ken['a][i:]es of present family.) + + X Haidah, Scouler, ibid., 224 (same as his Northern family). + + > Chepeyans, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 375, 1847 (same as + Athapascas above). + + > Tahkali-Umkwa, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 198, 201, 569, 1846 + ("a branch of the great Chippewyan, or Athapascan, stock;" includes + Carriers, Qualioguas, Tlatskanies, Umguas). Gallatin, after Hale in + Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 9, 1848. + + > Digothi, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Digothi, + Loucheux, ibid. 1852. + + > Lipans, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (Lipans (Sipans) between + Rio Arkansas and Rio Grande). + + > Tototune, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (seacoast south of the + Saintskla). + + > Ugaljachmutzi, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 + ("perhaps Athapascas"). + + > Umkwa, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 72, 1854 (a single + tribe). Latham, Opuscula, 300, 1860. + + > Tahlewah. Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 + (a single tribe). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 76, 1856 + (a single tribe). Latham. Opuscula, 342, 1860. + + > Tolewa, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 163, 1877 (vocab. from Smith + River, Oregon; affirmed to be distinct from any neighboring tongue). + Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscellany, 438, 1877. + + > Hoo-pah, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (tribe on + Lower Trinity, California). + + > Hoopa, Powers in Overland Monthly, 135, August, 1872. + + > H['u]-p[^a], Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 72, 1877 (affirmed to be + Athapascan). + + = Tinneh, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass. A. S., XVIII, 269, 1869 (chiefly + Alaskan tribes). Dall, Alaska and its Resources, 428, 1870. Dall in + Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 24, 1877. Bancroft, Native Races, III, 562, 583, + 603, 1882. + + = Tinn['e], Gatschet in Mag. Am, Hist., 165, 1877 (special mention of + Hoopa, Rogue River, Umpqua.) Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 440, 1877. + Gatschet in Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 406, 1879. Tolmie and + Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 62, 1884. Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, + 1887. + + = Tinney, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, + 463, 1878. + + X Klamath, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, + 1878; or Lutuami, (Lototens and Tolewahs of his list belong here.) + + +Derivation: From the lake of the same name; signifying, according to +Lacombe, "place of hay and reeds." + +As defined by Gallatin, the area occupied by this great family is +included in a line drawn from the mouth of the Churchill or Missinippi +River to its source; thence along the ridge which separates the north +branch of the Saskatchewan from those of the Athapascas to the Rocky +Mountains; and thence northwardly till within a hundred miles of the +Pacific Ocean, in latitude 52 deg. 30'. + +The only tribe within the above area excepted by Gallatin as of probably +a different stock was the Quarrelers or Loucheux, living at the mouth of +Mackenzie River. This tribe, however, has since been ascertained to be +Athapascan. + +The Athapascan family thus occupied almost the whole of British Columbia +and of Alaska, and was, with the exception of the Eskimo, by whom they +were cut off on nearly all sides from the ocean, the most northern +family in North America. + +Since Gallatin's time the history of this family has been further +elucidated by the discovery on the part of Hale and Turner that isolated +branches of the stock have become established in Oregon, California, and +along the southern border of the United States. + +The boundaries of the Athapascan family, as now understood, are best +given under three primary groups--Northern, Pacific, and Southern. + + +_Northern group_.--This includes all the Athapascan tribes of British +North America and Alaska. In the former region the Athapascans occupy +most of the western interior, being bounded on the north by the Arctic +Eskimo, who inhabit a narrow strip of coast; on the east by the Eskimo +of Hudson's Bay as far south as Churchill River, south of which river +the country is occupied by Algonquian tribes. On the south the +Athapascan tribes extended to the main ridge between the Athapasca and +Saskatchewan Rivers, where they met Algonquian tribes; west of this area +they were bounded on the south by Salishan tribes, the limits of whose +territory on Fraser River and its tributaries appear on Tolmie and +Dawson's map of 1884. On the west, in British Columbia, the Athapascan +tribes nowhere reach the coast, being cut off by the Wakashan, Salishan, +and Chimmesyan families. + +The interior of Alaska is chiefly occupied by tribes of this family. +Eskimo tribes have encroached somewhat upon the interior along the +Yukon, Kuskokwim, Kowak, and Noatak Rivers, reaching on the Yukon to +somewhat below Shageluk Island,[7] and on the Kuskokwim nearly or quite +to Kolmakoff Redoubt.[8] Upon the two latter they reach quite to their +heads.[9] A few Kutchin tribes are (or have been) north of the Porcupine +and Yukon Rivers, but until recently it has not been known that they +extended north beyond the Yukon and Romanzoff Mountains. Explorations of +Lieutenant Stoney, in 1885, establish the fact that the region to the +north of those mountains is occupied by Athapascan tribes, and the map +is colored accordingly. Only in two places in Alaska do the Athapascan +tribes reach the coast--the K'naia-khotana, on Cook's Inlet, and the +Ahtena, of Copper River. + + [Footnote 7: Dall, Map Alaska, 1877.] + + [Footnote 8: Fide Nelson in Dall's address, Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., + 1885, p. 13.] + + [Footnote 9: Cruise of the _Corwin_, 1887.] + + +_Pacific group_.--Unlike the tribes of the Northern group, most of those +of the Pacific group have removed from their priscan habitats since the +advent of the white race. The Pacific group embraces the following: +Kwalhioqua, formerly on Willopah River, Washington, near the Lower +Chinook;[10] Owilapsh, formerly between Shoalwater Bay and the heads of +the Chehalis River, Washington, the territory of these two tribes being +practically continuous; Tlatscanai, formerly on a small stream on the +northwest side of Wapatoo Island.[11] Gibbs was informed by an old +Indian that this tribe "formerly owned the prairies on the Tsihalis at +the mouth of the Skukumchuck, but, on the failure of game, left the +country, crossed the Columbia River, and occupied the mountains to the +south"--a statement of too uncertain character to be depended upon; the +Athapascan tribes now on the Grande Ronde and Siletz Reservations, +Oregon,[12] whose villages on and near the coast extended from Coquille +River southward to the California line, including, among others, the +Upper Coquille, Sixes, Euchre, Creek, Joshua, Tutu t[^u]nn[ve], and other +"Rogue River" or "Tou-touten bands," Chasta Costa, Galice Creek, +Naltunne t[^u]nn[ve] and Chetco villages;[13] the Athapascan villages +formerly on Smith River and tributaries, California;[14] those villages +extending southward from Smith River along the California coast to the +mouth of Klamath River;[15] the Hup[^a] villages or "clans" formerly on +Lower Trinity River, California;[16] the Kenesti or Wailakki (2), +located as follows: "They live along the western slope of the Shasta +Mountains, from North Eel River, above Round Valley, to Hay Fork; along +Eel and Mad Rivers, extending down the latter about to Low Gap; also on +Dobbins and Larrabie Creeks;"[17] and Saiaz, who "formerly occupied the +tongue of land jutting down between Eel River and Van Dusen's Fork."[18] + + [Footnote 10: Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep. I, 1855, p. 428.] + + [Footnote 11: Lewis and Clarke, Exp., 1814, vol. 2, p. 382.] + + [Footnote 12: Gatschet and Dorsey, MS., 1883-'84.] + + [Footnote 13: Dorsey, MS., map, 1884, B.E.] + + [Footnote 14: Hamilton, MS., Haynarger Vocab., B.E.; Powers, + Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, p. 65.] + + [Footnote 15: Dorsey, MS., map, 1884, B.E.] + + [Footnote 16: Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, pp. 72, 73.] + + [Footnote 17: Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, p. 114.] + + [Footnote 18: Powers, Contr. N.A. Ethn., 1877, vol. 3, p. 122.] + + +_Southern group_.--Includes the Navajo, Apache, and Lipan. Engineer Jose +Cortez, one of the earliest authorities on these tribes, writing in +1799, defines the boundaries of the Lipan and Apache as extending north +and south from 29 deg. N. to 36 deg. N., and east and west from 99 deg. W. +to 114 deg. W.; in other words from central Texas nearly to the Colorado +River in Arizona, where they met tribes of the Yuman stock. The Lipan +occupied the eastern part of the above territory, extending in Texas from +the Comanche country (about Red River) south to the Rio Grande.[19] More +recently both Lipan and Apache have gradually moved southward into +Mexico where they extend as far as Durango.[20] + + [Footnote 19: Cortez in Pac. R. R. Rep., 1856, vol. 3, pt. 3, + pp. 118, 119.] + + [Footnote 20: Bartlett, Pers. Narr., 1854; Orozco y Berra, Geog., + 1864.] + +The Navajo, since first known to history, have occupied the country on +and south of the San Juan River in northern New Mexico and Arizona and +extending into Colorado and Utah. They were surrounded on all sides by +the cognate Apache except upon the north, where they meet Shoshonean +tribes. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + A. Northern group: B. Pacific group: C. Southern group: + + Ah-tena. [vA]ta[va]k[^u]t. [*Ataakut] Arivaipa. + Kaiyuh-khotana. Chasta Costa. Chiricahua. + Kcaltana. Chetco. Coyotero. + K'naia-khotana. Dakube tede Faraone. + Koyukukhotana. (on Applegate Creek). Gileno. + Kutchin. Euchre Creek. Jicarilla. + Montagnais. Hup[^a]. Lipan. + Montagnards. K[va]lts'erea t[^u]nn[ve]. Llanero. + [*Kalts'erea tunne] + Nagailer. Kenesti or Wailakki. Mescalero. + Slave. Kwalhioqua. Mimbreno. + Sluacus-tinneh. Kwa[t]ami. Mogollon. + Taculli. Micikqw[^u]tme t[^u]nn[ve]. Na-isha. + Tahl-tan (1). Mikono t[^u]nn[ve]. Navajo. + Unakhotana. Owilapsh. Pinal Coyotero. + Qwinct[^u]nnet[^u]n. Tch[ve]k[^u]n. + Saiaz. Tchishi. + Talt[^u]ctun t[^u]de. + (on Galice Creek). + Tc[^e]m[^e] (Joshuas). + Tc[ve]tl[ve]stcan t[^u]nn[ve]. + [*Tcetlestcan tunne] + Terwar. + Tlatscanai. + Tolowa. + Tutu t[^u]nn[ve]. + +_Population._--The present number of the Athapascan family is about +32,899, of whom about 8,595, constituting the Northern group, are in +Alaska and British North America, according to Dall, Dawson, and the +Canadian Indian-Report for 1888; about 895, comprising the Pacific +group, are in Washington, Oregon, and California; and about 23,409, +belonging to the Southern group, are in Arizona, New Mexico, Colorado, +and Indian Territory. Besides these are the Lipan and some refugee +Apache, who are in Mexico. These have not been included in the above +enumeration, as there are no means of ascertaining their number. + +Northern group.--This may be said to consist of the following: + Ah-tena (1877) 364? + Ai-yan (1888) 250 + Al-ta-tin (Sicannie) estimated (1888) 500 + of whom there are at Fort Halkett (1887) 73 + of whom there are at Fort Liard (1887) 78 + Chippewyan, Yellow Knives, with a few Slave and Dog Rib + at Fort Resolution 469 + Dog Rib at Fort Norman 133 + Dog Rib, Slave, and Yellow Knives at Fort Rae 657 + Hare at Fort Good Hope 364 + Hare at Fort Norman 103 + Kai-yuh-kho-t['a]na (1877), Koyukukhot['a]na (1877), + and Unakhot['a]na (1877) 2,000? + K'nai-a Khot['a]na (1880) 250? + Kutchin and Bastard Loucheux at Fort Good Hope 95 + Kutchin at Peel River and La Pierre's House 337 + Kutchin on the Yukon (six tribes) 842 + Nahanie at Fort Good Hope 8 + Nahanie at Fort Halkett (including Mauvais Monde, + Bastard Nahanie, and Mountain Indians) 332 + Nahanie at Fort Liard 38 + Nahanie at Fort Norman 43 + --- + 421 + Nahanie at Fort Simpson and Big Island + (Hudson Bay Company's Territory) 87 + Slave, Dog Rib, and Hare at Fort Simpson and Big Island + (Hudson Bay Company's Territory) 658 + Slave at Fort Liard 281 + Slave at Fort Norman 84 + Ten['a]n Kutchin (1877) 700? + ----- + 8,595? + +To the Pacific Group may be assigned the following: + Hupa Indians, on Hoopa Valley Reservation, California 468 + Rogue River Indians at Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon 47 + Siletz Reservation, Oregon + (about one-half the Indians thereon) 300? + Umpqua at Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon 80 + --- + 895? + +Southern Group, consisting of Apache, Lipan, and Navajo: + Apache children at Carlisle, Pennsylvania 142 + Apache prisoners at Mount Vernon Barracks, Alabama 356 + Coyotero Apache (San Carlos Reservation) 733? + Jicarilla Apache (Southern Ute Reservation, Colorado) 808 + Lipan with Tonkaway on Oakland Reserve, Indian Territory 15? + Mescalero Apache (Mescalero Reservation, New Mexico) 513 + Na-isha Apache (Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservation, + Indian Territory) 326 + Navajo (most on Navajo Reservation, Arizona + and New Mexico; 4 at Carlisle, Pennsylvania) 17,208 + San Carlos Apache (San Carlos Reservation, Arizona) 1,352? + White Mountain Apache (San Carlos Reservation, Arizona) 36 + White Mountain Apache + (under military at Camp Apache, Arizona) 1,920 + ------ + 23,409? + + + + +ATTACAPAN FAMILY. + + + = Attacapas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, + 306, 1836. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II. pt. 1, xcix, 77, + 1848. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 343, 1850 (includes Attacapas and + Carankuas). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. + Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 426, 1859. + + = Attacapa, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846. + Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, 1847 (or "Men eaters"). Latham + in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 105, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 293, + 1860. + + = Attakapa, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856. Latham, + Opuscula, 366, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 477, 1862 (referred to + as one of the two most isolated languages of N.A.). + + = At['a]kapa, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Leg., I. 45, 1884. Gatschet in + Science, 414, Apr. 29, 1887. + + +Derivation: From a Choctaw word meaning "man-eater." + +Little is known of the tribe, the language of which forms the basis of +the present family. The sole knowledge possessed by Gallatin was derived +from a vocabulary and some scanty information furnished by Dr. John +Sibley, who collected his material in the year 1805. Gallatin states +that the tribe was reduced to 50 men. According to Dr. Sibley the +Attacapa language was spoken also by another tribe, the "Carankouas," +who lived on the coast of Texas, and who conversed in their own language +besides. In 1885 Mr. Gatschet visited the section formerly inhabited by +the Attacapa and after much search discovered one man and two women at +Lake Charles, Calcasieu Parish, Louisiana, and another woman living 10 +miles to the south; he also heard of five other women then scattered in +western Texas; these are thought to be the only survivors of the tribe. +Mr. Gatschet collected some two thousand words and a considerable body +of text. His vocabulary differs considerably from the one furnished by +Dr. Sibley and published by Gallatin, and indicates that the language of +the western branch of the tribe was dialectically distinct from that of +their brethren farther to the east. + +The above material seems to show that the Attacapa language is distinct +from all others, except possibly the Chitimachan. + + + + +BEOTHUKAN FAMILY. + + + = Bethuck, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856 (stated to + be "Algonkin rather than aught else"). Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. + Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 453, 1862. + + = Beothuk, Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., 408, Oct., 1885. + Gatschet, ibid., 411, July, 1886 (language affirmed to represent a + distinct linguistic family). Gatschet, ibid., 1, Jan-June, 1890. + + +Derivation: Beothuk signifies "Indian" or "red Indian." + +The position of the language spoken by the aborigines of Newfoundland +must be considered to be doubtful. + +In 1846 Latham examined the material then accessible, and was led to the +somewhat ambiguous statement that the language "was akin to those of the +ordinary American Indians rather than to the Eskimo; further +investigation showing that, of the ordinary American languages, it was +Algonkin rather than aught else." + +Since then Mr. Gatschet has been able to examine a much larger and more +satisfactory body of material, and although neither in amount nor +quality is the material sufficient to permit final and satisfactory +deductions, yet so far as it goes it shows that the language is quite +distinct from any of the Algonquian dialects, and in fact from any other +American tongue. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +It seems highly probable that the whole of Newfoundland at the time of +its discovery by Cabot in 1497 was inhabited by Beothuk Indians. + +In 1534 Cartier met with Indians inhabiting the southeastern part of the +island, who, very likely, were of this people, though the description is +too vague to permit certain identification. A century later the southern +portion of the island appears to have been abandoned by these Indians, +whoever they were, on account of European settlements, and only the +northern and eastern parts of the island were occupied by them. About +the beginning of the eighteenth century western Newfoundland was +colonized by the Micmac from Nova Scotia. As a consequence of the +persistent warfare which followed the advent of the latter and which was +also waged against the Beothuk by the Europeans, especially the French, +the Beothuk rapidly wasted in numbers. Their main territory was soon +confined to the neighborhood of the Exploits River. The tribe was +finally lost sight of about 1827, having become extinct, or possibly the +few survivors having crossed to the Labrador coast and joined the +Nascapi with whom the tribe had always been on friendly terms. + +Upon the map only the small portion of the island is given to the +Beothuk which is known definitely to have been occupied by them, viz., +the neighborhood of the Exploits River, though, as stated above, it +seems probable that the entire island was once in their possession. + + + + +CADDOAN FAMILY. + + + > Caddoes, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 306, + 1836 (based on Caddoes alone). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, + 1847. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1858 [gives as + languages Caddo, Red River, (Nandakoes, Tachies, Nabedaches)]. + + > Caddokies, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, + 1836 (same as his Caddoes). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 406, + 1847. + + > Caddo, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846 + (indicates affinities with Iroquois, Muskoge, Catawba, Pawnee). + Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848, (Caddo + only). Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848 (Caddos, etc.). + Ibid., 1852. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 338, 1850 (between the + Mississippi and Sabine). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 101, + 1856. Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 70, 1856 (finds + resemblances to Pawnee but keeps them separate). Buschmann, Spuren der + aztek. Sprache, 426, 448, 1859. Latham, Opuscula, 290, 366, 1860. + + > Caddo, Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 470, 1862 (includes Pawni and + Riccari). + + > Pawnees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 128, 306, + 1836 (two nations: Pawnees proper and Ricaras or Black Pawnees). + Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 408, 1847 (follows Gallatin). + Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 1848. Latham, Nat. + Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (or Panis; includes Loup and Republican Pawnees). + Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (gives as + languages: Pawnees, Ricaras, Tawakeroes, Towekas, Wachos?). Hayden, + Cont. Eth. and Phil. Missouri Indians, 232, 345, 1863 (includes + Pawnees and Arikaras). + + > Panis, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 117, 128, + 1836 (of Red River of Texas; mention of villages; doubtfully indicated + as of Pawnee family). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 407, 1847 + (supposed from name to be of same race with Pawnees of the Arkansa). + Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (Pawnees or). Gallatin in + Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 403, 1853 (here kept separate from + Pawnee family). + + > Pawnies, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (see + Pawnee above). + + > Pahnies, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. + + > Pawnee(?), Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 65, 1856 + (Kichai and Hueco vocabularies). + + = Pawnee, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 478, + 1878 (gives four groups, viz: Pawnees proper; Arickarees; Wichitas; + Caddoes). + + = Pani, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 42, 1884. Berghaus, Physik. + Atlas, map 72, 1887. + + > Towiaches. Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, + 128, 1836 (same as Panis above). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, + 407, 1847. + + > Towiachs, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (includes Towiach, + Tawakenoes, Towecas?, Wacos). + + > Towiacks, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. + + > Natchitoches, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, + 1836 (stated by Dr. Sibley to speak a language different from any + other). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 342, 1850. Prichard, Phys. Hist. + Mankind, V, 406, 1847 (after Gallatin). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. + Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (a single tribe only). + + > Aliche, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (near Nacogdoches; not + classified). + + > Yatassees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, + 1836 (the single tribe; said by Dr. Sibley to be different from any + other; referred to as a family). + + > Riccarees, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (kept distinct from + Pawnee family). + + > Washita, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 103, 1856. + Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 441, 1859 (revokes previous + opinion of its distinctness and refers it to Pawnee family). + + > Witchitas, Buschmann, ibid., (same as his Washita). + + +Derivation: From the Caddo term ka[']-ede, signifying "chief" (Gatschet). + +The Pawnee and Caddo, now known to be of the same linguistic family, +were supposed by Gallatin and by many later writers to be distinct, and +accordingly both names appear in the Archaeologia Americana as family +designations. Both names are unobjectionable, but as the term Caddo has +priority by a few pages preference is given to it. + +Gallatin states "that the Caddoes formerly lived 300 miles up Red River +but have now moved to a branch of Red River." He refers to the +Nandakoes, the Inies or Tachies, and the Nabedaches as speaking dialects +of the Caddo language. + +Under Pawnee two tribes were included by Gallatin: The Pawnees proper +and the Ricaras. The Pawnee tribes occupied the country on the Platte +River adjoining the Loup Fork. The Ricara towns were on the upper +Missouri in latitude 46 deg. 30'. The boundaries of the Caddoan family, +as at present understood, can best be given under three primary groups, +Northern, Middle, and Southern. + +_Northern group_.--This comprises the Arikara or Ree, now confined to a +small village (on Fort Berthold Reservation, North Dakota,) which they +share with the Mandan and Hidatsa tribes of the Siouan family. The +Arikara are the remains of ten different tribes of "Paneas," who had +been driven from their country lower down the Missouri River (near the +Ponka habitat in northern Nebraska) by the Dakota. In 1804 they were in +three villages, nearer their present location.[21] + + [Footnote 21: Lewis, Travels of Lewis and Clarke, 15, 1809.] + +According to Omaha tradition, the Arikara were their allies when these +two tribes and several others were east of the Mississippi River.[22] +Fort Berthold Reservation, their present abode, is in the northwest +corner of North Dakota. + + [Footnote 22: Dorsey in Am. Naturalist, March, 1886, p. 215.] + +_Middle group_.--This includes the four tribes or villages of Pawnee, +the Grand, Republican, Tapage, and Skidi. Dunbar says: "The original +hunting ground of the Pawnee extended from the Niobrara," in Nebraska, +"south to the Arkansas, but no definite boundaries can be fixed." In +modern times their villages have been on the Platte River west of +Columbus, Nebraska. The Omaha and Oto were sometimes southeast of them +near the mouth of the Platte, and the Comanche were northwest of them on +the upper part of one of the branches of the Loup Fork.[23] The Pawnee +were removed to Indian Territory in 1876. The Grand Pawnee and Tapage +did not wander far from their habitat on the Platte. The Republican +Pawnee separated from the Grand about the year 1796, and made a village +on a "large northwardly branch of the Kansas River, to which they have +given their name; afterwards they subdivided, and lived in different +parts of the country on the waters of Kansas River. In 1805 they +rejoined the Grand Pawnee." The Skidi (Panimaha, or Pawnee Loup), +according to Omaha tradition,[24] formerly dwelt east of the Mississippi +River, where they were the allies of the Arikara, Omaha, Ponka, etc. +After their passage of the Missouri they were conquered by the Grand +Pawnee, Tapage, and Republican tribes, with whom they have remained to +this day. De L'Isle[25] gives twelve Panimaha villages on the Missouri +River north of the Pani villages on the Kansas River. + + [Footnote 23: Dorsey, Omaha map of Nebraska.] + + [Footnote 24: Dorsey in Am. Nat., March, 1886, p. 215.] + + [Footnote 25: Carte de la Louisiane, 1718.] + +_Southern group_.--This includes the Caddo, Wichita, Kichai, and other +tribes or villages which were formerly in Texas, Louisiana, Arkansas, +and Indian Territory. + +The Caddo and Kichai have undoubtedly been removed from their priscan +habitats, but the Wichita, judging from the survival of local names +(Washita River, Indian Territory, Wichita Falls, Texas) and the +statement of La Harpe,[26] are now in or near one of their early abodes. +Dr. Sibley[27] locates the Caddo habitat 35 miles west of the main +branch of Red River, being 120 miles by land from Natchitoches, and they +formerly lived 375 miles higher up. Cornell's Atlas (1870) places Caddo +Lake in the northwest corner of Louisiana, in Caddo County. It also +gives both Washita and Witchita as the name of a tributary of Red River +of Louisiana. This duplication of names seems to show that the Wichita +migrated from northwestern Louisiana and southwestern Arkansas to the +Indian Territory. After comparing the statements of Dr. Sibley (as +above) respecting the habitats of the Anadarko, Ioni, Nabadache, and +Eyish with those of Schermerhorn respecting the K[a:]do hadatco,[28] of +Le Page Du Pratz (1758) concerning the Natchitoches, of Tonti[29] and La +Harpe[30] about the Yatasi, of La Harpe (as above) about the Wichita, +and of Sibley concerning the Kichai, we are led to fix upon the +following as the approximate boundaries of the habitat of the southern +group of the Caddoan family: Beginning on the northwest with that part +of Indian Territory now occupied by the Wichita, Chickasaw, and Kiowa +and Comanche Reservations, and running along the southern border of the +Choctaw Reservation to the Arkansas line; thence due east to the +headwaters of Washita or Witchita River, Polk County, Arkansas; thence +through Arkansas and Louisiana along the western bank of that river to +its mouth; thence southwest through Louisiana striking the Sabine River +near Salem and Belgrade; thence southwest through Texas to Tawakonay +Creek, and along that stream to the Brazos River; thence following that +stream to Palo Pinto, Texas; thence northwest to the mouth of the North +Fork of Red River; and thence to the beginning. + + [Footnote 26: In 1719, _fide_ Margry, VI, 289, "the Ousita village + is on the southwest branch of the Arkansas River."] + + [Footnote 27: 1805, in Lewis and Clarke, Discov., 1806, p. 66.] + + [Footnote 28: Second Mass, Hist. Coll., vol. 2, 1814, p. 23.] + + [Footnote 29: 1690, in French, Hist. Coll. La., vol. 1, p. 72.] + + [Footnote 30: 1719, in Margry, vol. 6, p. 264.] + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + A. Pawnee. + Grand Pawnee. + Tappas. + Republican Pawnee. + Skidi. + + B. Arikara. + + C. Wichita. + (Ki-ci[']-tcac, Omaha pronunciation of the name of a Pawnee tribe, + Ki-dhi[']-chash or Ki-ri[']-chash). + + D. Kichai. + + E. Caddo (K[:a][']-do). + + +_Population._--The present number of the Caddoan stock is 2,259, of whom +447 are on the Fort Berthold Reservation, North Dakota, and the rest in +the Indian Territory, some on the Ponca, Pawnee, and Otoe Reservation, +the others on the Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservation. Below is +given the population of the tribes officially recognized, compiled +chiefly from the Indian Report for 1889: + + Arikara 448 + Pawnee 824 + Wichita 176 + Towakarehu 145 + Waco 64 + --- 385 + Kichai 63 + Caddo 539 + ----- + Total 2,259 + + + + +CHIMAKUAN FAMILY. + + + = Chimakum, Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 431, 1855 (family doubtful). + + = Chemakum, Eells in Am. Antiquarian, 52, Oct., 1880 (considers + language different from any of its neighbors). + + < Puget Sound Group, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), + 474, 1878 (Chinakum included in this group). + + < Nootka, Bancroft, Native Races, III, 564, 1882 (contains Chimakum). + + +Derivation unknown. + +Concerning this language Gibbs, as above cited, states as follows: + +The language of the Chimakum "differs materially from either that of the +Clallams or the Nisqually, and is not understood by any of their +neighbors. In fact, they seem to have maintained it a State secret. To +what family it will ultimately be referred, cannot now be decided." + +Eells also asserts the distinctness of this language from any of its +neighbors. Neither of the above authors assigned the language family +rank, and accordingly Mr. Gatschet, who has made a comparison of +vocabularies and finds the language to be quite distinct from any other, +gives it the above name. + +The Chimakum are said to have been formerly one of the largest and most +powerful tribes of Puget Sound. Their warlike habits early tended to +diminish their numbers, and when visited by Gibbs in 1854 they counted +only about seventy individuals. This small remnant occupied some fifteen +small lodges on Port Townsend Bay. According to Gibbs "their territory +seems to have embraced the shore from Port Townsend to Port Ludlow."[31] +In 1884 there were, according to Mr. Myron Eells, about twenty +individuals left, most of whom are living near Port Townsend, +Washington. Three or four live upon the Skokomish Reservation at the +southern end of Hood's Canal. + + [Footnote 31: Dr. Boas was informed in 1889, by a surviving Chimakum + woman and several Clallam, that the tribe was confined to the + peninsula between Hood's Canal and Port Townsend.] + +The Quile-ute, of whom in 1889 there were 252 living on the Pacific +south of Cape Flattery, belong to the family. The Hoh, a sub-tribe of +the latter, number 71 and are under the Puyallup Agency. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + +The following tribes are recognized: + + Chimakum. + Quile-ute. + + + + +CHIMARIKAN FAMILY. + + + = Chim-a-ri[']-ko, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 474, 1877. Gatschet + in Mag. Am. Hist., 255, April, 1882 (stated to be a distinct family). + + +According to Powers, this family was represented, so far as known, by +two tribes in California, one the Chi-m['a]l-a-kwe, living on New River, +a branch of the Trinity, the other the Chimariko, residing upon the +Trinity itself from Burnt Ranch up to the mouth of North Fork, +California. The two tribes are said to have been as numerous formerly as +the Hupa, by whom they were overcome and nearly exterminated. Upon the +arrival of the Americans only twenty-five of the Chimalakwe were left. +In 1875 Powers collected a Chimariko vocabulary of about two hundred +words from a woman, supposed to be one of the last three women of that +tribe. In 1889 Mr. Curtin, while in Hoopa Valley, found a Chimariko man +seventy or more years old, who is believed to be one of the two living +survivors of the tribe. Mr. Curtin obtained a good vocabulary and much +valuable information relative to the former habitat and history of the +tribe. Although a study of these vocabularies reveals a number of words +having correspondences with the Kulanapan (Pomo) equivalents, yet the +greater number show no affinities with the dialects of the latter +family, or indeed with any other. The family is therefore classed as +distinct. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Chimariko. + Chimalakwe. + + + + +CHIMMESYAN FAMILY. + + + = Chimmesyan, Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 154, 1848 (between + 53 deg. 30' and 55 deg. 30' N.L.). Latham, Opuscula, 250, 1860. + + Chemmesyan, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (includes Naaskok, + Chemmesyan, Kitshatlah, Kethumish). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. + Lond., 72, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp. + Phil., 401, 1862. + + = Chymseyans, Kane, Wanderings of an Artist, app., 1859 (a census of + tribes of N.W. coast classified by languages). + + = Chimayans, Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 487, 1855 (gives Kane's list + but with many orthographical changes). Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 269, + 1869 (published in 1870). Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 36, 39, 40, 1877 + (probably distinct from T'linkets). Bancroft, Native Races, III, 564, + 607, 1882. + + = Tshimsian, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 14-25, 1884. + + = Tsimpsi-an['], Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 379, 1885 (mere mention of + family). + + X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 220, 1841 + (includes Chimmesyans). + + X Haidah, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 220, 1841 (same + as his Northern family). + + < Naas, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 1848 + (including Chimmesyan). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. + + < Naass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848. + Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. + + = Nasse, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 36, 40, 1877 (or Chimsyan). + + < Nass, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 606, 1882 (includes Nass and + Sebassa Indians of this family, also Hailtza). + + = Hydahs, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 473, + 1878 (includes Tsimsheeans, Nass, Skeenas, Sebasses of present + family). + + +Derivation: From the Chimsian ts'em, "on;" kcian, "main river:" "On the +main (Skeena) river." + +This name appears in a paper of Latham's published in 1848. To it is +referred a vocabulary of Tolmie's. The area where it is spoken is said +by Latham to be 50 deg. 30' and 55 deg. 30'. The name has become +established by long usage, and it is chiefly on this account that it has +been given preference over the Naas of Gallatin of the same year. The +latter name was given by Gallatin to a group of languages now known to +be not related, viz, Hailstla, Haceltzuk Billechola, and Chimeysan. +Billechola belongs under Salishan, a family name of Gallatin's of 1836. + +Were it necessary to take Naas as a family name it would best apply to +Chimsian, it being the name of a dialect and village of Chimsian +Indians, while it has no pertinency whatever to Hailstla and Haceltzuk, +which are closely related and belong to a family quite distinct from the +Chimmesyan. As stated above, however, the term Naas is rejected in favor +of Chimmesyan of the same date. + +For the boundaries of this family the linguistic map published by Tolmie +and Dawson, in 1884, is followed. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + +Following is a list of the Chimmesyan tribes, according to Boas:[32] + + A. Nasqa[']: + Nasqa[']. + Gyitksa[']n. + + B. Tsimshian proper: + Ts'emsia[']n. + Gyits'umr[a:][']lon. + Gyits'ala[']ser. + Gyitq[-a][']tla. + Gyitg.[-a][']ata. + Gyidesdzo[']. + + [Footnote 32: B.A.A.S. Fifth Rep. of Committee on NW. Tribes of + Canada. Newcastle-upon-Tyne meeting, 1889, pp. 8-9.] + + +_Population._--The Canadian Indian Report for 1888 records a total for +all the tribes of this family of 5,000. In the fall of 1887 about 1,000 +of these Indians, in charge of Mr. William Duncan, removed to Annette +Island, about 60 miles north of the southern boundary of Alaska, near +Port Chester, where they have founded a new settlement called New +Metlakahtla. Here houses have been erected, day and industrial schools +established, and the Indians are understood to be making remarkable +progress in civilization. + + + + +CHINOOKAN FAMILY. + + + > Chinooks, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, + 306, 1836 (a single tribe at mouth of Columbia). + + = Chinooks, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 198, 1846. Gallatin, after + Hale, in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 15, 1848 (or Tsinuk). + + = Tshinuk, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 562, 569, 1846 (contains + Watlala or Upper Chinook, including Watlala, Nihaloitih, or Echeloots; + and Tshinuk, including Tshinuk, Tlatsap, Wakaikam). + + = Tsinuk, Gallatin, after Hale, in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, + 15, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. + + > Cheenook, Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 236, 1848. Latham, + Opuscula, 253, 1860. + + > Chinuk, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 317, 1850 (same as Tshin['u]k; + includes Chin['u]ks proper, Klatsops, Kathlamut, Wak['a]ikam, Watlala, + Nihaloitih). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (mere + mention of family name). Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Buschmann. + Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 616-619, 1859. + + = Tschinuk, Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Latham in + Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (mere mention of family name). + Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 402, 1862 (cites + a short vocabulary of Watlala). + + = Tshinook, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 + (Chinooks, Clatsops, and Watlala). Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs. + Brit. Col., 51, 61, 1884. + + > Tshinuk, Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 616, 1859 (same as + his Chinuk). + + = T'sin[-u]k, Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 241, 1877 + (mere mention of family). + + = Chinook, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 167, 1877 (names and gives + habitats of tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 442, 1877. + + < Chinooks, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 474, + 1878 (includes Skilloots, Watlalas, Lower Chinooks, Wakiakurns, + Cathlamets, Clatsops, Calapooyas, Clackamas, Killamooks, Yamkally, + Chimook Jargon; of these Calapooyas and Yamkally are Kalapooian, + Killamooks are Salishan). + + > Chinook, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 626-628, 1882 (enumerates + Chinook, Wakiakum, Cathlamet, Clatsop, Multnomah, Skilloot, Watlala). + + X Nootka-Columbian, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 224, + 1841 (includes Cheenooks, and Cathlascons of present family). + + X Southern, Scouler, ibid., 234 (same as his Nootka-Columbian family + above). + + +The vocabulary of the Chinook tribe, upon which the family name was +based, was derived from the mouth of the Columbia. As now understood the +family embraces a number of tribes, speaking allied languages, whose +former homes extended from the mouth of the river for some 200 miles, or +to The Dalles. According to Lewis and Clarke, our best authorities on +the pristine home of this family, most of their villages were on the +banks of the river, chiefly upon the northern bank, though they probably +claimed the land upon either bank for several miles back. Their villages +also extended on the Pacific coast north nearly to the northern extreme +of Shoalwater Bay, and to the south to about Tillamook Head, some 20 +miles from the mouth of the Columbia. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Lower Chinook: + Chinook. + Clatsop. + + Upper Chinook: + Cathlamet. + Cathlapotle. + Chilluckquittequaw. + Clackama. + Cooniac. + Echeloot. + Multnoma. + Wahkiacum. + Wasco. + + +_Population._--There are two hundred and eighty-eight Wasco on the Warm +Springs Reservation, Oregon, and one hundred and fifty on the Yakama +Reservation, Washington. On the Grande Ronde Reservation, Oregon, there +are fifty-nine Clackama. From information derived from Indians by Mr. +Thomas Priestly, United States Indian Agent at Yakama, it is learned +that there still remain three or four families of "regular Chinook +Indians," probably belonging to one of the down-river tribes, about 6 +miles above the mouth of the Columbia. Two of these speak the Chinook +proper, and three have an imperfect command of Clatsop. There are eight +or ten families, probably also of one of the lower river tribes, living +near Freeport, Washington. + +Some of the Watlala, or Upper Chinook, live near the Cascades, about 55 +miles below The Dalles. There thus remain probably between five and six +hundred of the Indians of this family. + + + + +CHITIMACHAN FAMILY. + + + = Chitimachas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 114, + 117, 1836. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 407, 1847. + + = Chetimachas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 306, + 1836. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 1848. Latham, + Nat. Hist. Man, 341, 1850. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, + 402, 1853. + + = Chetimacha, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846. + Latham, Opuscula, 293, 1860. + + = Chetemachas, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 + (same as Chitimachas). + + = Shetimasha, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 44, 1884. Gatschet in + Science, 414, April 29, 1887. + + +Derivation: From Choctaw words tch['u]ti, "cooking vessels," m['a]sha, +"they possess," (Gatschet). + +This family was based upon the language of the tribe of the same name, +"formerly living in the vicinity of Lake Barataria, and still existing +(1836) in lower Louisiana." + +Du Pratz asserted that the Taensa and Chitimacha were kindred tribes of +the Na'htchi. A vocabulary of the Shetimasha, however, revealed to +Gallatin no traces of such affinity. He considered both to represent +distinct families, a conclusion subsequent investigations have +sustained. + +In 1881 Mr. Gatschet visited the remnants of this tribe in Louisiana. He +found about fifty individuals, a portion of whom lived on Grand River, +but the larger part in Charenton, St. Mary's Parish. The tribal +organization was abandoned in 1879 on the death of their chief. + + + + +CHUMASHAN FAMILY. + + + > Santa Barbara, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 85, 1856 + (includes Santa Barbara, Santa Inez, San Luis Obispo languages). + Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 531, 535, 538, 602, 1859. + Latham, Opuscula, 351, 1860. Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 550, 567, + 1877 (Kasu['a], Santa Inez, Id. of Santa Cruz, Santa Barbara). Gatschet + in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 419, 1879 (cites La Purisima, + Santa Inez, Santa Barbara, Kasu['a], Mugu, Santa Cruz Id.). + + X Santa Barbara, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 156, 1877 (Santa Inez, + Santa Barbara, Santa Cruz Id., San Luis Obispo, San Antonio). + + +Derivation: From Chumash, the name of the Santa Rosa Islanders. + +The several dialects of this family have long been known under the group +or family name, "Santa Barbara," which seems first to have been used in +a comprehensive sense by Latham in 1856, who included under it three +languages, viz: Santa Barbara, Santa Inez, and San Luis Obispo. The term +has no special pertinence as a family designation, except from the fact +that the Santa Barbara Mission, around which one of the dialects of the +family was spoken, is perhaps more widely known than any of the others. +Nevertheless, as it is the family name first applied to the group and +has, moreover, passed into current use its claim to recognition would +not be questioned were it not a compound name. Under the rule adopted +the latter fact necessitates its rejection. As a suitable substitute the +term Chumashan is here adopted. Chumash is the name of the Santa Rosa +Islanders, who spoke a dialect of this stock, and is a term widely known +among the Indians of this family. + +The Indians of this family lived in villages, the villages as a whole +apparently having no political connection, and hence there appears to +have been no appellation in use among them to designate themselves as a +whole people. + +Dialects of this language were spoken at the Missions of San +Buenaventura, Santa Barbara, Santa Inez, Purisima, and San Luis Obispo. +Kindred dialects were spoken also upon the Islands of Santa Rosa and +Santa Cruz, and also, probably, upon such other of the Santa Barbara +Islands as formerly were permanently inhabited. + +These dialects collectively form a remarkably homogeneous family, all of +them, with the exception of the San Luis Obispo, being closely related +and containing very many words in common. Vocabularies representing six +dialects of the language are in possession of the Bureau of Ethnology. + +The inland limits of this family can not be exactly defined, although a +list of more than one hundred villages with their sites, obtained by Mr. +Henshaw in 1884, shows that the tribes were essentially maritime and +were closely confined to the coast. + + +_Population._--In 1884 Mr. Henshaw visited the several counties formerly +inhabited by the populous tribes of this family and discovered that +about forty men, women, and children survived. The adults still speak +their old language when conversing with each other, though on other +occasions they use Spanish. The largest settlement is at San +Buenaventura, where perhaps 20 individuals live near the outskirts of +the town. + + + + +COAHUILTECAN FAMILY. + + + = Coahuilteco, Orozco y Berra, Geografia de las Lenguas de Mexico, + map, 1864. + + = Tejano o Coahuilteco, Pimentel, Cuadro Descriptivo y Comparativo de + las Lenguas Indigenas de Mexico, II, 409, 1865. (A preliminary notice + with example from the language derived from Garcia's Manual, 1760.) + + +Derivation: From the name of the Mexican State Coahuila. + +This family appears to have included numerous tribes in southwestern +Texas and in Mexico. They are chiefly known through the record of the +Rev. Father Bartolome Garcia (Manual para administrar, etc.), published +in 1760. In the preface to the "Manual" he enumerates the tribes and +sets forth some phonetic and grammatic differences between the dialects. + +On page 63 of his Geografia de las Lenguas de Mexico, 1864, Orozco y +Berra gives a list of the languages of Mexico and includes Coahuilteco, +indicating it as the language of Coahuila, Nuevo Leon, and Tamaulipas. +He does not, however, indicate its extension into Texas. It would thus +seem that he intended the name as a general designation for the language +of all the cognate tribes. + +Upon his colored ethnographic map, also, Orozco y Berra designates the +Mexican portion of the area formerly occupied by the tribes of this +family Coahuilteco.[33] In his statement that the language and tribes +are extinct this author was mistaken, as a few Indians still survive who +speak one of the dialects of this family, and in 1886 Mr. Gatschet +collected vocabularies of two tribes, the Comecrudo and Cotoname, who +live on the Rio Grande, at Las Prietas, State of Tamaulipas. Of the +Comecrudo some twenty-five still remain, of whom seven speak the +language. + + [Footnote 33: Geografia de las Lenguas de Mexico, map, 1864.] + +The Cotoname are practically extinct, although Mr. Gatschet obtained one +hundred and twenty-five words from a man said to be of this blood. +Besides the above, Mr. Gatschet obtained information of the existence of +two women of the Pinto or Pakaw['a] tribe who live at La Volsa, near +Reynosa, Tamaulipas, on the Rio Grande, and who are said to speak their +own language. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Alasapa. Pajalate. + Cachopostate. Pakaw['a]. + Casa chiquita. Pamaque. + Chayopine. Pampopa. + Comecrudo. Pastancoya. + Cotoname. Patacale. + Mano de perro. Pausane. + Mescal. Payseya. + Miakan. Sanipao. + Orejone. T[^a]came. + Pacu[^a]che. Venado. + + + + +COPEHAN FAMILY. + + + > Cop-eh, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 421, 1853 (mentioned + as a dialect). + + = Copeh, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc., Lond., 79, 1856 (of Upper + Sacramento; cites vocabs. from Gallatin and Schoolcraft). Latham, + Opuscula, 345, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 412, 1862. + + = Wintoons, Powers in Overland Monthly, 530, June, 1874 (Upper + Sacramento and Upper Trinity). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 160, 1877 + (defines habitat and names tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. + Miscellany, 434, 1877. + + = Win-t['u]n, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 518-534, 1877 + (vocabularies of Wintun, Sacramento River, Trinity Indians). Gatschet + in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 418, 1879 (defines area occupied + by family). + + X Klamath, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, + 1878 (cited as including Copahs, Patawats, Wintoons). Bancroft, Nat. + Races, III, 565, 1882 (contains Copah). + + > Napa, Keane, ibid., 476, 524, 1878 (includes Myacomas, Calayomanes, + Caymus, Ulucas, Suscols). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 567, 1882 + (includes Napa, Myacoma, Calayomane, Caymus, Uluca, Suscol). + + +This name was proposed by Latham with evident hesitation. He says of it: +"How far this will eventually turn out to be a convenient name for the +group (or how far the group itself will be real), is uncertain." Under +it he places two vocabularies, one from the Upper Sacramento and the +other from Mag Redings in Shasta County. The head of Putos Creek is +given as headquarters for the language. Recent investigations have +served to fully confirm the validity of the family. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The territory of the Copehan family is bounded on the north by Mount +Shasta and the territory of the Sastean and Lutuamian families, on the +east by the territory of the Palaihnihan, Yanan, and Pujunan families, +and on the south by the bays of San Pablo and Suisun and the lower +waters of the Sacramento. + +The eastern boundary of the territory begins about 5 miles east of Mount +Shasta, crosses Pit River a little east of Squaw Creek, and reaches to +within 10 miles of the eastern bank of the Sacramento at Redding. From +Redding to Chico Creek the boundary is about 10 miles east of the +Sacramento. From Chico downward the Pujunan family encroaches till at +the mouth of Feather River it occupies the eastern bank of the +Sacramento. The western boundary of the Copehan family begins at the +northernmost point of San Pablo Bay, trends to the northwest in a +somewhat irregular line till it reaches John's Peak, from which point it +follows the Coast Range to the tipper waters of Cottonwood Creek, whence +it deflects to the west, crossing the headwaters of the Trinity and +ending at the southern boundary of the Sastean family. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + A. Patwin: B. Wintu: + Chenposel. Daupom. + Gruilito. Nomlaki. + Korusi. Nommuk. + Liwaito. Norelmuk. + Lolsel. Normuk. + Makhelchel. Waikenmuk. + Malaka. Wailaki. + Napa. + Olelato. + Olposel. + Suisun. + Todetabi. + Topaidisel. + Waikosel. + Wailaksel. + + + + +COSTANOAN FAMILY. + + + = Costano, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 82, 1856 (includes + the Ahwastes, Olhones or Costanos, Romonans, Tulornos, Altatmos). + Latham, Opuscula, 348, 1860. + + < Mutsun, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157, 1877 (includes Ahwastes, + Olhones, Altahmos, Romonans, Tulomos). Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, + 535, 1877 (includes under this family vocabs. of Costano, Mutsun, + Santa Clara, Santa Cruz). + + +Derivation: From the Spanish costano, "coast-men." + +Under this group name Latham included five tribes, given above, which +were under the supervision of the Mission Dolores. He gives a few words +of the Romonan language, comparing it with Tshokoyem which he finds to +differ markedly. He finally expresses the opinion that, notwithstanding +the resemblance of a few words, notably personal pronouns, to Tshokoyem +of the Moquelumnan group, the affinities of the dialects of the Costano +are with the Salinas group, with which, however, he does not unite it +but prefers to keep it by itself. Later, in 1877, Mr. Gatschet,[34] +under the family name Mutsun, united the Costano dialects with the ones +classified by Latham under Moquelumnan. This arrangement was followed by +Powell in his classification of vocabularies.[35] More recent comparison +of all the published material by Mr. Curtin, of the Bureau, revealed +very decided and apparently radical differences between the two groups +of dialects. In 1888 Mr. H. W. Henshaw visited the coast to the north +and south of San Francisco, and obtained a considerable body of +linguistic material for further comparison. The result seems fully +to justify the separation of the two groups as distinct families. + + [Footnote 34: Mag. Am. Hist., 1877, p. 157.] + + [Footnote 35: Cont. N.A. Eth., 1877, vol. 3, p. 535.] + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The territory of the Costanoan family extends from the Golden Gate to a +point near the southern end of Monterey Bay. On the south it is bounded +from Monterey Bay to the mountains by the Esselenian territory. On the +east side of the mountains it extends to the southern end of Salinas +Valley. On the east it is bounded by a somewhat irregular line running +from the southern end of Salinas Valley to Gilroy Hot Springs and the +upper waters of Conestimba Creek, and, northward from the latter points +by the San Joaquin River to its mouth. The northern boundary is formed +by Suisun Bay, Carquinez Straits, San Pablo and San Francisco Bays, and +the Golden Gate. + + +_Population._--The surviving Indians of the once populous tribes of this +family are now scattered over several counties and probably do not +number, all told, over thirty individuals, as was ascertained by Mr. +Henshaw in 1888. Most of these are to be found near the towns of Santa +Cruz and Monterey. Only the older individuals speak the +language. + + + + +ESKIMAUAN FAMILY. + + + > Eskimaux, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 9, 305, + 1836. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. + Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. + + = Eskimo, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. + Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 288, 1850 (general remarks on origin and + habitat). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 689, 1859. Latham, El. + Comp. Phil., 385, 1862. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 562, 574, 1882. + + > Esquimaux, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 367-371, 1847 (follows + Gallatin). Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 182-191, 1848. Latham, + Opuscula, 266-274, 1860. + + > Eskimo, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 266, 1869 (treats of Alaskan Eskimo + and Tuski only). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (excludes the + Aleutian). + + > Eskimos, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 1878 + (excludes Aleutian). + + > Oun['a]ngan, Veniaminoff, Zapiski ob ostrova[ch] Unalashkinskago + otdailo, II, 1, 1840 (Aleutians only). + + > [-U]n[vu]['g][vu]n [*Unugun], Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 22, 1877 + (Aleuts a division of his Orarian group). + + > Unangan, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. + + X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 218, 1841 + (includes Ugalentzes of present family). + + X Haidah, Scouler, ibid., 224, 1841 (same as his Northern family). + + > Ugaljachmutzi, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 + (lat. 60 deg., between Prince Williams Sound and Mount St. Elias, + perhaps Athapascas). + + Aleuten, Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizzen d. Voelker Russ. Am., 1855. + + > Aleutians, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 266, 1869. Dall, Alaska and + Resources, 374, 1870 (in both places a division of his Orarian + family). + + > Aleuts, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 1878 + (consist of Unalaskans of mainland and of Fox and Shumagin Ids., with + Akkhas of rest of Aleutian Arch.). + + > Aleut, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 562, 1882 (two dialects, Unalaska + and Atkha). + + > Konjagen, Holmberg, Ethnograph. Skizzen Volker Russ. Am., 1855 + (Island of Koniag or Kadiak). + + = Orarians, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 265, 1869 (group name; includes + Innuit, Aleutians, Tuski). Dall, Alaska and Resources, 374, 1870. Dall + in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 8, 9, 1877. + + X Tinneb, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 269, 1869 (includes "Ugalense"). + + > Innuit, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 9, 1877 ("Major group" of + Orarians: treats of Alaska Innuit only). Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map + 73, 1887 (excludes the Aleutians). + + +Derivation: From an Algonkin word eskimantik, "eaters of raw flesh." + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The geographic boundaries of this family were set forth by Gallatin +in 1836 with considerable precision, and require comparatively little +revision and correction. + +In the linear extent of country occupied, the Eskimauan is the most +remarkable of the North American linguistic families. It extends +coastwise from eastern Greenland to western Alaska and to the extremity +of the Aleutian Islands, a distance of considerably more than 5,000 +miles. The winter or permanent villages are usually situated on the +coast and are frequently at considerable distances from one another, +the intervening areas being usually visited in summer for hunting and +fishing purposes. The interior is also visited by the Eskimo for the +purpose of hunting reindeer and other animals, though they rarely +penetrate farther than 50 miles. A narrow strip along the coast, +perhaps 30 miles wide, will probably, on the average, represent +Eskimo occupancy. + +Except upon the Aleutian Islands, the dialects spoken over this vast +area are very similar, the unity of dialect thus observable being in +marked contrast to the tendency to change exhibited in other linguistic +families of North America. + +How far north the east coast of Greenland is inhabited by Eskimo is +not at present known. In 1823 Capt. Clavering met with two families of +Eskimo north of 74 deg. 30'. Recent explorations (1884-'85) by Capt. Holm, +of the Danish Navy, along the southeast coast reveal the presence of +Eskimo between 65 deg. and 66 deg. north latitude. These Eskimo profess +entire ignorance of any inhabitants north of themselves, which may be +taken as proof that if there are fiords farther up the coast which are +inhabited there has been no intercommunication in recent times at least +between these tribes and those to the south. It seems probable that more +or less isolated colonies of Eskimo do actually exist along the east +coast of Greenland far to the north. + +Along the west coast of Greenland, Eskimo occupancy extends to +about 74 deg.. This division is separated by a considerable interval of +uninhabited coast from the Etah Eskimo who occupy the coast from Smith +Sound to Cape York, their most northerly village being in 78 deg. 18'. +For our knowledge of these interesting people we are chiefly indebted to +Ross and Bessels. + +In Grinnell Land, Gen. Greely found indications of permanent Eskimo +habitations near Fort Conger, lat. 81 deg. 44'. + +On the coast of Labrador the Eskimo reach as far south as Hamilton +Inlet, about 55 deg. 30'. Not long since they extended to the Straits of +Belle Isle, 50 deg. 30'. + +On the east coast of Hudson Bay the Eskimo reach at present nearly to +James Bay. According to Dobbs[36] in 1744 they extended as far south as +east Maine River, or about 52 deg.. The name Notaway (Eskimo) River at +the southern end of the bay indicates a former Eskimo extension to that +point. + + [Footnote 36: Dobbs (Arthur). An account of the Countries adjoining + to Hudson's Bay. London, 1744.] + +According to Boas and Bessels the most northern Eskimo of the middle +group north of Hudson Bay reside on the southern extremity of Ellesmere +Land around Jones Sound. Evidences of former occupation of Prince +Patrick, Melville, and other of the northern Arctic islands are not +lacking, but for some unknown cause, probably a failure of food supply, +the Eskimo have migrated thence and the islands are no longer inhabited. +In the western part of the central region the coast appears to be +uninhabited from the Coppermine River to Cape Bathurst. To the west of +the Mackenzie, Herschel Island marks the limit of permanent occupancy by +the Mackenzie Eskimo, there being no permanent villages between that +island and the settlements at Point Barrow. + +The intervening strip of coast is, however, undoubtedly hunted over more +or less in summer. The Point Barrow Eskimo do not penetrate far into the +interior, but farther to the south the Eskimo reach to the headwaters of +the Nunatog and Koyuk Rivers. Only visiting the coast for trading +purposes, they occupy an anomalous position among Eskimo. + +Eskimo occupancy of the rest of the Alaska coast is practically +continuous throughout its whole extent as far to the south and east as +the Atna or Copper River, where begin the domains of the Koluschan +family. Only in two places do the Indians of the Athapascan family +intrude upon Eskimo territory, about Cook's Inlet, and at the mouth of +Copper River. + +Owing to the labors of Dall, Petroff, Nelson, Turner, Murdoch, and +others we are now pretty well informed as to the distribution of the +Eskimo in Alaska. + +Nothing is said by Gallatin of the Aleutian Islanders and they were +probably not considered by him to be Eskimauan. They are now known to +belong to this family, though the Aleutian dialects are unintelligible +to the Eskimo proper. Their distribution has been entirely changed since +the advent of the Russians and the introduction of the fur trade, and at +present they occupy only a very small portion of the islands. Formerly +they were much more numerous than at present and extended throughout the +chain. + +The Eskimauan family is represented in northeast Asia by the Yuit of the +Chukchi peninsula, who are to be distinguished from the sedentary +Chukchi or the Tuski of authors, the latter being of Asiatic origin. +According to Dall the former are comparatively recent arrivals from the +American continent, and, like their brethren of America, are confined +exclusively to the coast. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES AND VILLAGES. + + Greenland group-- Labrador group: Alaska group: + East Greenland villages: Itivimiut. Chiglit. + Akorninak. Kiguaqtagmiut. Chugachigmiut. + Aluik. Suqinimiut. Ikogmiut. + Anarnitsok. Taqagmiut. Imahklimiut. + Angmagsalik. Inguhklimiut. + Igdlolnarsuk. Middle Group: Kaialigmiut. + Ivimiut. Aggomiut. Kangmaligmiut. + Kemisak. Ahaknanelet. Kaviagmiut. + Kikkertarsoak. Aivillirmiut. Kittegareut. + Kinarbik. Akudliarmiut. Kopagmiut. + Maneetsuk. Akudnirmiut. Kuagmiut. + Narsuk. Amitormiut. Kuskwogmiut. + Okkiosorbik. Iglulingmiut. Magemiut. + Sermiligak. Kangormiut. Mahlemiut. + Sermilik. Kinnepatu. Nunatogmiut. + Taterat. Kramalit. Nunivagmiut. + Umanak. Nageuktormiut. Nushagagmiut. + Umerik. Netchillirmiut. Nuwungmiut. + Nugumiut. Oglemiut. + West coast villages: Okomiut. Selawigmiut. + Akbat. Pilinginiut. Shiwokugmiut. + Karsuit. Sagdlirmiut. Ukivokgmiut. + Tessuisak. Sikosuilarmiut. Unaligmiut. + Sinimiut. + Ugjulirmiut. Aleutian group: + Ukusiksalingmiut. Atka. + Unalashka. + + Asiatic group: + Yuit. + + +_Population._--Only a rough approximation of the population of the +Eskimo can be given, since of some of the divisions next to nothing is +known. Dall compiles the following estimates of the Alaskan Eskimo from +the most reliable figures up to 1885: Of the Northwestern Innuit 3,100 +(?), including the Kopagmiut, Kangmaligmiut, Nuwukmiut, Nunatogmiut, +Kuagmiut, the Inguhklimiut of Little Diomede Island 40 (?), Shiwokugmiut +of St. Lawrence Island 150 (?), the Western Innuit 14,500 (?), the +Aleutian Islanders (Unungun) 2,200 (?); total of the Alaskan Innuit, +about 20,000. + +The Central or Baffin Land Eskimo are estimated by Boas to number about +1,100.[37] + + [Footnote 37: Sixth Ann. Rep. Bu. Eth., 426, 1888.] + +From figures given by Rink, Packard, and others, the total number of +Labrador Eskimo is believed to be about 2,000. + +According to Holm (1884-'85) there are about 550 Eskimo on the east +coast of Greenland. On the west coast the mission Eskimo numbered 10,122 +in 1886, while the northern Greenland Eskimo, the Arctic Highlanders of +Ross, number about 200. + +Thus throughout the Arctic regions generally there is a total of about +34,000. + + + + +ESSELENIAN FAMILY. + + + < Salinas, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes + Gioloco?, Ruslen, Soledad, Eslen, Carmel, San Antonio, and San Miguel, + cited as including Eslen). Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860. + + +As afterwards mentioned under the Salinan family, the present family was +included by Latham in the heterogeneous group called by him Salinas. For +reasons there given the term Salinan was restricted to the San Antonio +and San Miguel languages, leaving the present family without a name. It +is called Esselenian, from the name of the single tribe Esselen, of +which it is composed. + +Its history is a curious and interesting one. Apparently the first +mention of the tribe and language is to be found in the Voyage de la +Perouse, Paris, 1797, page 288, where Lamanon (1786) states that the +language of the Ecclemachs (Esselen) differs "absolutely from all those +of their neighbors." He gives a vocabulary of twenty-two words and by +way of comparison a list of the ten numerals of the Achastlians +(Costanoan family). It was a study of the former short vocabulary, +published by Taylor in the California Farmer, October 24, 1862, that +first led to the supposition of the distinctness of this language. + +A few years later the Esselen people came under the observation of +Galiano,[38] who mentions the Eslen and Runsien as two distinct nations, +and notes a variety of differences in usages and customs which are of no +great weight. It is of interest to note, however, that this author also +appears to have observed essential differences in the languages of the +two peoples, concerning which he says: "The same difference as in usage +and custom is observed in the languages of the two nations, as will be +perceived from the following comparison with which we will conclude this +chapter." + + [Footnote 38: Relacion del viage hecho por las Goletas Sutil y + Mexicana en el ano de 1792. Madrid, 1802, p. 172.] + +Galiano supplies Esselen and Runsien vocabularies of thirty-one words, +most of which agree with the earlier vocabulary of Lamanon. These were +published by Taylor in the California Farmer under date of April 20, +1860. + +In the fall of 1888 Mr. H. W. Henshaw visited the vicinity of Monterey +with the hope of discovering survivors of these Indians. Two women were +found in the Salinas Valley to the south who claimed to be of Esselen +blood, but neither of them was able to recall any of the language, both +having learned in early life to speak the Runsien language in place of +their own. An old woman was found in the Carmelo Valley near Monterey +and an old man living near the town of Cayucos, who, though of Runsien +birth, remembered considerable of the language of their neighbors with +whom they were connected by marriage. From them a vocabulary of one +hundred and ten words and sixty-eight phrases and short sentences were +obtained. These serve to establish the general correctness of the short +lists of words collected so long ago by Lamanon and Galiano, and they +also prove beyond reasonable doubt that the Esselen language forms a +family by itself and has no connection with any other known. + +The tribe or tribes composing this family occupied a narrow strip of the +California coast from Monterey Bay south to the vicinity of the Santa +Lucia Mountain, a distance of about 50 miles. + + + + +IROQUOIAN FAMILY. + + + > Iroquois, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 21, 23, 305, 1836 + (excludes Cherokee). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 381, 1847 + (follows Gallatin). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, + 77, 1848 (as in 1836). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, + 1853. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856. Latham, + Opuscula, 327, 1860. Latham, Elements Comp. Phil., 463, 1862. + + > Irokesen, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. + + X Irokesen, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (includes Kataba and + said to be derived from Dakota). + + > Huron-Iroquois, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 243, 1840. + + > Wyandot-Iroquois, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), + 460, 468, 1878. + + > Cherokees, Gallatin in Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 89, 306, 1836 (kept + apart from Iroquois though probable affinity asserted). Bancroft, + Hist. U.S., III, 246, 1840. Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 401, + 1847. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. + Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856 (a separate group + perhaps to be classed with Iroquois and Sioux). Gallatin in + Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. + Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 472, 1878 (same + as Chelekees or Tsalagi--"apparently entirely distinct from all other + American tongues"). + + > Tschirokies, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. + + > Chelekees, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 473, + 1878 (or Cherokees). + + > Cheroki, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 34, 1884. Gatschet in + Science, 413, April 29, 1887. + + = Huron-Cherokee, Hale in Am. Antiq., 20, Jan., 1883 (proposed as a + family name instead of Huron-Iroquois; relationship to Iroquois + affirmed). + + +Derivation: French, adaptation of the Iroquois word hiro, used to +conclude a speech, and kou['e], an exclamation (Charlevoix). Hale gives +as possible derivations ierokwa, the indeterminate form of the verb to +smoke, signifying "they who smoke;" also the Cayuga form of bear, +iakwai.[39] Mr. Hewitt[39] suggests the Algonkin words [-i]r[-i]n, true, +or real; ako, snake; with the French termination ois, the word becomes +Irinakois. + + [Footnote 39: Iroquois Book of Rites, 1883, app., p. 173.] + + [Footnote 40: American Anthropologist, 1888, vol. 1, p. 188.] + +With reference to this family it is of interest to note that as early as +1798 Barton[41] compared the Cheroki language with that of the Iroquois +and stated his belief that there was a connection between them. +Gallatin, in the Archaeologia Americana, refers to the opinion expressed +by Barton, and although he states that he is inclined to agree with that +author, yet he does not formally refer Cheroki to that family, +concluding that "We have not a sufficient knowledge of the grammar, and +generally of the language of the Five Nations, or of the Wyandots, to +decide that question."[42] + + [Footnote 41: New Views of the Origin of the Tribes and Nations of + America. Phila., 1798.] + + [Footnote 42: Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., 1836, vol. 2, p. 92.] + +Mr. Hale was the first to give formal expression to his belief in the +affinity of the Cheroki to Iroquois.[43] Recently extensive Cheroki +vocabularies have come into possession of the Bureau of Ethnology, and a +careful comparison of them with ample Iroquois material has been made by +Mr. Hewitt. The result is convincing proof of the relationship of the +two languages as affirmed by Barton so long ago. + + [Footnote 43: Am. Antiq., 1883, vol. 5, p. 20.] + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +Unlike most linguistic stocks, the Iroquoian tribes did not occupy a +continuous area, but when first known to Europeans were settled in three +distinct regions, separated from each other by tribes of other lineage. +The northern group was surrounded by tribes of Algonquian stock, while +the more southern groups bordered upon the Catawba and Maskoki. + +A tradition of the Iroquois points to the St. Lawrence region as the +early home of the Iroquoian tribes, whence they gradually moved down to +the southwest along the shores of the Great Lakes. + +When Cartier, in 1534, first explored the bays and inlets of the Gulf of +St. Lawrence he met a Huron-Iroquoian people on the shores of the Bay of +Gaspe, who also visited the northern coast of the gulf. In the following +year when he sailed up the St. Lawrence River he found the banks of the +river from Quebec to Montreal occupied by an Iroquoian people. From +statements of Champlain and other early explorers it seems probable that +the Wyandot once occupied the country along the northern shore of Lake +Ontario. + +The Conestoga, and perhaps some allied tribes, occupied the country +about the Lower Susquehanna, in Pennsylvania and Maryland, and have +commonly been regarded as an isolated body, but it seems probable that +their territory was contiguous to that of the Five Nations on the north +before the Delaware began their westward movement. + +As the Cherokee were the principal tribe on the borders of the southern +colonies and occupied the leading place in all the treaty negotiations, +they came to be considered as the owners of a large territory to which +they had no real claim. Their first sale, in 1721, embraced a tract in +South Carolina, between the Congaree and the South Fork of the +Edisto,[44] but about one-half of this tract, forming the present +Lexington County, belonging to the Congaree.[45] In 1755 they sold a +second tract above the first and extending across South Carolina from +the Savannah to the Catawba (or Wateree),[46] but all of this tract east +of Broad River belonged to other tribes. The lower part, between the +Congaree and the Wateree, had been sold 20 years before, and in the +upper part the Broad River was acknowledged as the western Catawba +boundary.[48] In 1770 they sold a tract, principally in Virginia and +West Virginia, bounded east by the Great Kanawha,[47] but the Iroquois +claimed by conquest all of this tract northwest of the main ridge of the +Alleghany and Cumberland Mountains, and extending at least to the +Kentucky River,[49] and two years previously they had made a treaty +with Sir William Johnson by which they were recognized as the owners of +all between Cumberland Mountains and the Ohio down to the Tennessee.[50] +The Cumberland River basin was the only part of this tract to which the +Cherokee had any real title, having driven out the former occupants, the +Shawnee, about 1721.[51] The Cherokee had no villages north of the +Tennessee (this probably includes the Holston as its upper part), and at +a conference at Albany the Cherokee delegates presented to the Iroquois +the skin of a deer, which they said belonged to the Iroquois, as the +animal had been killed north of the Tennessee.[52] In 1805, 1806, and +1817 they sold several tracts, mainly in middle Tennessee, north of the +Tennessee River and extending to the Cumberland River watershed, but +this territory was claimed and had been occupied by the Chickasaw, and +at one conference the Cherokee admitted their claim.[53] The adjacent +tract in northern Alabama and Georgia, on the headwaters of the Coosa, +was not permanently occupied by the Cherokee until they began to move +westward, about 1770. + + [Footnote 44: Cession No. 1, on Royce's Cherokee map, 1884.] + + [Footnote 45: Howe in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1854, vol. 4, + p. 163.] + + [Footnote 46: Cession 2, on Royce's Cherokee map, 1884.] + + [Footnote 47: Howe in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1854, vol. 4, pp. + 155-159.] + + [Footnote 48: Cession 4, on Royce's Cherokee map, 1884.] + + [Footnote 49: Sir William Johnson in Parkman's Conspiracy of + Pontiac, app.] + + [Footnote 50: Bancroft, Hist. U.S.] + + [Footnote 51: Ramsey, Annals of Tennessee, 1853.] + + [Footnote 52: Ramsey, Annals of Tennessee, 1853.] + + [Footnote 53: Blount (1792) in Am. State Papers, 1832, vol. 4, + p. 336.] + +The whole region of West Virginia, Kentucky, and the Cumberland River +region of Tennessee was claimed by the Iroquois and Cherokee, but the +Iroquois never occupied any of it and the Cherokee could not be said to +occupy any beyond the Cumberland Mountains. The Cumberland River was +originally held by the Shawnee, and the rest was occupied, so far as it +was occupied at all, by the Shawnee, Delaware, and occasionally by the +Wyandot and Mingo (Iroquoian), who made regular excursions southward +across the Ohio every year to hunt and to make salt at the licks. Most +of the temporary camps or villages in Kentucky and West Virginia were +built by the Shawnee and Delaware. The Shawnee and Delaware were the +principal barrier to the settlement of Kentucky and West Virginia for a +period of 20 years, while in all that time neither the Cherokee nor the +Iroquois offered any resistance or checked the opposition of the Ohio +tribes. + +The Cherokee bounds in Virginia should be extended along the mountain +region as far at least as the James River, as they claim to have lived +at the Peaks of Otter,[54] and seem to be identical with the Rickohockan +or Rechahecrian of the early Virginia writers, who lived in the +mountains beyond the Monacan, and in 1656 ravaged the lowland country as +far as the site of Richmond and defeated the English and the Powhatan +Indians in a pitched battle at that place.[55] + + [Footnote 54: Schoolcraft, Notes on Iroquois, 1847.] + + [Footnote 55: Bancroft, Hist. U.S.] + +The language of the Tuscarora, formerly of northeastern North Carolina, +connect them directly with the northern Iroquois. The Chowanoc and +Nottoway and other cognate tribes adjoining the Tuscarora may have been +offshoots from that tribe. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Cayuga. + Cherokee. + Conestoga. + Erie. + Mohawk. + Neuter. + Nottoway. + Oneida. + Onondaga. + Seneca. + Tionontate. + Tuscarora. + Wyandot. + + +_Population._--The present number of the Iroquoian stock is about +43,000, of whom over 34,000 (including the Cherokees) are in the United +States while nearly 9,000 are in Canada. Below is given the population +of the different tribes, compiled chiefly from the Canadian Indian +Report for 1888, and the United States Census Bulletin for 1890: + + Cherokee: + Cherokee and Choctaw Nations, Indian Territory + (exclusive of adopted Indians, negroes, and whites) 25,557 + Eastern Band, Qualla Reservation, Cheowah, etc., North Carolina + (exclusive of those practically white) 1,500? + Lawrence school, Kansas 6 + ------ + 27,063 + Caughnawaga: + Caughnawaga, Quebec 1,673 + + Cayuga: + Grand River, Ontario 972? + With Seneca, Quapaw Agency, Indian Territory (total 255) 128? + Cattaraugus Reserve, New York 165 + Other Reserves in New York 36 + ------ + 1,301? + "Iroquois": + Of Lake of Two Mountains, Quebec, mainly Mohawk + (with Algonquin) 345 + With Algonquin at Gibson, Ontario (total 131) 31? + ------ + 376? + Mohawk: + Quinte Bay, Ontario 1,050 + Grand River, Ontario 1,302 + Tonawanda, Onondaga, and Cattaraugus Reserves, New York 6 + ------ + 2,358 + Oneida: + Oneida and other Reserves, New York 295 + Green Bay Agency, Wisconsin ("including homeless Indians") 1,716 + Carlisle and Hampton schools 104 + Thames River, Ontario 778 + Grand River, Ontario 236 + ------ + 3,129 + Onondaga: + Onondaga Reserve, New York 380 + Allegany Reserve, New York 77 + Cattaraugus Reserve, New York 38 + Tuscarora (41) and Tonawanda (4) Reserves, New York 45 + Carlisle and Hampton schools 4 + Grand River, Ontario 346 + ------ + 890 + Seneca: + With Cayuga, Quapaw Agency, Indian Territory (total 255) 127? + Allegany Reserve, New York 862 + Cattaraugus Reserve, New York 1,318 + Tonawanda Reserve, New York 517 + Tusarora and Onondaga Reserves, New York 12 + Lawrence, Hampton, and Carlisle schools 13 + Grand River, Ontario 206 + ------ + 3,055? + St. Regis: + St. Regis Reserve, New York 1,053 + Onondaga and other Reserves, New York 17 + St. Regis Reserve, Quebec 1,179 + ------ + 2,249 + Tuscarora: + Tuscarora Reserve, New York 398 + Cattaraugus and Tonawanda Reserves, New York 6 + Grand River, Ontario 329 + ------ + 733 + Wyandot: + Quapaw Agency, Indian Territory 288 + Lawrence, Hampton, and Carlisle schools 18 + "Hurons" of Lorette, Quebec 279 + "Wyandots" of Anderdon, Ontario 98 + ------ + 683 + +The Iroquois of St. Regis, Caughnawaga, Lake of Two Mountains (Oka), and +Gibson speak a dialect mainly Mohawk and Oneida, but are a mixture of +all the tribes of the original Five Nations. + + + + +KALAPOOIAN FAMILY. + + + = Kalapooiah, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 335, 1841 + (includes Kalapooiah and Yamkallie; thinks the Umpqua and Cathlascon + languages are related). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 599, + 617, 1859, (follows Scouler). + + = Kalapuya, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 3217, 584, 1846 (of Willamet + Valley above Falls). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., I pt. 1, c, 17, + 77, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1853. Gallatin in + Sohoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Latham in Trans. Philolog. + Soc. Lond., 73, 1856. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 617, 1859. + Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Gatschet in Mag. Arn. Hist., 167, 1877. + Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 443, 1877. + + > Calapooya, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 639, 1883. + + X Chinooks, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 474, + 1878 (includes Calapooyas and Yamkally). + + > Yamkally, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 630, 1883 (bears a certain + relationship to Calapooya). + + +Under this family name Scouler places two tribes, the Kalapooiah, +inhabiting "the fertile Willamat plains" and the Yamkallie, who live +"more in the interior, towards the sources of the Willamat River." +Scouler adds that the Umpqua "appear to belong to this Family, although +their language is rather more remote from the Kalapooiah than the +Yamkallie is." The Umpqua language is now placed under the Athapascan +family. Scouler also asserts the intimate relationship of the Cathlascon +tribes to the Kalapooiah family. They are now classed as Chinookan. + +The tribes of the Kalapooian family inhabited the valley of Willamette +River, Oregon, above the falls, and extended well up to the headwaters +of that stream. They appear not to have reached the Columbia River, +being cut off by tribes of the Chinookan family, and consequently were +not met by Lewis and Clarke, whose statements of their habitat were +derived solely from natives. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES + + _Ah['a]ntchuyuk_ + (Pudding River Indians). + Atf['a]lati. + Calapooya. + Chelamela. + L['a]kmiut. + Santiam. + Y['a]mil. + + +_Population._--So far as known the surviving Indians of this family are +all at the Grande Ronde Agency, Oregon. + +The following is a census for 1890: + + Atfalati 28 + Calapooya 22 + Lakmiut 29 + Mary's River 28 + Santiam 27 + Yamil 30 + Yonkalla 7 + --- + Total 171 + + + + +KARANKAWAN FAMILY. + + + = Kar['a]nkawa, Gatschet in Globus, XLIX, No. 8, 123, 1886 (vocabulary + of 25 terms; distinguished as a family provisionally). Gatschet in + Science, 414, April 9, 1887. + + +The Karankawa formerly dwelt upon the Texan coast, according to Sibley, +upon an island or peninsula in the Bay of St. Bernard (Matagorda Bay). +In 1804 this author, upon hearsay evidence, stated their number to be +500 men.[56] In several places in the paper cited it is explicitly +stated that the Karankawa spoke the Attakapa language; the Attakapa was +a coast tribe living to the east of them. In 1884 Mr. Gatschet found a +Tonkawe at Fort Griffin, Texas, who claimed to have formerly lived among +the Karankawa. From him a vocabulary of twenty-five terms was obtained, +which was all of the language he remembered. + + [Footnote 56: Am. State Papers, 1832, vol. 4, p. 722.] + +The vocabulary is unsatisfactory, not only because of its meagerness, +but because most of the terms are unimportant for comparison. +Nevertheless, such as it is, it represents all of the language that is +extant. Judged by this vocabulary the language seems to be distinct not +only from the Attakapa but from all others. Unsatisfactory as the +linguistic evidence is, it appears to be safer to class the language +provisionally as a distinct family upon the strength of it than to +accept Sibley's statement of its identity with Attakapa, especially as +we know nothing of the extent of his information or whether indeed his +statement was based upon a personal knowledge of the language. + +A careful search has been made with the hope of finding a few survivors +of this family, but thus far not a single descendant of the tribe has +been discovered and it is probable that not one is now living. + + + + +KERESAN FAMILY. + + + > Keres, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 86-90, 1856 + (includes Kiwomi, Cochitemi, Acoma). + + = Kera, Powell in Rocky Mt. Presbyterian, Nov., 1878 (includes San + Felipe, Santo Domingo, Cochiti, Santa Ana, Cia, Acoma, Laguna, Povate, + Hasatch, Mogino). Gratschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 417, + 1879. Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist. 259, 1883. + + = Keran, Powell in Am. Nat., 604, Aug., 1880 (enumerates pueblos and + gives linguistic literature). + + = Queres, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Ana.), 479, + 1878. + + = Chu-cha-cas, Lane in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 689, 1855 + (includes Laguna, Acoma, Santo Domingo, San Felipe, Santa Ana, + Cochite, Sille). + + = Chu-cha-chas, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 479, + 1878 (misprint; follows Lane). + + = Kes-whaw-hay, Lane in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 689, 1855 (same + as Chu-cha-cas above). Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. + Am.), 479, 1878 (follows Lane). + + +Derivation unknown. The name is pronounced with an explosive initial +sound, and Ad. F. Bandelier spells it Qq'u[^e]res, Qu['e]ra, Qu['e]ris. + +Under this name Turner, as above quoted, includes the vocabularies of +Kiwomi, Cochitemi, and Acoma. + +The full list of pueblos of Keresan stock is given below. They are +situated in New Mexico on the upper Rio Grande, on several of its small +western affluents, and on the Jemez and San Jose, which also are +tributaries of the Rio Grande. + + +VILLAGES. + + Acoma. + Acomita.[57] + Cochit['i]. + Hasatch. + Laguna. + Paguate. + Pueblito.[57] + Punyeestye. + Punyekia. + Pusityitcho. + San Felipe. + Santa Ana. + Santo Domingo. + Seemunah. + Sia. + Wapuchuseamma. + Ziamma. + + [Footnote 57: Summer pueblos only.] + + +_Population._--According to the census of 1890 the total population of +the villages of the family is 3,560, distributed as follows: + + Acoma[58] 566 + Cochit['i] 268 + Laguna[59] 1,143 + Santa Ana 253 + San Felipe 554 + Santo Domingo 670 + Sia 106 + + [Footnote 58: Includes Acomita and Pueblito.] + + [Footnote 59: Includes Hasatch, Paguate, Punyeestye, Punyekia, + Pusityitcho, Seemunah, Wapuchuseamma, and Ziamma.] + + + + +KIOWAN FAMILY. + + + = Kiaways, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (on + upper waters Arkansas). + + = Kioway, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 80, 1856 (based + on the (Caigua) tribe only). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, + 432, 433, 1859. Latham, EL. Comp. Phil., 444, 1862 ("more Paduca than + aught else"). + + = Kayowe, Gatschet in Am. Antiq., 280, Oct., 1882 (gives phonetics + of). + + +Derivation: From the Kiowa word K['o]-i, plural K['o]-igu, meaning +"K['a]yowe man." The Comanche term k['a]yowe means "rat." + +The author who first formally separated this family appears to have been +Turner. Gallatin mentions the tribe and remarks that owing to the loss +of Dr. Say's vocabularies "we only know that both the Kiowas and +Kaskaias languages were harsh, guttural, and extremely difficult."[60] +Turner, upon the strength of a vocabulary furnished by Lieut. Whipple, +dissents from the opinion expressed by Pike and others to the effect +that the language is of the same stock as the Comanche, and, while +admitting that its relationship to Camanche is greater than to any other +family, thinks that the likeness is merely the result of long +intercommunication. His opinion that it is entirely distinct from any +other language has been indorsed by Buschmann and other authorities. The +family is represented by the Kiowa tribe. + + [Footnote 60: Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., 1836, vol. II, + p. 133.] + +So intimately associated with the Comanches have the Kiowa been since +known to history that it is not easy to determine their pristine home. +By the Medicine Creek treaty of October 18, 1867, they and the Comanches +were assigned their present reservation in the Indian Territory, both +resigning all claims to other territory, especially their claims and +rights in and to the country north of the Cimarron River and west of the +eastern boundary of New Mexico. + +The terms of the cession might be taken to indicate a joint ownership of +territory, but it is more likely that the Kiowa territory adjoined the +Comanche on the northwest. In fact Pope[61] definitely locates the Kiowa +in the valley of the Upper Arkansas, and of its tributary, the Purgatory +(Las Animas) River. This is in substantial accord with the statements of +other writers of about the same period. Schermerhorn (1812) places the +Kiowa on the heads of the Arkansas and Platte. Earlier still they appear +upon the headwaters of the Platte, which is the region assigned them +upon the map.[62] This region was occupied later by the Cheyenne and +Arapaho of Algonquian stock. + + [Footnote 61: Pac. R. R. Rep., 1855, vol. 2, pt. 3, p. 16.] + + [Footnote 62: Pike, Exp. to sources of the Mississippi, App., 1810, + pt. 3, p. 9.] + + +_Population._--According to the United States census for 1890 there are +1,140 Kiowa on the Kiowa, Comanche, and Wichita Reservation, Indian +Territory. + + + + +KITUNAHAN FAMILY. + + + = Kitunaha, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 204, 535, 1846 (between the + forks of the Columbia). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, + c, 10, 77, 1848 (Flatbow). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, + 1853. Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 70, 1856. Latham, + Opuscula, 388, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 395, 1862 (between 52 deg. + and 48 deg. N.L., west of main ridge of Rocky Mountains). Gatschet in + Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (on Kootenay River). + + = Coutanies, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 204, 1846 (= Kitunaha). + + = K['u]tanis, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 316, 1850 (Kitunaha). + + = Kituanaha, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 + (Coutaria or Flatbows, north of lat. 49 deg.). + + = Kootanies, Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 661, 1859. + + = Kutani, Latham, El. Comp. Phil, 395, 1862 (or Kitunaha). + + = Cootanie, Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 395, 1862 (synonymous with + Kitunaha). + + = Kootenai, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (defines area + occupied). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 446, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. + Races, III, 565, 1882. + + = Kootenuha, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 79-87, 1884 (vocabulary + of Upper Kootenuha). + + = Flatbow, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 204, 1846 (= Kitunaha). + Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 10, 77, 1848 (after + Hale). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 661, 1859. Latham, El. + Comp. Phil., 395, 1862 (or Kitunaha). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, + 1877. + + = Flachbogen, Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. + + X Shushwaps, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, + 474, 1878 (includes Kootenais (Flatbows or Skalzi)). + + +This family was based upon a tribe variously termed Kitunaha, Kutenay, +Cootenai, or Flatbow, living on the Kootenay River, a branch of the +Columbia in Oregon. + +Mr. Gatschet thinks it is probable that there are two dialects of the +language spoken respectively in the extreme northern and southern +portions of the territory occupied, but the vocabularies at hand are not +sufficient to definitely settle the question. + +The area occupied by the Kitunahan tribes is inclosed between the +northern fork of the Columbia River, extending on the south along the +Cootenay River. By far the greater part of the territory occupied by +these tribes is in British Columbia. + + +TRIBES. + +The principal divisions or tribes are Cootenai, or Upper Cootenai; +Akoklako, or Lower Cootenai; Klanoh-Klatklam, or Flathead Cootenai; +Yaketahnoklatakmakanay, or Tobacco Plains Cootenai. + + +_Population._--There are about 425 Cootenai at Flathead Agency, Montana, +and 539 at Kootenay Agency, British Columbia; total, 964. + + + + +KOLUSCHAN FAMILY. + + + = Koluschen, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 14, + 1836 (islands and adjacent coast from 60 deg. to 55 deg. N.L.). + + = Koulischen, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 306, + 1836. Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848, + (Koulischen and Sitka languages). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. + Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Sitka, bet. 52 deg. and 59 deg. lat.). + + < Kolooch, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, 1846 + (tends to merge Kolooch into Esquimaux). Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. + Lond., 1, 163, 1848 (compared with Eskimo language.). Latham, + Opuscula, 259, 276, 1860. + + = Koluschians, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 433, 1847 (follows + Gallatin). Scouler (1846) in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 231, 1848. + + < Kol['u]ch, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 294, 1850 (more likely forms a + subdivision of Eskimo than a separate class; includes Kenay of Cook's + Inlet, Atna of Copper River, Koltshani, Ugalents, Sitkans, Tungaas, + Inkhuluklait, Magimut, Inkalit; Digothi and Nehanni are classed as + "doubtful Kol['u]ches"). + + = Koloschen, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., + 1852. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 680, 1859. Berghaus, + Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. + + = Kolush, Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 401, 1862 (mere mention of family + with short vocabulary). + + = Kaloshians, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 375, 1885 (gives tribes and + population). + + X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 218, 1841 + (includes Koloshes and Tun Ghasse). + + X Haidah, Scouler, ibid, 219, 1841 (same as his Northern). + + = Klen-ee-kate, Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 489, 1855. + + = Klen-e-kate, Kane, Wanderings of an Artist, app., 1859 (a census of + N.W. coast tribes classified by language). + + = Thlinkithen, Holmberg in Finland Soc., 284, 1856 (fide Buschmann, + 676, 1859). + + = Thl'nkets, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 268, 269, 1869 (divided into + Sitka-kwan, Stahkin-kwan, "Yakutats"). + + = T'linkets, Dall in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 36, 1877 (divided into + Y[va]k['][-u]t[va]ts [*Yakutats], Chilk[-a]ht'-kwan, Sitka-kwan, + St[-a]khin[']-kw[-a]n, Kyg[-a]h[']ni). + + = Thlinkeet, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, + 462, 1878 (from Mount St. Elias to Nass River; includes Ugalenzes, + Yakutats, Chilkats, Hoodnids, Hoodsinoos, Takoos, Auks, Kakas, + Stikines, Eelikn[^u]s, Tungass, Sitkas). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, + 562, 579, 1882. + + = Thlinkit, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 14, 1884 (vocab. of + Skutkwan Sept; also map showing distribution of family). Berghaus, + Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. + + = Tlinkit, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass., 375, 1885 (enumerates tribes and + gives population). + + +Derivation: From the Aleut word kolosh, or more properly, kaluga, +meaning "dish," the allusion being to the dish-shaped lip ornaments. + +This family was based by Gallatin upon the Koluschen tribe (the +Tshinkitani of Marchand), "who inhabit the islands and the adjacent +coast from the sixtieth to the fifty-fifth degree of north latitude." + +In the Koluschan family, Gallatin observes that the remote analogies to +the Mexican tongue to be found in several of the northern tribes, as the +Kinai, are more marked than in any other. + +The boundaries of this family as given by Gallatin are substantially in +accordance with our present knowledge of the subject. The southern +boundary is somewhat indeterminate owing to the fact, ascertained by the +census agents in 1880, that the Haida tribes extend somewhat farther +north than was formerly supposed and occupy the southeast half of Prince +of Wales Island. About latitude 56 deg., or the mouth of Portland Canal, +indicates the southern limit of the family, and 60 deg., or near the +mouth of Atna River, the northern limit. Until recently they have been +supposed to be exclusively an insular and coast people, but Mr. Dawson +has made the interesting discovery[63] that the Tagish, a tribe living +inland on the headwaters of the Lewis River, who have hitherto been +supposed to be of Athapascan extraction, belong to the Koluschan family. +This tribe, therefore, has crossed the coast range of mountains, which +for the most part limits the extension of this people inland and +confines them to a narrow coast strip, and have gained a permanent +foothold in the interior, where they share the habits of the neighboring +Athapascan tribes. + + [Footnote 63: Annual Report of the Geological Survey of Canada, + 1887.] + + +TRIBES. + + Auk. + Chilcat. + Hanega. + Hoodsunu. + Hunah. + Kek. + Sitka. + Stahkin. + Tagish. + Taku. + Tongas. + Yakutat. + + +_Population._--The following figures are from the census of 1880.[64] +The total population of the tribes of this family, exclusive of the +Tagish, is 6,437, distributed as follows: + + Auk 640 + Chilcat 988 + Hanega (including Kouyon + and Klanak) 587 + Hoodsunu 666 + Hunah 908 + Kek 568 + Sitka 721 + Stahkin 317 + Taku 269 + Tongas 273 + Yakutat 500 + + [Footnote 64: Petroff, Report on the Population, Industries, and + Resources of Alaska, 1884, p. 33.] + + + + +KULANAPAN FAMILY. + + + X Kula-napo, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 431, 1853 (the + name of one of the Clear Lake bands). + + > Mendocino (?), Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 77, 1856 (name + suggested for Choweshak, Batemdaikai, Kulanapo, Yukai, Khwaklamayu + languages). Latham, Opuscula, 343, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 410, + 1863 (as above). + + > Pomo, Powers in Overland Monthly, IX, 498, Dec., 1873 (general + description of habitat and of family). Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, + 146, 1877. Powell, ibid., 491 (vocabularies of Gal-li-no-m['e]-ro, + Yo-kai[']-a, Ba-tem-da-kaii, Chau-i-shek, Yu-kai, Ku-la-na-po, H'hana, + Venaambakaiia, Ka[']-bi-na-pek, Chwachamaju). Gatschet in Mag. Am. + Hist., 16, 1877 (gives habitat and enumerates tribes of family). + Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 436, 1877. Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. + (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, 1878 (includes Castel Pomos, Ki, Cahto, + Choam, Chadela, Matomey Ki, Usal or Calamet, Shebalne Pomos, + Gallinomeros, Sanels, Socoas, Lamas, Comachos). + + < Pomo, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 566, 1882 (includes Ukiah, + Gallinomero, Masallamagoon, Gualala, Matole, Kulanapo, San['e]l, + Yonios, Choweshak, Batemdakaie, Chocuyem, Olamentke, Kainamare, + Chwachamaju. Of these, Chocuyem and Olamentke are Moquelumnan). + + +The name applied to this family was first employed by Gibbs in 1853, as +above cited. He states that it is the "name of one of the Clear Lake +bands," adding that "the language is spoken by all the tribes occupying +the large valley." The distinctness of the language is now generally +admitted. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The main territory of the Kulanapan family is bounded on the west by the +Pacific Ocean, on the east by the Yukian and Copehan territories, on the +north by the watershed of the Russian River, and on the south by a line +drawn from Bodega Head to the southwest corner of the Yukian territory, +near Santa Rosa, Sonoma County, California. Several tribes of this +family, viz, the Kastel Pomo, Kai Pomo, and Kato Pomo, are located in +the valley between the South Fork of Eel River and the main river, and +on the headwaters of the South Fork, extending thence in a narrow strip +to the ocean. In this situation they were entirely cut off from the main +body by the intrusive Yuki tribes, and pressed upon from the north by +the warlike Wailakki, who are said to have imposed their language and +many of their customs upon them and as well doubtless to have +extensively intermarried with them. + + +TRIBES. + + Ball['o] Ka[`i] Pomo, "Oat Valley People." + Batemdik['a]yi. + B['u]ldam Pomo (Rio Grande or Big River). + Chawishek. + Choam Chadila Pomo (Capello). + Chwachamaj[`u]. + D['a]pishul Pomo (Redwood Canon). + Eastern People (Clear Lake about Lakeport). + Er['i]o (mouth of Russian River). + Er['u]ssi (Fort Ross). + Gallinom['e]ro (Russian River Valley below Cloverdale + and in Dry Creek Valley). + Grual['a]la (northwest corner of Sonoma County). + Kabinapek (western part of Clear Lake basin). + Kaim['e] (above Healdsburgh). + Kai Pomo (between Eel River and South Fork). + Kastel Pomo (between Eel River and South Fork). + Kato Pomo, "Lake People." + Kom['a]cho (Anderson and Rancheria Valleys). + Kul['a] Kai Pomo (Sherwood Valley). + Kulanapo. + L['a]ma (Russian River Valley). + Mis['a]lamag[-u]n or Musakak[-u]n (above Healdsburgh). + Mito['a]m Kai Pomo, "Wooded Valley People" (Little Lake). + Poam Pomo. + Senel (Russian River Valley). + Sh['o]do Ka['i] Pomo (Coyote Valley). + S['i]ako (Russian River Valley). + Sok['o]a (Russian River Valley). + Yok['a]ya Pomo, "Lower Valley People" (Ukiah City). + Yus[^a]l (or K['a]malel) Pomo, "Ocean People" + (on coast and along Yusal Creek). + + + + +KUSAN FAMILY. + + + = K['u]sa, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 257, 1883. + + +Derivation: Milhau, in a manuscript letter to Gibbs (Bureau of +Ethnology), states that "Coos in the Rogue River dialect is said to mean +lake, lagoon or inland bay." + +The "Kaus or Kwokwoos" tribe is merely mentioned by Hale as living on a +river of the same name between the Umqua and the Clamet.[65] Lewis and +Clarke[66] also mention them in the same location as the Cookkoo-oose. +The tribe was referred to also under the name Kaus by Latham,[67] who +did not attempt its classification, having in fact no material for the +purpose. + + [Footnote 65: U.S. Expl. Exp., 1846, vol. 6, p, 221.] + + [Footnote 66: Allen Ed., 1814, vol. 2, p. 118.] + + [Footnote 67: Nat. Hist. Man, 1850, p. 325.] + +Mr. Gatschet, as above, distinguishes the language as forming a distinct +stock. It is spoken on the coast of middle Oregon, on Coos River and +Bay, and at the mouth of Coquille River, Oregon. + + +TRIBES. + + Anasitch. + Melukitz. + Mulluk or Lower Coquille. + Nacu?. + + +_Population._--Most of the survivors of this family are gathered upon +the Siletz Reservation, Oregon, but their number can not be stated as +the agency returns are not given by tribes. + + + + +LUTUAMIAN FAMILY. + + + = Lutuami, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 569, 1846 (headwaters + Klamath River and lake). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, + c, 17, 77, 1848 (follows Hale). Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 + (headwaters Clamet River). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, + 1852. Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 82, 1854. Latham in + Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 74, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 300, 310, + 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 407, 1862. + + = Luturim, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 + (misprint for Lutuami; based on Clamets language). + + = Lutumani, Latham, Opuscula, 341, 1860 (misprint for Lutuami). + + = Tlamatl, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (alternative of + Lutuami). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. + + = Clamets, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (alternative of + Lutuami). + + = Klamath, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 164, 1877. Gatschet in Beach. + Ind. Misc., 439, 1877. Gatschet in Am. Antiq., 81-84, 1878 (general + remarks upon family). + + < Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 475, + 1878 (a geographic group rather than a linguistic family; includes, in + addition to the Klamath proper or Lutuami, the Yacons, Modocs, Copahs, + Shastas, Palaiks, Wintoons, Eurocs, Cahrocs, Lototens, Weeyots, + Wishosks, Wallies, Tolewahs, Patawats, Yukas, "and others between Eel + River and Humboldt Bay." The list thus includes several distinct + families). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 640, 1882 (includes Lutuami + or Klamath, Modoc and Copah, the latter belonging to the Copehan + family). + + = Klamath Indians of Southwestern Oregon, Gatschet in Cont, N.A. Eth., + II, pt. 1, XXXIII, 1890. + + +Derivation: From a Pit River word meaning "lake." + +The tribes of this family appear from time immemorial to have occupied +Little and Upper Klamath Lakes, Klamath Marsh, and Sprague River, +Oregon. Some of the Modoc have been removed to the Indian Territory, +where 84 now reside; others are in Sprague River Valley. + +The language is a homogeneous one and, according to Mr. Gatschet who has +made a special study of it, has no real dialects, the two divisions of +the family, Klamath and Modoc, speaking an almost identical language. + +The Klamaths' own name is ['E]-ukshikni, "Klamath Lake people." The Modoc +are termed by the Klamath Mod['o]kni, "Southern people." + + +TRIBES. + + Klamath. + Modoc. + + +_Population._--There were 769 Klamath and Modoc on the Klamath +Reservation in 1889. Since then they have slightly decreased. + + + + +MARIPOSAN FAMILY. + + + > Mariposa, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 84, 1856 (Coconoons + language, Mariposa County). Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860. Latham, El. + Comp. Philology, 416, 1862 (Coconoons of Mercede River). + + = Yo[']-kuts, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 369, 1877. Powell, ibid., + 570 (vocabularies of Yo[']-kuts, Wi[']-chi-kik, Tin[']-lin-neh, King's + River, Coconoons, Calaveras County). + + = Yocut, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 158, 1877 (mentions Taches, + Chewenee, Watooga, Chookchancies, Coconoons and others). Gatschet in + Beach, Ind. Misc., 432, 1877. + + +Derivation: A Spanish word meaning "butterfly," applied to a county in +California and subsequently taken for the family name. + +Latham mentions the remnants of three distinct bands of the Coconoon, +each with its own language, in the north of Mariposa County. These are +classed together under the above name. More recently the tribes speaking +languages allied to the Cocon[-u]n have been treated of under the family +name Yokut. As, however, the stock was established by Latham on a sound +basis, his name is here restored. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The territory of the Mariposan family is quite irregular in outline. On +the north it is bounded by the Fresno River up to the point of its +junction with the San Joaquin; thence by a line running to the northeast +corner of the Salinan territory in San Benito County, California; on the +west by a line running from San Benito to Mount Pinos. From the middle +of the western shore of Tulare Lake to the ridge at Mount Pinos on the +south, the Mariposan area is merely a narrow strip in and along the +foothills. Occupying one-half of the western and all the southern shore +of Tulare Lake, and bounded on the north by a line running from the +southeast corner of Tulare Lake due east to the first great spur of the +Sierra Nevada range is the territory of the intrusive Shoshoni. On the +east the secondary range of the Sierra Nevada forms the Mariposan +boundary. + +In addition to the above a small strip of territory on the eastern +bank of the San Joaquin is occupied by the Cholovone division of the +Mariposan family, between the Tuolumne and the point where the San +Joaquin turns to the west before entering Suisun Bay. + + +TRIBES. + + Ayapa[`i] (Tule River). + Chain['i]maini (lower King's River). + Chuka['i]mina (Squaw Valley). + Ch[-u]k'chansi (San Joaquin River above Millerton). + ['C]hunut (Kaweah River at the lake). + Cocon[-u]n['] (Merced River). + Ititcha (King's River). + Kassovo (Day Creek). + Kau-['i]-a (Kaweah River; foothills). + Kiaw['e]tni (Tule River at Porterville). + May['a]yu (Tule River, south fork). + Noto['a]naiti (on the lake). + Och['i]ngita (Tule River). + Pitkach[`i] (extinct; San Joaquin River below Millerton). + Poh['a]llin Tinleh (near Kern lake). + Saw['a]khtu (Tule River, south fork). + T['a]chi (Kingston). + T['e]lumni (Kaweah River below Visalia). + T['i]nlinneh (Fort Tejon). + Tis[`e]chu (upper King's River). + W['i]chikik (King's River). + Wikch['u]mni (Kaweah River; foothills). + W['i]ksachi (upper Kaweah Valley). + Y['u]kol (Kaweah River plains). + + +_Population._--There are 145 of the Indians of this family now attached +to the Mission Agency, California. + + + + +MOQUELUMNAN FAMILY. + + + > Tcho-ko-yem, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 421, 1853 + (mentioned as a band and dialect). + + > Moquelumne, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 81, 1856 + (includes Hale's Talatui, Tuolumne from Schoolcraft, Mumaltachi, + Mullateco, Apangasi, Lapappu, Siyante or Typoxi, Hawhaw's band of + Aplaches, San Rafael vocabulary, Tshokoyem vocabulary, Cocouyem and + Yonkiousme Paternosters, Olamentke of Kostromitonov, Paternosters + for Mission de Santa Clara and the Vallee de los Tulares of Mofras, + Paternoster of the Langue Guiloco de la Mission de San Francisco). + Latham, Opuscula, 347, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 414, 1862 (same + as above). + + = Meewoc, Powers in Overland Monthly, 322, April, 1873 (general + account of family with allusions to language). Gatschet in Mag. Am. + Hist., 159, 1877 (gives habitat and bands of family). Gatschet in + Beach, Ind. Misc., 433, 1877. + + = M['i]-wok, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 346, 1877 (nearly as + above). + + < Mutsun, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 535, 1877 (vocabs. of + Mi[']-wok, Tuolumne, Costano, Tcho-ko-yem, M[-u]ts[-u]n, Santa Clara, + Santa Cruz, Chum-te[']-ya, Kaw['e]ya, San Raphael Mission, Talatui, + Olamentke). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157, 1877 (gives habitat + and members of family). Gatschet, in Beach, Ind. Misc., 430, 1877. + + X Runsiens, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, + 1878 (includes Olhones, Eslenes, Santa Cruz, San Miguel, + Lopillamillos, Mipacmacs, Kulanapos, Yolos, Suisunes, Talluches, + Chowclas, Waches, Talches, Poowells). + + +Derivation: From the river and hill of same name in Calaveras County, +California; according to Powers the Meewoc name for the river is +Wakalumitoh. + +The Talatui mentioned by Hale[68] as on the Kassima (Cosumnes) River +belong to the above family. Though this author clearly distinguished the +language from any others with which he was acquainted, he nowhere +expressed the opinion that it is entitled to family rank or gave it a +family name. Talatui is mentioned as a tribe from which he obtained an +incomplete vocabulary. + + [Footnote 68: U.S. Expl. Exp., 1846, vol. 6, pp. 630, 633.] + +It was not until 1856 that the distinctness of the linguistic family was +fully set forth by Latham. Under the head of Moquelumne, this author +gathers several vocabularies representing different languages and +dialects of the same stock. These are the Talatui of Hale, the Tuolumne +from Schoolcraft, the Sonoma dialects as represented by the Tshokoyem +vocabulary, the Chocuyem and Youkiousme paternosters, and the Olamentke +of Kostromitonov in Baeer's Beitraege. He also places here provisionally +the paternosters from the Mission de Santa Clara and the Vallee de los +Tulares of Mofras; also the language Guiloco de la Mission de San +Francisco. The Costano containing the five tribes of the Mission of +Dolores, viz., the Ahwastes, Olhones or Costanos of the coast, Romonans, +Tulomos and the Altahmos seemed to Latham to differ from the Moquelumnan +language. Concerning them he states "upon the whole, however, the +affinities seem to run in the direction of the languages of the next +group, especially in that of the Ruslen." He adds: "Nevertheless, for +the present I place the Costano by itself, as a transitional form of +speech to the languages spoken north, east, and south of the Bay of San +Francisco." Recent investigation by Messrs. Curtin and Henshaw have +confirmed the soundness of Latham's views and, as stated under head of +the Costanoan family, the two groups of languages are considered to be +distinct. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The Moquelumnan family occupies the territory bounded on the north by +the Cosumne River, on the south by the Fresno River, on the east by the +Sierra Nevada, and on the west by the San Joaquin River, with the +exception of a strip on the east bank occupied by the Cholovone. A part +of this family occupies also a territory bounded on the south by San +Francisco Bay and the western half of San Pablo Bay; on the west by the +Pacific Ocean from the Golden Gate to Bodega Head; on the north by a +line running from Bodega Head to the Yukian territory northeast of Santa +Rosa, and on the east by a line running from the Yukian territory to the +northernmost point of San Pablo Bay. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Miwok division: Olamentke division: + Awani. Olowidok. Bollanos. + Chauchila. Olowit. Chokuyem. + Chumidok. Olowiya. Guimen. + Chumtiwa. Sakaiakumni. Likatuit. + Chumuch. Seroushamne. Nicassias. + Chumwit. Talatui. Numpali. + Hettitoya. Tamoleka. Olamentke. + Kani. Tumidok. Olumpali. + Lopolatimne. Tumun. Sonomi. + Machemni. Walakumni. Tamal. + Mokelumni. Yuloni. Tulare. + Newichumni. Utchium. + +_Population._--Comparatively few of the Indians of this family survive, +and these are mostly scattered in the mountains and away from the routes +of travel. As they were never gathered on reservations, an accurate +census has not been taken. + +In the detached area north of San Francisco Bay, chiefly in Marin +County, formerly inhabited by the Indians of this family, almost none +remain. There are said to be none living about the mission of San +Rafael, and Mr. Henshaw, in 1888, succeeded in locating only six at +Tomales Bay, where, however, he obtained a very good vocabulary from a +woman. + + + + +MUSKHOGEAN FAMILY. + + + > Muskhogee, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 94, + 306, 1836 (based upon Muskhogees, Hitchittees, Seminoles). Prichard, + Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 402, 1847 (includes Muskhogees, Seminoles, + Hitchittees). + + > Muskhogies, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., + 1852. + + > Muscogee, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, + 471, 1878 (includes Muscogees proper, Seminoles, Choctaws, Chickasaws, + Hitchittees, Coosadas or Coosas, Alibamons, Apalaches). + + = Maskoki, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 50, 1884 (general account + of family; four branches, Maskoki, Apalachian, Alibamu, Chahta). + Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. + + > Choctaw Muskhogee, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, + 119, 1836. + + > Chocta-Muskhog, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, + 77, 1848. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. + + = Chata-Muskoki, Hale in Am. Antiq., 108, April, 1883 (considered with + reference to migration). + + > Chahtas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 100, 306, + 1836 (or Choctaws). + + > Chahtahs, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 403, 1847 (or Choktahs + or Flatheads). + + > Tschahtas, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., + 1852. + + > Choctah, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 337, 1850 (includes Choctahs, + Muscogulges, Muskohges). Latham in Trans. Phil. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856. + Latham, Opuscula, 366, 1860. + + > Mobilian, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., 349, 1840. + + > Flat-heads, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 403, 1847 (Chahtahs or + Choktahs). + + > Coshattas, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (not classified). + + > Humas, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 341, 1850 (east of Mississippi above + New Orleans). + + +Derivation: From the name of the principal tribe of the Creek +Confederacy. + +In the Muskhogee family Gallatin includes the Muskhogees proper, who +lived on the Coosa and Tallapoosa Rivers; the Hitchittees, living on the +Chattahoochee and Flint Rivers; and the Seminoles of the peninsula of +Florida. It was his opinion, formed by a comparison of vocabularies, +that the Choctaws and Chickasaws should also be classed under this +family. In fact, he called[69] the family Choctaw Muskhogee. In +deference, however, to established usage, the two tribes were kept +separate in his table and upon the colored map. In 1848 he appears to be +fully convinced of the soundness of the view doubtfully expressed in +1836, and calls the family the Chocta-Muskhog. + + [Footnote 69: On p. 119, Archaeologia Americana.] + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The area occupied by this family was very extensive. It may be described +in a general way as extending from the Savannah River and the Atlantic +west to the Mississippi, and from the Gulf of Mexico north to the +Tennessee River. All of this territory was held by Muskhogean tribes +except the small areas occupied by the Yuchi, N['a]'htchi, and some small +settlements of Shawni. + +Upon the northeast Muskhogean limits are indeterminate. The Creek +claimed only to the Savannah River; but upon its lower course the Yamasi +are believed to have extended east of that river in the sixteenth to the +eighteenth century.[70] The territorial line between the Muskhogean +family and the Catawba tribe in South Carolina can only be conjectured. + + [Footnote 70: Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, 1884, vol. 1, p. 62.] + +It seems probable that the whole peninsula of Florida was at one time +held by tribes of Timuquanan connection; but from 1702 to 1708, when the +Apalachi were driven out, the tribes of northern Florida also were +forced away by the English. After that time the Seminole and the Yamasi +were the only Indians that held possession of the Floridian peninsula. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Alibamu. + Apalachi. + Chicasa. + Choctaw. + Creek or Maskoki proper. + Koas['a]ti. + Seminole. + Yamacraw. + Yamasi. + + +_Population._--There is an Alibamu town on Deep Creek, Indian Territory, +an affluent of the Canadian, Indian Territory. Most of the inhabitants +are of this tribe. There are Alibamu about 20 miles south of Alexandria, +Louisiana, and over one hundred in Polk County, Texas. + +So far as known only three women of the Apalachi survived in 1886, and +they lived at the Alibamu town above referred to. The United States +Census bulletin for 1890 gives the total number of pureblood Choctaw at +9,996, these being principally at Union Agency, Indian Territory. Of the +Chicasa there are 3,464 at the same agency; Creek 9,291; Seminole 2,539; +of the latter there are still about 200 left in southern Florida. + +There are four families of Koas['a]ti, about twenty-five individuals, +near the town of Shepherd, San Jacinto County, Texas. Of the Yamasi none +are known to survive. + + + + +NATCHESAN FAMILY. + + + > Natches, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 95, 806, + 1836 (Natches only). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 402, 403, 1847. + + > Natsches, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. + + > Natchez, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., 248, 1840. Gallatin in Trans. Am. + Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848 (Natchez only). Latham, Nat. + Hist. Man, 340, 1850 (tends to include Taensas, Pascagoulas, + Colapissas, Biluxi in same family). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. + Tribes, III, 401, 1853 (Natchez only). Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. + (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 473, 1878 (suggests that it may include the + Utchees). + + > Naktche, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 34, 1884. Gatschet in + Science, 414, April 29, 1887. + + > Taensa, Gatschet in The Nation, 383, May 4, 1882. Gatschet in Am. + Antiq., IV, 238, 1882. Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 33, 1884. + Gatschet in Science, 414, April 29, 1887 (Taensas only). + + +The Na'htchi, according to Gallatin, a residue of the well-known nation +of that name, came from the banks of the Mississippi, and joined the +Creek less than one hundred years ago.[71] The seashore from Mobile to +the Mississippi was then inhabited by several small tribes, of which the +Na'htchi was the principal. + + [Footnote 71: Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., 1836, vol. 2, p. 95.] + +Before 1730 the tribe lived in the vicinity of Natchez, Miss., along St. +Catherine Creek. After their dispersion by the French in 1730 most of +the remainder joined the Chicasa and afterwards the Upper Creek. They +are now in Creek and Cherokee Nations, Indian Territory. + +The linguistic relations of the language spoken by the Taensa tribe have +long been in doubt, and it is probable that they will ever remain so. As +no vocabulary or text of this language was known to be in existence, the +"Grammaire et vocabulaire de la langue Taensa, avec textes traduits et +commentes par J.-D. Haumonte, Parisot, L. Adam," published in Paris in +1882, was received by American linguistic students with peculiar +interest. Upon the strength of the linguistic material embodied in the +above Mr. Gatschet (loc. cit.) was led to affirm the complete linguistic +isolation of the language. + +Grave doubts of the authenticity of the grammar and vocabulary have, +however, more recently been brought forward.[72] The text contains +internal evidences of the fraudulent character, if not of the whole, at +least of a large part of the material. So palpable and gross are these +that until the character of the whole can better be understood by the +inspection of the original manuscript, alleged to be in Spanish, by a +competent expert it will be far safer to reject both the vocabulary and +grammar. By so doing we are left without any linguistic evidence +whatever of the relations of the Taensa language. + + [Footnote 72: D. G. Brinton in Am. Antiquarian, March, 1885, pp. + 109-114.] + +D'Iberville, it is true, supplies us with the names of seven Taensa +towns which were given by a Taensa Indian who accompanied him; but most +of these, according to Mr. Gatschet, were given, in the Chicasa trade +jargon or, as termed by the French, the "Mobilian trade jargon," which +is at least a very natural supposition. Under these circumstances we +can, perhaps, do no better than rely upon the statements of several of +the old writers who appear to be unanimous in regarding the language of +the Taensa as of Na'htchi connection. Du Pratz's statement to that +effect is weakened from the fact that the statement also includes the +Shetimasha, the language of which is known from a vocabulary to be +totally distinct not only from the Na'htchi but from any other. To +supplement Du Pratz's testimony, such as it is, we have the statements +of M. de Montigny, the missionary who affirmed the affinity of the +Taensa language to that of the Na'htchi, before he had visited the +latter in 1699, and of Father Gravier, who also visited them. For the +present, therefore, the Taensa language is considered to be a branch of +the Na'htchi. + +The Taensa formerly dwelt upon the Mississippi, above and close to the +Na'htchi. Early in the history of the French settlements a portion of +the Taensa, pressed upon by the Chicasa, fled and were settled by the +French upon Mobile Bay. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Na'htchi. + Taensa. + + +_Population._--There still are four Na'htchi among the Creek in Indian +Territory and a number in the Cheroki Hills near the Missouri border. + + + + +PALAIHNIHAN FAMILY. + + + = Palaihnih, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (used in + family sense). + + = Palaik, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 199, 218, 569, 1846 (southeast + of Lutuami in Oregon), Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, + 18, 77, 1848. Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 325, 1850 (southeast of + Lutuami). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Latham in + Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 82, 1854 (cites Hale's vocab). Latham + in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 74, 1856 (has Shoshoni affinities). + Latham, Opuscula, 310, 341, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 407, 1862. + + = Palainih, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 1848. + (after Hale). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. + + = Pulairih, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 + (obvious typographical error; quotes Hale's Palaiks). + + = Pit River, Powers in Overland Monthly, 412, May, 1874 (three + principal tribes: Achom['a]wes, Hamefcuttelies, Astakaywas or + Astakywich). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 164, 1877 (gives habitat; + quotes Hale for tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 439, 1877. + + = A-cho-m[^a][']-wi, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 601, 1877 + (vocabs. of A-cho-m[^a][']-wi and Lutuami). Powers in ibid., 267 + (general account of tribes; A-cho-m[^a][']-wi, Hu-m[^a][']-whi, + Es-ta-ke[']-wach, Han-te[']-wa, Chu-m[^a][']-wa, A-tu-a[']-mih, + Il-m[^a][']-wi). + + < Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 475, + 1878 (includes Palaiks). + + < Shasta, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882 (contains Palaik of + present family). + + +Derivation: From the Klamath word _p'laikni_, signifying "mountaineers" +or "uplanders" (Gatschet). + +In two places[73] Hale uses the terms Palaihnih and Palaiks +interchangeably, but inasmuch as on page 569, in his formal table of +linguistic families and languages, he calls the family Palaihnih, this +is given preference over the shorter form of the name. + + [Footnote 73: U.S. Expl. Expd., 1846, vol. 6, pp. 199, 218.] + +Though here classed as a distinct family, the status of the Pit River +dialects can not be considered to be finally settled. Powers speaks of +the language as "hopelessly consonantal, harsh, and sesquipedalian," +* * * "utterly unlike the sweet and simple languages of the Sacramento." +He adds that the personal pronouns show it to be a true Digger Indian +tongue. Recent investigations by Mr. Gatschet lead him, however, to +believe that ultimately it will be found to be linguistically related +to the Sastean languages. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The family was located by Hale to the southeast of the Lutuami +(Klamath). They chiefly occupied the area drained by the Pit River in +extreme northeastern California. Some of the tribe were removed to Round +Valley Reservation, California. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + +Powers, who has made a special study of the tribe, recognizes the +following principal tribal divisions:[74] + + Achom[^a][']wi. + Atua[']mih. + Chum[^a][']wa. + Estake[']wach. + Hante[']wa. + Hum[^a][']whi. + Ilm[^a][']wi. + Pakamalli? + + [Footnote 74: Cont. N.A. Eth. vol. 3, p. 267.] + + + + +PIMAN FAMILY. + + + = Pima, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 898, 1850 (cites three languages from + the Mithridates, viz, Pima proper, Opata, Eudeve). Turner in Pac. R. + R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 1856 (Pima proper). Latham in Trans. + Philolog. Soc. Lond., 92, 1856 (contains Pima proper, Opata, Eudeve, + Papagos). Latham, Opuscula, 356, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 427, + 1862 (includes Pima proper, Opata, Eudeve, Papago, Ibequi, Hiaqui, + Tubar, Tarahumara, Cora). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 156, 1877 + (includes Pima, N['e]vome, P['a]pago). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., + 429, 1877 (defines area and gives habitat). + + +Latham used the term Pima in 1850, citing under it three dialects or +languages. Subsequently, in 1856, he used the same term for one of the +five divisions into which he separates the languages of Sonora and +Sinaloa. + +The same year Turner gave a brief account of Pima as a distinct +language, his remarks applying mainly to Pima proper of the Gila River, +Arizona. This tribe had been visited by Emory and Johnston and also +described by Bartlett. Turner refers to a short vocabulary in the +Mithridates, another of Dr. Coulter's in Royal Geological Society +Journal, vol. XI, 1841, and a third by Parry in Schoolcraft, Indian +Tribes, vol. III, 1853. The short vocabulary he himself published was +collected by Lieut. Whipple. + +Only a small portion of the territory occupied by this family is +included within the United States, the greater portion being in Mexico +where it extends to the Gulf of California. The family is represented in +the United States by three tribes, Pima alta, Sobaipuri, and Papago. The +former have lived for at least two centuries with the Maricopa on the +Gila River about 160 miles from the mouth. The Sobaipuri occupied the +Santa Cruz and San Pedro Rivers, tributaries of the Gila, but are no +longer known. The Papago territory is much more extensive and extends to +the south across the border. In recent times the two tribes have been +separated, but the Pima territory as shown upon the map was formerly +continuous to the Gila River. + +According to Buschmann, Gatschet, Brinton, and others the Pima language +is a northern branch of the Nahuatl, but this relationship has yet to be +demonstrated.[75] + + [Footnote 75: Buschmann, Die Pima-Sprache und die Sprache der + Koloschen, pp. 321-432.] + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Northern group: + Opata. + Papago. + Pima. + + Southern group: + Cahita. + Cora. + Tarahumara. + Tepeguana. + + +_Population._--Of the above tribes the Pima and Papago only are within +our boundaries. Their numbers under the Pima Agency, Arizona,[76] are +Pima, 4,464; Papago, 5,163. + + [Footnote 76: According to the U.S. Census Bulletin for 1890.] + + + + +PUJUNAN FAMILY. + + + > Pujuni, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 80, 1856 (contains + Pujuni, Secumne, Tsamak of Hale, Cushna of Schoolcraft). Latham, + Opuscula, 346, 1860. + + > Meidoos, Powers in Overland Monthly, 420, May, 1874. + + = Meidoo, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 159, 1877 (gives habitat and + tribes). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 433, 1877. + + > Mai[']-du, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 282, 1877 (same as + Mai[']-deh; general account of; names the tribes). Powell, ibid., 586 + (vocabs. of Kon[']-kau, Hol-o[']-lu-pai, Na[']-kum, Ni[']-shi-nam, + "Digger," Cushna, Nishinam, Yuba or Nevada, Punjuni, Sekumne, Tsamak). + + > Neeshenams, Powers in Overland Monthly, 21, Jan., 1874 (considers + this tribe doubtfully distinct from Meidoo family). + + > Ni-shi-nam, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 313, 1877 + (distinguishes them from Maidu family). + + X Sacramento Valley, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), + 476, 1878 (Ochecumne, Chupumne, Secumne, Cosumne, Sololumne, Puzlumne, + Yasumne, etc.; "altogether about 26 tribes"). + + +The following tribes were placed in this group by Latham: Pujuni, +Secumne, Tsamak of Hale, and the Cushna of Schoolcraft. The name adopted +for the family is the name of a tribe given by Hale.[77] This was one of +the two races into which, upon the information of Captain Sutter as +derived by Mr. Dana, all the Sacramento tribes were believed to be +divided. "These races resembled one another in every respect but +language." + + [Footnote 77: U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, p. 631.] + +Hale gives short vocabularies of the Pujuni, Sekumne, and Tsamak. Hale +did not apparently consider the evidence as a sufficient basis for a +family, but apparently preferred to leave its status to be settled +later. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The tribes of this family have been carefully studied by Powers, to whom +we are indebted for most all we know of their distribution. They +occupied the eastern bank of the Sacramento in California, beginning +some 80 or 100 miles from its mouth, and extended northward to within a +short distance of Pit River, where they met the tribes of the +Palaihnihan family. Upon the east they reached nearly to the border of +the State, the Palaihnihan, Shoshonean, and Washoan families hemming +them in in this direction. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Bayu. Olla. + Boka. Otaki. + Eskin. Paup['a]kan. + H['e]lto. Pus['u]na. + Hoak. Taitchida. + Hoankut. T['i]shum. + Holol['u]pai. To['a]mtcha. + Koloma. Tosikoyo. + Konkau. Toto. + K[-u][']lmeh. Ust['o]ma. + Kulomum. Wap['u]mni. + Kwat['o]a. Wima. + Nakum. Yuba. + + + + +QUORATEAN FAMILY. + + + > Quoratem, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 + (proposed as a proper name of family "should it be held one"). + + > Eh-nek, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 423, 1853 (given as + name of a band only; but suggests Quoratem as a proper family name). + + > Ehnik, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 76, 1856 (south of + Shasti and Lutuami areas). Latham, Opuscula, 342, 1860. + + = Cahrocs, Powers in Overland Monthly, 328, April, 1872 (on Klamath + and Salmon Rivers). + + = Cahrok, Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 438, 1877. + + = Ka[']-rok, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 19, 1877. Powell in ibid., + 447, 1877 (vocabularies of Ka[']-rok, Arra-Arra, Peh[']-tsik, Eh-nek). + + < Klamath, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, + 1878 (cited as including Cahrocs). + + +Derivation: Name of a band at mouth of Salmon River, California. +Etymology unknown. + +This family name is equivalent to the Cahroc or Karok of Powers and +later authorities. + +In 1853, as above cited, Gibbs gives Eh-nek as the titular heading of +his paragraphs upon the language of this family, with the remark that it +is "The name of a band at the mouth of the Salmon, or Quoratem river." +He adds that "This latter name may perhaps be considered as proper to +give to the family, should it be held one." He defines the territory +occupied by the family as follows: "The language reaches from Bluff +creek, the upper boundary of the Pohlik, to about Clear creek, thirty or +forty miles above the Salmon; varying, however, somewhat from point to +point." + +The presentation of the name Quoratem, as above, seems sufficiently +formal, and it is therefore accepted for the group first indicated by +Gibbs. + +In 1856 Latham renamed the family Ehnik, after the principal band, +locating the tribe, or rather the language, south of the Shasti and +Lutuami areas. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The geographic limits of the family are somewhat indeterminate, though +the main area occupied by the tribes is well known. The tribes occupy +both banks of the lower Klamath from a range of hills a little above +Happy Camp to the junction of the Trinity, and the Salmon River from its +mouth to its sources. On the north, Quoratean tribes extended to the +Athapascan territory near the Oregon line. + + +TRIBES. + + Ehnek. + Karok. + Pehtsik. + + +_Population._--According to a careful estimate made by Mr. Curtin in the +region in 1889, the Indians of this family number about 600. + + + + +SALINAN FAMILY. + + + < Salinas, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes + Gioloco, Ruslen, Soledad of Mofras, Eslen, Carmel, San Antonio, San + Miguel). Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860. + + > San Antonio, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 568, 1877 (vocabulary + of; not given as a family, but kept by itself). + + < Santa Barbara, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157, 1877 (cited here as + containing San Antonio). Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., + VII, 419, 1879 (contains San Antonio, San Miguel). + + X Runsiens, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 476, + 1878 (San Miguel of his group belongs here). + + +Derivation: From river of same name. + +The language formerly spoken at the Missions of San Antonio and San +Miguel in Monterey County, California, have long occupied a doubtful +position. By some they have been considered distinct, not only from each +other, but from all other languages. Others have held that they +represent distinct dialects of the Chumashan (Santa Barbara) group of +languages. Vocabularies collected in 1884 by Mr. Henshaw show clearly +that the two are closely connected dialects and that they are in no wise +related to any other family. + +The group established by Latham under the name Salinas is a +heterogeneous one, containing representatives of no fewer than four +distinct families. Gioloco, which he states "may possibly belong to this +group, notwithstanding its reference to the Mission of San Francisco," +really is congeneric with the vocabularies assigned by Latham to the +Mendocinan family. The "Soledad of Mofras" belongs to the Costanoan +family mentioned on page 348 of the same essay, as also do the Ruslen +and Carmel. Of the three remaining forms of speech, Eslen, San Antonio, +and San Miguel, the two latter are related dialects, and belong within +the drainage of the Salinas River. The term Salinan is hence applied to +them, leaving the Eslen language to be provided with a name. + + +_Population._--Though the San Antonio and San Miguel were probably never +very populous tribes, the Missions of San Antonio and San Miguel, when +first established in the years 1771 and 1779, contained respectively +1,400 and 1,300 Indians. Doubtless the larger number of these converts +were gathered in the near vicinity of the two missions and so belonged +to this family. In 1884 when Mr. Henshaw visited the missions he was +able to learn of the existence of only about a dozen Indians of this +family, and not all of these could speak their own language. + + + + +SALISHAN FAMILY. + + + > Salish, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, 306, 1836 (or + Flat Heads only). Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II, 31-50, + 1846 (of Duponceau. Said to be the Okanagan of Tolmie). + + X Salish, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 474, + 1878 (includes Flatheads, Kalispelms, Skitsuish, Colvilles, Quarlpi, + Spokanes, Pisquouse, Soaiatlpi). + + = Salish, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 618, 1882. + + > Selish, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc. II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (vocab. + of Nsietshaws). Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 63, 78, 1884 + (vocabularies of Lillooet and Kull[-e]spelm). + + > Jelish, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 403, 1853 + (obvious misprint for Selish; follows Hale as to tribes). + + = Selish, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 169, 1877 (gives habitat and + tribes of family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 444, 1877. + + < Selish, Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 241, 1877 + (includes Yakama, which is Shahaptian). + + > Tsihaili-Selish, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 205, 535, 569, 1846 + (includes Shushwaps. Selish or Flatheads, Skitsuish, Piskwaus, Skwale, + Tsihailish, Kawelitsk, Nsietshawus). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., + II, pt. 1, c, 10, 1848 (after Hale). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, + map 17, 1852. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 658-661, 1859. + Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 399, 1862 (contains Shushwap or Atna Proper, + Kuttelspelm or Pend d'Oreilles, Selish, Spokan, Okanagan, Skitsuish, + Piskwaus, Nusdalum, Kawitchen, Cathlascou, Skwali, Chechili, Kwaintl, + Kwenaiwtl, Nsietshawus, Billechula). + + > Atnahs, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 134, 135, 306, 1836 + (on Fraser River). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 427, 1847 (on + Fraser River). + + > Atna, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 71, 1856 + (Tsihaili-Selish of Hale and Gallatin). + + X Nootka-Columbian, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 224, + 1841 (includes, among others, Billechoola, Kawitchen, Noosdalum, + Squallyamish of present family). + + X Insular, Scouler, ibid., (same as Nootka-Columbian family). + + X Shahaptan, Scouler, ibid., 225 (includes Okanagan of this family). + + X Southern, Scouler, ibid., 224 (same as Nootka-Columbian family). + + > Billechoola, Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 154, 1848 (assigns + Friendly Village of McKenzie here). Latham, Opuscula, 250, 1860 (gives + Tolmie's vocabulary). + + > Billechula, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (mouth of Salmon + River). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856 (same). + Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860. + + > Bellacoola, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 607, 1882 (Bellacoolas + only; specimen vocabulary). + + > Bilhoola, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 62, 1884 (vocab. of + Noothl[-a]kimish). + + > Bilchula, Boas in Petermann's Mitteilungen, 130, 1887 (mentions + S[-a]tsq, N[-u]t[eo][']l, Nuchalkm[ch], Tale['o]m[ch]). + + X Naass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc. II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848 + (cited as including Billechola). + + > Tsihaili, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 310, 1850 (chiefly lower part of + Fraser River and between that and the Columbia; includes Shuswap, + Salish, Skitsuish, Piskwaus, Kawitchen, Skwali, Checheeli, Kowelits, + Noosdalum, Nsietshawus). + + X Wakash, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 301, 1850 (cited as including + Klallems). + + X Shushwaps, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, + 474, 1878 (quoted as including Shewhapmuch and Okanagans). + + X Hydahs, Keane, ibid., 473 (includes Bellacoolas of present family). + + X Nootkahs, Keane, ibid., 473 (includes Komux, Kowitchans, Klallums, + Kwantlums, Teets of present family). + + X Nootka, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 1882 (contains the following + Salishan tribes: Cowichin, Soke, Comux, Noosdalum, Wickinninish, + Songhie, Sanetch, Kwantlum, Teet, Nanaimo, Newchemass, Shimiahmoo, + Nooksak, Samish, Skagit, Snohomish, Clallam, Toanhooch). + + < Puget Sound Group, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), + 474, 1878 (comprises Nooksahs, Lummi, Samish, Skagits, Nisqually, + Neewamish, Sahmamish, Snohomish, Skeewamish, Squanamish, Klallums, + Classets, Chehalis, Cowlitz, Pistchin, Chinakum; all but the last + being Salishan). + + > Flatheads, Keane, ibid., 474, 1878 (same as his Salish above). + + > Kawitshin, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 39, 1884 (vocabs. of + Songis and Kwantlin Sept and Kowmook or Tlathool). + + > Qauitschin, Boas in Petermann's Mitteilungen, 131, 1887. + + > Niskwalli, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 50, 121, 1884 (or + Skwalliamish vocabulary of Sinahomish). + + +The extent of the Salish or Flathead family was unknown to Gallatin, as +indeed appears to have been the exact locality of the tribe of which he +gives an anonymous vocabulary from the Duponceau collection. The tribe +is stated to have resided upon one of the branches of the Columbia +River, "which must be either the most southern branch of Clarke's River +or the most northern branch of Lewis's River." The former supposition +was correct. As employed by Gallatin the family embraced only a single +tribe, the Flathead tribe proper. The Atnah, a Salishan tribe, were +considered by Gallatin to be distinct, and the name would be eligible as +the family name; preference, however, is given to Salish. The few words +from the Friendly Village near the sources of the Salmon River given by +Gallatin in Archaeologia Americana, II, 1836, pp. 15, 306, belong under +this family. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +Since Gallatin's time, through the labors of Riggs, Hale, Tolmie, +Dawson, Boas, and others, our knowledge of the territorial limits of +this linguistic family has been greatly extended. The most southern +outpost of the family, the Tillamook and Nestucca, were established on +the coast of Oregon, about 50 miles to the south of the Columbia, where +they were quite separated from their kindred to the north by the +Chinookan tribes. Beginning on the north side of Shoalwater Bay, +Salishan tribes held the entire northwestern part of Washington, +including the whole of the Puget Sound region, except only the Macaw +territory about Cape Flattery, and two insignificant spots, one near +Port Townsend, the other on the Pacific coast to the south of Cape +Flattery, which were occupied by Chimakuan tribes. Eastern Vancouver +Island to about midway of its length was also held by Salishan tribes, +while the great bulk of their territory lay on the mainland opposite and +included much of the upper Columbia. On the south they were hemmed in +mainly by the Shahaptian tribes. Upon the east Salishan tribes dwelt to +a little beyond the Arrow Lakes and their feeder, one of the extreme +north forks of the Columbia. Upon the southeast Salishan tribes extended +into Montana, including the upper drainage of the Columbia. They were +met here in 1804 by Lewis and Clarke. On the northeast Salish territory +extended to about the fifty-third parallel. In the northwest it did not +reach the Chilcat River. + +Within the territory thus indicated there is considerable diversity of +customs and a greater diversity of language. The language is split into +a great number of dialects, many of which are doubtless mutually +unintelligible. + +The relationship of this family to the Wakashan is a very interesting +problem. Evidences of radical affinity have been discovered by Boas and +Gatschet, and the careful study of their nature and extent now being +prosecuted by the former may result in the union of the two, though +until recently they have been considered quite distinct. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Atnah. Pentlatc. Skitsuish. + Bellacoola. Pisquow. Skokomish. + Chehalis. Puyallup. Skopamish. + Clallam. Quaitso. Sktehlmish. + Colville. Queniut. Smulkamish. + Comux. Queptlmamish. Snohomish. + Copalis. Sacumehu. Snoqualmi. + Cowichin. Sahewamish. Soke. + Cowlitz. Salish. Songish. + Dwamish. Samamish. Spokan. + Kwantlen. Samish. Squawmisht. + Lummi. Sanetch. Squaxon. + Met'how. Sans Puell. Squonamish. + Nanaimo. Satsop. Stehtsasamish. + Nanoos. Sawamish. Stillacum. + Nehalim. Sekamish. Sumass. + Nespelum. Shomamish. Suquamish. + Nicoutamuch. Shooswap. Swinamish. + Nisqualli. Shotlemamish. Tait. + Nuksahk. Skagit. Tillamook. + Okinagan. Skihwamish. Twana. + Pend d'Oreilles. + + +_Population._--The total Salish population of British Columbia is +12,325, inclusive of the Bellacoola, who number, with the Hailtzuk, +2,500, and those in the list of unclassified, who number 8,522, +distributed as follows: + +Under the Fraser River Agency, 4,986; Kamloops Agency, 2,579; Cowichan +Agency, 1,852; Okanagan Agency, 942; Williams Lake Agency, 1,918; +Kootenay Agency, 48. + +Most of the Salish in the United States are on reservations. They number +about 5,500, including a dozen small tribes upon the Yakama Reservation, +which have been consolidated with the Clickatat (Shahaptian) through +intermarriage. The Salish of the United States are distributed as +follows (Indian Affairs Report, 1889, and U.S. Census Bulletin, 1890): + +Colville Agency, Washington, Coeur d' Alene, 422; Lower Spokane, 417; +Lake, 303; Colville, 247; Okinagan, 374; Kespilem, 67; San Pueblo (Sans +Puell), 300; Calispel, 200; Upper Spokane, 170. + +Puyallup Agency, Washington, Quaitso, 82; Quinaielt (Queniut), 101; +Humptulip, 19; Puyallup, 563; Chehalis, 135; Nisqually, 94; Squaxon, 60; +Clallam, 351; Skokomish, 191; Oyhut, Hoquiam, Montesano, and Satsup, 29. + +Tulalip Agency, Washington, Snohomish, 443; Madison, 144; Muckleshoot, +103; Swinomish, 227; Lummi, 295. + +Grande Ronde Agency, Oregon, Tillamook, 5. + + + + +SASTEAN FAMILY. + + + = Saste, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846. Gallatin in + Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848. Berghaus (1851), Physik. + Atlas, map 17, 1852. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 572, 1859. + + = Shasty, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 1846 (= Saste). Buschmann, + Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 573, 1859 (= Saste). + + = Shasties, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 569, 1846 (= Saste). + Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. + + = Shasti, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 (southwest of Lutuami). + Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc., Lond., VI, 82, 1854. Latham, ibid, 74, + 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 310, 341, 1860 (allied to both Shoshonean and + Shahaptian families). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 407, 1862. + + = Shaste, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (mentions + Watsa-he'-wa, a Scott's River band). + + = Sasti, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 + (= Shasties). + + = Shasta, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 607, 1877. Gatschet in Mag. + Am. Hist., 164, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 438, 1877. + + = Shas-ti-ka, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 243, 1877. + + = Shasta, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 164, 1877 (= Shasteecas). + + < Shasta, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 1882 (includes Palaik, + Watsahewah, Shasta). + + < Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 + (contains Shastas of present family). + + +Derivation: The single tribe upon the language of which Hale based his +name was located by him to the southwest of the Lutuami or Klamath +tribes. He calls the tribe indifferently Shasties or Shasty, but the +form applied by him to the family (see pp. 218, 569) is Saste, which +accordingly is the one taken. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The former territory of the Sastean family is the region drained by the +Klamath River and its tributaries from the western base of the Cascade +range to the point where the Klamath flows through the ridge of hills +east of Happy Camp, which forms the boundary between the Sastean and the +Quoratean families. In addition to this region of the Klamath, the +Shasta extended over the Siskiyou range northward as far as Ashland, +Oregon. + + + + +SHAHAPTIAN FAMILY. + + + X Shahaptan, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., XI, 225, 1841 (three + tribes, Shahaptan or Nez-perces, Kliketat, Okanagan; the latter being + Salishan). + + < Shahaptan, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 428, 1847 (two classes, + Nez-perces proper of mountains, and Polanches of plains; includes also + Kliketat and Okanagan). + + > Sahaptin, Hale in U.S. Expl. Expd., VI, 198, 212, 542, 1846 + (Shahaptin or Nez-perces, Wallawallas, Pelooses, Yakemas, Klikatats). + Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 14, 1848 (follows + Hale). Gallatin, ibid., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848 (Nez-perces only). + Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, + Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (Nez-perces and Wallawallas). Dall, after + Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1, 241, 1877 (includes Taitinapam and + Kliketat). + + > Saptin, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 428, 1847 (or Shahaptan). + + < Sahaptin, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 323, 1850 (includes Wallawallas, + Kliketat, Proper Sahaptin or Nez-perces, Pel['u]s, Yakemas, Cay['u]s?). + Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (includes Waiilatpu). + Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 614, 615, 1859. Latham, + Opuscula, 340, 1860 (as in 1856). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 440, 1862 + (vocabularies Sahaptin, Wallawalla, Kliketat). Keane, App. Stanford's + Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 460, 474, 1878 (includes Palouse, Walla + Wallas, Yakimas, Tairtlas, Kliketats or Pshawanwappams, Cayuse, + Mollale; the two last are Waiilatpuan). + + = Sahaptin, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 168, 1877 (defines habitat and + enumerates tribes of). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 443, 1877. + Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, 620, 1882. + + > Shahaptani, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 78, 1884 (Whulwhaipum + tribe). + + < Nez-perces, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 428, 1847 (see + Shahaptan). Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 474, + 1878 (see his Sahaptin). + + X Seliah, Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 241, 1877 + (includes Yakama which belongs here). + + +Derivation: From a Selish word of unknown significance. + +The Shahaptan family of Scouler comprised three tribes--the Shahaptan or +Nez Perces, the Kliketat, a scion of the Shahaptan, dwelling near Mount +Ranier, and the Okanagan, inhabiting the upper part of Fraser River and +its tributaries; "these tribes were asserted to speak dialects of the +same language." Of the above tribes the Okinagan are now known to be +Salishan. + +The vocabularies given by Scouler were collected by Tolmie. The term +"Sahaptin" appears on Gallatin's map of 1836, where it doubtless refers +only to the Nez Perce tribe proper, with respect to whose linguistic +affinities Gallatin apparently knew nothing at the time. At all events +the name occurs nowhere in his discussion of the linguistic families. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The tribes of this family occupied a large section of country along the +Columbia and its tributaries. Their western boundary was the Cascade +Mountains; their westernmost bands, the Klikitat on the north, the Tyigh +and Warm Springs on the south, enveloping for a short distance the +Chinook territory along the Columbia which extended to the Dalles. +Shahaptian tribes extended along the tributaries of the Columbia for a +considerable distance, their northern boundary being indicated by about +the forty-sixth parallel, their southern by about the forty-fourth. +Their eastern extension was interrupted by the Bitter Root Mountains. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES AND POPULATION. + + Chopunnish (Nez Perce), 1,515 on Nez Perce Reservation, Idaho. + Klikitat, say one-half of 330 natives, on Yakama Reservation, + Washington. + Paloos, Yakama Reservation, number unknown. + Tenaino, 69 on Warm Springs Reservation, Oregon. + Tyigh, 430 on Warm Springs Reservation, Oregon. + Umatilla, 179 on Umatilla Reservation, Oregon. + Walla Walla, 405 on Umatilla Reservation, Oregon. + + + + +SHOSHONEAN FAMILY. + + + > Shoshonees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 120, + 133, 306, 1836 (Shoshonee or Snake only). Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, + 218, 1846 (Wihinasht, P['a]nasht, Yutas, Sampiches, Comanches). Gallatin + in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848 (as above). Gallatin, + ibid., 18, 1848 (follows Hale; see below). Gallatin in Schoolcraft, + Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, + 55, 71, 76, 1856 (treats only of Comanche, Chemehuevi, Cahuillo). + Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 553, 649, 1859. + + > Shoshoni, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 218, 569, 1846 + (Sh['o]shoni, Wihinasht, P['a]nasht, Yutas, Sampiches, Comanches). + Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, + 340, 1860. + + > Schoschonenu Kamantschen, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, + 1848. Ibid., 1852. + + > Shoshones, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 429, 1847 (or Snakes; + both sides Rocky Mountains and sources of Missouri). + + = Shosh['o]ni, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist. 154, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, + Ind. Misc., 426, 1877. + + < Shoshone, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, + 477, 1878 (includes Washoes of a distinct family). Bancroft, Nat. + Races, III, 567, 661, 1882. + + > Snake, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 120, 133, + 1836 (or Shoshonees). Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 1846 (as under + Shoshonee). Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 429, 1847 (as under + Shoshones). Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 76, 1856 (as under + Shoshonees). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 552, 649, 1859 (as + under Shoshonees). + + < Snake, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 477, 1878 + (contains Washoes in addition to Shoshonean tribes proper). + + > Kizh, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 569, 1846 (San Gabriel language + only). + + > Netela, Hale, ibid., 569, 1846 (San Juan Capestrano language). + + > Paduca, Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 415, 1847 (Cumanches, + Kiawas, Utas). Latham, Nat. Hist., Man., 310, 326, 1850. Latham (1853) + in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 73, 1854 (includes Wihinast, + Shoshoni, Uta). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 96, 1856. + Latham, Opuscula, 300, 360, 1860. + + < Paduca, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 346, 1850 (Wihinast, Bonaks, + Diggers, Utahs, Sampiches, Shoshonis, Kiaways, Kaskaias?, Keneways?, + Bald-heads, Cumanches, Navahoes, Apaches, Carisos). Latham, El. Comp. + Phil., 440, 1862 (defines area of; cites vocabs. of Shoshoni, + Wihinasht, Uta, Comanch, Piede or Pa-uta, Chemuhuevi, Cahuillo, + Kioway, the latter not belonging here). + + > Cumanches, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853. + + > Netela-Kij, Latham (1853) in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 76, + 1854 (composed of Netela of Hale, San Juan Capistrano of Coulter, San + Gabriel of Coulter, Kij of Hale). + + > Capistrano, Latham in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes + Netela, of San Luis Rey and San Juan Capistrano, the San Gabriel or + Kij of San Gabriel and San Fernando). + + +In his synopsis of the Indian tribes[78] Gallatin's reference to this +great family is of the most vague and unsatisfactory sort. He speaks of +"some bands of Snake Indians or Shoshonees, living on the waters of the +river Columbia" (p. 120), which is almost the only allusion to them to +be found. The only real claim he possesses to the authorship of the +family name is to be found on page 306, where, in his list of tribes and +vocabularies, he places "Shoshonees" among his other families, which is +sufficient to show that he regarded them as a distinct linguistic group. +The vocabulary he possessed was by Say. + + [Footnote 78: Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 1836.] + +Buschmann, as above cited, classes the Shoshonean languages as a +northern branch of his Nahuatl or Aztec family, but the evidence +presented for this connection is deemed to be insufficient. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +This important family occupied a large part of the great interior basin +of the United States. Upon the north Shoshonean tribes extended far into +Oregon, meeting Shahaptian territory on about the forty-fourth parallel +or along the Blue Mountains. Upon the northeast the eastern limits of +the pristine habitat of the Shoshonean tribes are unknown. The narrative +of Lewis and Clarke[79] contains the explicit statement that the +Shoshoni bands encountered upon the Jefferson River, whose summer home +was upon the head waters of the Columbia, formerly lived within their +own recollection in the plains to the east of the Rocky Mountains, +whence they were driven to their mountain retreats by the Minnetaree +(Atsina), who had obtained firearms. Their former habitat thus given is +indicated upon the map, although the eastern limit is of course quite +indeterminate. Very likely much of the area occupied by the Atsina was +formerly Shoshonean territory. Later a division of the Bannock held the +finest portion of southwestern Montana,[80] whence apparently they were +being pushed westward across the mountains by Blackfeet.[81] Upon the +east the Tukuarika or Sheepeaters held the Yellowstone Park country, +where they were bordered by Siouan territory, while the Washaki occupied +southwestern Wyoming. Nearly the entire mountainous part of Colorado was +held by the several bands of the Ute, the eastern and southeastern parts +of the State being held respectively by the Arapaho and Cheyenne +(Algonquian), and the Kaiowe (Kiowan). To the southeast the Ute country +included the northern drainage of the San Juan, extending farther east a +short distance into New Mexico. The Comanche division of the family +extended farther east than any other. According to Crow tradition the +Comanche formerly lived northward in the Snake River region. Omaha +tradition avers that the Comanche were on the Middle Loup River, +probably within the present century. Bourgemont found a Comanche tribe +on the upper Kansas River in 1724.[82] According to Pike the Comanche +territory bordered the Kaiowe on the north, the former occupying the +head waters of the upper Red River, Arkansas, and Rio Grande.[83] How +far to the southward Shoshonean tribes extended at this early period is +not known, though the evidence tends to show that they raided far down +into Texas to the territory they have occupied in more recent years, +viz, the extensive plains from the Rocky Mountains eastward into Indian +Territory and Texas to about 97 deg.. Upon the south Shoshonean territory +was limited generally by the Colorado River. The Chemehuevi lived on +both banks of the river between the Mohave on the north and the Cuchan +on the south, above and below Bill Williams Fork.[84] The Kwaiantikwoket +also lived to the east of the river in Arizona about Navajo Mountain, +while the Tusayan (Moki) had established their seven pueblos, including +one founded by people of Tanoan stock, to the east of the Colorado +Chiquito. In the southwest Shoshonean tribes had pushed across +California, occupying a wide band of country to the Pacific. In their +extension northward they had reached as far as Tulare Lake, from which +territory apparently they had dispossessed the Mariposan tribes, leaving +a small remnant of that linguistic family near Fort Tejon.[85] + + [Footnote 79: Allen ed., Philadelphia, 1814, vol. 1, p. 418.] + + [Footnote 80: U.S. Ind. Aff., 1869, p. 289.] + + [Footnote 81: Stevens in Pac. R. R. Rep., 1855, vol. 1, p. 329.] + + [Footnote 82: Lewis and Clarke, Allen ed., 1814, vol. 1, p. 34.] + + [Footnote 83: Pike, Expl. to sources of the Miss., app. pt. 3, 16, + 1810.] + + [Footnote 84: Ives, Colorado River, 1861, p. 54.] + + [Footnote 85: Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., 1877, vol. 3, p. 369.] + +A little farther north they had crossed the Sierras and occupied the +heads of San Joaquin and Kings Rivers. Northward they occupied nearly +the whole of Nevada, being limited on the west by the Sierra Nevada. The +entire southeastern part of Oregon was occupied by tribes of Shoshoni +extraction. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES AND POPULATION. + + Bannock, 514 on Fort Hall Reservation + and 75 on the Lemhi Reservation, Idaho. + Chemehuevi, about 202 attached to the Colorado River Agency, Arizona. + Comanche, 1,598 on the Kiowa, Comanche and Wichita Reservation, + Indian Territory. + Gosiute, 256 in Utah at large. + Pai Ute, about 2,300 scattered in southeastern California and + southwestern Nevada. + Paviotso, about 3,000 scattered in western Nevada and southern Oregon. + Saidyuka, 145 under Klamath Agency. + Shoshoni, 979 under Fort Hall Agency and 249 at the Lemhi Agency. + Tobikhar, about 2,200, under the Mission Agency, California. + Tukuarika, or Sheepeaters, 108 at Lemhi Agency. + Tusayan (Moki), 1,996 (census of 1890). + Uta, 2,839 distributed as follows: + 985 under Southern Ute Agency, Colorado; + 1,021 on Ouray Reserve, Utah; + 833 on Uintah Reserve, Utah. + + + + +SIOUAN FAMILY. + + + X Sioux, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 121, 306, + 1836 (for tribes included see text below). Prichard, Phys. Hist. + Mankind, V, 408, 1847 (follows Gallatin). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. + Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848 (as in 1836). Berghaus (1845), Physik. + Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. + Tribes, III, 402, 1853. Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. + + > Sioux, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 333, 1850 (includes Winebagoes, + Dakotas, Assineboins, Upsaroka, Mandans, Minetari, Osage). Latham in + Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856 (mere mention of family). + Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil, 458, 1862. + + > Catawbas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 87, 1836 + (Catawbas and Woccons). Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 245, et map, 1840. + Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 399, 1847. Gallatin in Trans. Am. + Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. + (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 473, 1878. + + > Catahbas, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. + + > Catawba, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 334, 1850 (Woccoon are allied). + Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 401, 1853. + + > Kataba, Gatschet in Am. Antiquarian, IV, 238, 1882. Gatschet, Creek + Mig. Legend, I, 15, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 413, April 29, 1887. + + > Woccons, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 306, 1836 + (numbered and given as a distinct family in table, but inconsistently + noted in foot-note where referred to as Catawban family.) + + > Dahcotas, Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III, 243, 1840. + + > Dakotas, Hayden, Cont. Eth. and Phil. Missouri Ind., 232, 1862 + (treats of Dakotas, Assiniboins, Crows, Minnitarees, Mandans, Omahas, + Iowas). + + > Dacotah, Keane, App. to Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, + 470, 1878. (The following are the main divisions given: Isaunties, + Sissetons, Yantons, Teetons, Assiniboines, Winnebagos, Punkas, Omahas, + Missouris, Iowas, Otoes, Kaws, Quappas, Osages, Upsarocas, + Minnetarees.) + + > Dakota, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. + + +Derivation: A corruption of the Algonkin word "nadowe-ssi-wag," "the +snake-like ones," "the enemies" (Trumbull). + +Under the family Gallatin makes four subdivisions, viz, the Winnebagos, +the Sioux proper and the Assiniboins, the Minnetare group, and the +Osages and southern kindred tribes. Gallatin speaks of the distribution +of the family as follows: The Winnebagoes have their principal seats on +the Fox River of Lake Michigan and towards the heads of the Rock River +of the Mississippi; of the Dahcotas proper, the Mendewahkantoan or "Gens +du Lac" lived east of the Mississippi from Prairie du Chien north to +Spirit Lake. The three others, Wahkpatoan, Wahkpakotoan and Sisitoans +inhabit the country between the Mississippi and the St. Peters, and that +on the southern tributaries of this river and on the headwaters of the +Red River of Lake Winnipek. The three western tribes, the Yanktons, the +Yanktoanans and the Tetons wander between the Mississippi and the +Missouri, extending southerly to 43 deg. of north latitude and some +distance west of the Missouri, between 43 deg. and 47 deg. of latitude. +The "Shyennes" are included in the family but are marked as doubtfully +belonging here. + +Owing to the fact that "Sioux" is a word of reproach and means snake or +enemy, the term has been discarded by many later writers as a family +designation, and "Dakota," which signifies friend or ally, has been +employed in its stead. The two words are, however, by no means properly +synonymous. The term "Sioux" was used by Gallatin in a comprehensive or +family sense and was applied to all the tribes collectively known to him +to speak kindred dialects of a widespread language. It is in this sense +only, as applied to the linguistic family, that the term is here +employed. The term "Dahcota" (Dakota) was correctly applied by Gallatin +to the Dakota tribes proper as distinguished from the other members of +the linguistic family who are not Dakotas in a tribal sense. The use of +the term with this signification should be perpetuated. + +It is only recently that a definite decision has been reached respecting +the relationship of the Catawba and Woccon, the latter an extinct tribe +known to have been linguistically related to the Catawba. Gallatin +thought that he was able to discern some affinities of the Catawban +language with "Muskhogee and even with Choctaw," though these were not +sufficient to induce him to class them together. Mr. Gatschet was the +first to call attention to the presence in the Catawba language of a +considerable number of words having a Siouan affinity. + +Recently Mr. Dorsey has made a critical examination of all the Catawba +linguistic material available, which has been materially increased by +the labors of Mr. Gatschet, and the result seems to justify its +inclusion as one of the dialects of the widespread Siouan family. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The pristine territory of this family was mainly in one body, the only +exceptions being the habitats of the Biloxi, the Tutelo, the Catawba and +Woccon. + +Contrary to the popular opinion of the present day, the general trend of +Siouan migration has been westward. In comparatively late prehistoric +times, probably most of the Siouan tribes dwelt east of the Mississippi +River. + +The main Siouan territory extended from about 53 deg. north in the Hudson +Bay Company Territory, to about 33 deg., including a considerable part of +the watershed of the Missouri River and that of the Upper Mississippi. +It was bounded on the northwest, north, northeast, and for some distance +on the east by Algonquian territory. South of 45 deg. north the line ran +eastward to Lake Michigan, as the Green Bay region belonged to the +Winnebago.[86] + + [Footnote 86: See treaty of Prairie du Chien, 1825.] + +It extended westward from Lake Michigan through Illinois, crossing the +Mississippi River at Prairie du Chien. At this point began the +Algonquian territory (Sac, etc.) on the west side of the Mississippi, +extending southward to the Missouri, and crossing that river it returned +to the Mississippi at St. Louis. The Siouan tribes claimed all of the +present States of Iowa and Missouri, except the parts occupied by +Algonquian tribes. The dividing line between the two for a short +distance below St. Louis was the Mississippi River. The line then ran +west of Dunklin, New Madrid, and Pemiscot Counties, in Missouri, and +Mississippi County and those parts of Craighead and Poinsett Counties, +Arkansas, lying east of the St. Francis River. Once more the Mississippi +became the eastern boundary, but in this case separating the Siouan from +the Muskhogean territory. The Quapaw or Akansa were the most southerly +tribe in the main Siouan territory. In 1673[87] they were east of the +Mississippi. Joutel (1687) located two of their villages on the Arkansas +and two on the Mississippi one of the latter being on the east bank, in +our present State of Mississippi, and the other being on the opposite +side, in Arkansas. Shea says[88] that the Kaskaskias were found by De +Soto in 1540 in latitude 36 deg., and that the Quapaw were higher up the +Mississippi. But we know that the southeast corner of Missouri and the +northeast corner of Arkansas, east of the St. Francis River, belonged to +Algonquian tribes. A study of the map of Arkansas shows reason for +believing that there may have been a slight overlapping of habitats, or +a sort of debatable ground. At any rate it seems advisable to +compromise, and assign the Quapaw and Osage (Siouan tribes) all of +Arkansas up to about 36 deg. north. + + [Footnote 87: Marquette's Autograph Map.] + + [Footnote 88: Disc. of Miss. Valley, p. 170, note.] + +On the southwest of the Siouan family was the Southern Caddoan group, +the boundary extending from the west side of the Mississippi River in +Louisiana, nearly opposite Vicksburg, Mississippi, and running +northwestwardly to the bend of Red River between Arkansas and Louisiana; +thence northwest along the divide between the watersheds of the Arkansas +and Red Rivers. In the northwest corner of Indian Territory the Osages +came in contact with the Comanche (Shoshonean), and near the western +boundary of Kansas the Kiowa, Cheyenne, and Arapaho (the two latter +being recent Algonquian intruders?) barred the westward march of the +Kansa or Kaw. + +The Pawnee group of the Caddoan family in western Nebraska and +northwestern Kansas separated the Ponka and Dakota on the north from the +Kansa on the south, and the Omaha and other Siouan tribes on the east +from Kiowa and other tribes on the west. The Omaha and cognate peoples +occupied in Nebraska the lower part of the Platte River, most of the +Elkhorn Valley, and the Ponka claimed the region watered by the Niobrara +in northern Nebraska. + +There seems to be sufficient evidence for assigning to the Crows +(Siouan) the northwest corner of Nebraska (i.e., that part north of the +Kiowan and Caddoan habitats) and the southwest part of South Dakota (not +claimed by Cheyenne[89]), as well as the northern part of Wyoming and +the southern part of Montana, where they met the Shoshonean stock.[90] + + [Footnote 89: See Cheyenne treaty, in Indian Treaties, 1873, pp. + 124, 5481-5489.] + + [Footnote 90: Lewis and Clarke, Trav., Lond., 1807, p. 25. Lewis + and Clarke, Expl., 1874, vol. 2, p. 390. A. L. Riggs, MS. letter + to Dorsey, 1876 or 1877. Dorsey, Ponka tradition: "The Black Hills + belong to the Crows." That the Dakotas were not there till this + century see Corbusier's Dakota Winter Counts, in 4th Rept. Bur. + Eth., p. 130, where it is also said that the Crow were the + original owners of the Black Hills.] + +The Biloxi habitat in 1699 was on the Pascogoula river,[91] in the +southeast corner of the present State of Mississippi. The Biloxi +subsequently removed to Louisiana, where a few survivors were found by +Mr. Gatschet in 1886. + + [Footnote 91: Margry, Decouvertes, vol. 4, p. 195.] + +The Tutelo habitat in 1671 was in Brunswick County, southern Virginia, +and it probably included Lunenburgh and Mecklenburg Counties.[92] The +Earl of Bellomont (1699) says[93] that the Shateras were "supposed to be +the Toteros, on Big Sandy River, Virginia," and Pownall, in his map of +North America (1776), gives the Totteroy (i.e., Big Sandy) River. +Subsequently to 1671 the Tutelo left Virginia and moved to North +Carolina.[94] They returned to Virginia (with the Sapona), joined the +Nottaway and Meherrin, whom they and the Tuscarora followed into +Pennsylvania in the last century; thence they went to New York, where +they joined the Six Nations, with whom they removed to Grand River +Reservation, Ontario, Canada, after the Revolutionary war. The last +full-blood Tutelo died in 1870. For the important discovery of the +Siouan affinity of the Tutelo language we are indebted to Mr. Hale. + + [Footnote 92: Batts in Doc. Col. Hist. N.Y., 1853, vol. 3, p. 194. + Harrison, MS. letter to Dorsey, 1886.] + + [Footnote 93: Doc. Col. Hist. N.Y., 1854, vol. 4. p. 488.] + + [Footnote 94: Lawson, Hist. Carolina, 1714; reprint of 1860, + p. 384.] + +The Catawba lived on the river of the same name on the northern boundary +of South Carolina. Originally they were a powerful tribe, the leading +people of South Carolina, and probably occupied a large part of the +Carolinas. The Woccon were widely separated from kinsmen living in North +Carolina in the fork of the Cotentnea and Neuse Rivers. + +The Wateree, living just below the Catawba, were very probably of the +same linguistic connection. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + +I. _Dakota_. + + (A) Santee: include Mde[']-wa-ka[n]-to[n]-wa[n] [*Mde-wa-kan-ton-wan] + (Spirit Lake village, Santee Reservation, Nebraska), and + Wa-qpe[']-ku-te (Leaf Shooters); some on Fort Peck Reservation, + Montana. + + (B) Sisseton (Si-si[']-to[n]-wa[n]), on Sisseton Reservation, South + Dakota, and part on Devil's Lake Reservation, North Dakota. + + (C) Wahpeton (Wa-qpe[']-to[n]-wa[n], Wa-hpe-ton-wan); Leaf village. + Some on Sisseton Reservation; most on Devil's Lake Reservation. + + (D) Yankton (I-hank[']-to[n]-wa[n]), at Yankton Reservation, South + Dakota. + + (E) Yanktonnais (I-hank[']-to[n]-wa[n][']-na); divided into _Upper_ and + _Lower_. Of the _Upper Yanktonnais_, there are some of the + _Cut-head band_ (Pa[']-ba-ksa gens) on Devil's Lake Reservation. + _Upper Yanktonnais_, most are on Standing Rock Reservation, North + Dakota; _Lower Yanktonnais_, most are on Crow Creek Reservation, + South Dakota, some are on Standing Rock Reservation, and some on + Fort Peck Reservation, Montana. + + (F) Teton (Ti-to[n]-wa[n]); some on Fort Peck Reservation, Montana. + + (a) _Brule_ (Si-tca[n][']-xu); some are on Standing Rock Reservation. + Most of the _Upper Brule_ (Highland Sitca[n]xu) are on Rosebud + Reservation, South Dakota. Most of the _Lower Brule_ (Lowland + Sitca[n]xu) are on Lower Brule Reservation, South Dakota. + + (b) _Sans Arcs_ (I-ta[']-zip-tco['], Without Bows). + Most are on Cheyenne Reservation, South Dakota; some on Standing + Rock Reservation. + + (c) _Blackfeet_ (Si-ha[']sa[']-pa). + Most are on Cheyenne Reservation; some on Standing Rock + Reservation. + + (d) _Minneconjou_ (Mi[']-ni-ko[']-o-ju). + Most are on Cheyenne Reservation, some are on Rosebud Reservation, + and some on Standing Rock Reservation. + + (e) _Two Kettles_ (O-o[']-he-no[n][']-pa, Two Boilings), on Cheyenne + Reservation. + + (f) _Ogalalla_ (O-gla[']-la). Most on Pine Ridge Reservation, South + Dakota; some on Standing Rock Reservation. _Wa-[.z]a-[.z]a_ + (Wa-ja-ja, Wa-zha-zha), a gens of the Oglala (Pine Ridge + Reservation); _Loafers_ (Wa-glu-xe, In-breeders), a gens of the + Oglala; most on Pine Ridge Reservation; some on Rosebud + Reservation. + + (g) _Uncpapa_ (1862-'63), _Uncapapa_ (1880-'81), (Hun[']-kpa-pa), on + Standing Rock Reservation. + +II. _Assinaboin_ (Hohe, Dakota name); most in British North America; + some on Fort Peck Reservation, Montana. + +III. _Omaha_ (U-ma[n][']-ha[n]), on Omaha Reservation, Nebraska. + +IV. _Ponca_ (formerly _Ponka_ on maps; Ponka); 605 on Ponca Reservation, + Indian Territory; 217 at Santee Agency, Nebraska. + + [Transcriber's Note: + In the following, [K] and [S] represent inverted K and S] + +V. _Kaw_ ([K]a[n][']-ze; the Kansa Indians); on the Kansas Reservation, + Indian Territory. + +VI. _Osage_; _Big Osage_ (Pa-he[']-tsi, Those on a Mountain); _Little + Osage_ (Those at the foot of the Mountain); _Arkansas Band_ + ([S]an-[t]su-[k]ci[n] [*San-tsu-kcin], Dwellers in a Highland Grove), + Osage Reservation, Indian Territory. + +VII. _Quapaw_ (U-[k]a[']-qpa; Kwapa). A few are on the Quapaw Reserve, + but about 200 are on the Osage Reserve, Oklahoma. (They are the + _Arkansa_ of early times.) + +VIII. _Iowa_, on Great Nemaha Reserve, Kansas and Nebraska, and 86 on + Sac and Fox Reserve, Indian Territory. + +IX. _Otoe_ (Wa-to[']-qta-ta), on Otoe Reserve, Indian Territory. + +X. _Missouri_ or _Missouria_ (Ni-u[']-t'a-tci), on Otoe Reserve. + +XI. _Winnebago_ (Ho-tcan[']-ga-ra); most in Nebraska, on their reserve: + some are in Wisconsin; some in Michigan, according to Dr. Reynolds. + +XII. _Mandan_, on Fort Berthold Reserve, North Dakota. + +XIII. _Gros Ventres_ (a misleading name; syn. _Minnetaree_; + Hi-da[']-tsa); on the same reserve. + +XIV. _Crow_ (Absaruqe, Aubsaroke, etc.), Crow Reserve, Montana. + +XV. _Tutelo_ (Ye-sa[n][']); among the Six Nations, Grand River Reserve, + Province of Ontario, Canada. + +XVI. _Biloxi_ (Ta[']-neks ha[']-ya), part on the Red River, at Avoyelles, + Louisiana; part in Indian Territory, among the Choctaw and Caddo. + +XVII. _Catawba_. + +XVIII. _Woccon_. + + +_Population._--The present number of the Siouan family is about 43,400, +of whom about 2,204 are in British North America, the rest being in the +United States. Below is given the population of the tribes officially +recognized, compiled chiefly from the Canadian Indian Report for 1888, +the United States Indian Commissioner's Report for 1889, and the United +States Census Bulletin for 1890: + + Dakota: + Mdewakantonwan and Wahpekute (Santee) on Santee Reserve, + Nebraska 869 + At Flandreau, Dakota 292 + Santee at Devil's Lake Agency 54 + Sisseton and Wahpeton on Sisseton Reserve, South Dakota 1,522 + Sisseton, Wahpeton, and Cuthead (Yanktonnais) + at Devil's Lake Reservation 857 + + Yankton: + On Yankton Reservation, South Dakota 1,725 + At Devil's Lake Agency 123 + On Fort Peck Reservation, Montana 1,121 + A few on Crow Creek Reservation, South Dakota 10 + A few on Lower Brule Reservation, South Dakota 10 + ----- 2,989 + Yanktonnais: + Upper Yanktonnais on Standing Rock Reservation 1,786 + Lower Yanktonnais on Crow Creek Reservation 1,058 + At Standing Rock Agency 1,739 + ----- 4,583 + Teton: + Brule, Upper Brule on Rosebud Reservation 3,245 + On Devil's Lake Reservation 2 + Lower Brule at Crow Creek and Lower Brule Agency 1,026 + Minneconjou (mostly) and Two Kettle, on Cheyenne + River Reserve 2,823 + Blackfeet on Standing Rock Reservation 545 + Two Kettle on Rosebud Reservation 315 + Oglala on Pine Ridge Reservation 4,552 + Wajaja (Oglala gens) on Rosebud Reservation 1,825 + Wagluxe (Oglala gens) on Rosebud Reservation 1,353 + Uncapapa, on Standing Rock Reservation 571 + Dakota at Carlisle, Lawrence, and Hampton schools 169 + ----- 16,426 + Dakota in British North America (tribes not stated): + On Bird Tail Sioux Reserve, Birtle Agency, + Northwest Territory 108 + On Oak River Sioux Reserve, Birtle Agency 276 + On Oak Lake Sioux Reserve, Birtle Agency 55 + On Turtle Mountain Sioux Reserve, Birtle Agency 34 + On Standing Buffalo Reserve, under Northwest Territory 184 + Muscowpetung's Agency: + White Cap Dakota (Moose Woods Reservation) 105 + American Sioux (no reserve) 95 + ----- 857 + Assinaboin: + On Fort Belknap Reservation, Montana 952 + On Fort Peck Reservation, Montana 719 + At Devil's Lake Agency 2 + The following are in British North America: + Pheasant Rump's band, at Moose Mountain (of whom 6 at + Missouri and 4 at Turtle Mountain) 69 + Ocean Man's band, at Moose Mountain (of whom 4 at + Missouri) 68 + The-man-who-took-the-coat's band, at Indian Head (of + whom 5 are at Milk River) 248 + Bear's Head band, Battleford Agency 227 + Chee-pooste-quahn band, at Wolf Creek, Peace Hills + Agency 128 + Bear's Paw band, at Morleyville 236 + Chiniquy band, Reserve, at Sarcee Agency 134 + Jacob's band 227 + ----- 3,008 + Omaha: + Omaha and Winnebago Agency, Nebraska 1,158 + At Carlisle School, Pennsylvania 19 + At Hampton School, Virginia 10 + At Lawrence School, Kansas 10 + ----- 1,197 + Ponka: + In Nebraska (under the Santee agent) 217 + In Indian Territory (under the Ponka agent) 605 + At Carlisle, Pennsylvania 1 + At Lawrence, Kansas 24 + ----- 847 + Osage: + At Osage Agency, Indian Territory 1,509 + At Carlisle, Pennsylvania 7 + At Lawrence, Kansas 65 + ----- 1,581 + Kansa or Kaw: + At Osage Agency, Indian Territory 198 + At Carlisle, Pennsylvania 1 + At Lawrence, Kansas 15 + ----- 214 + Quapaw: + On Quapaw Reserve, Indian Territory 154 + On Osage Reserve, Indian Territory 71 + At Carlisle, Pennsylvania 3 + At Lawrence, Kansas 4 + ----- 232 + Iowa: + On Great Nemaha Reservation, Kansas 165 + On Sac and Fox Reservation, Oklahoma 102 + At Carlisle, Pennsylvania 1 + At Lawrence, Kansas 5 + ----- 273 + + Oto and Missouri, in Indian Territory 358 + + Winnebago: + In Nebraska 1,215 + In Wisconsin (1889) 930 + At Carlisle, Pennsylvania 27 + At Lawrence, Kansas 2 + At Hampton, Virginia 10 + ----- 2,184 + Mandan: + On Fort Berthold Reservation, North Dakota 251 + At Hampton, Virginia 1 + ----- 252 + + Hidatsa, on Fort Berthold Reservation, North Dakota 522 + + Crow, on Crow Reservation, Montana 2,287 + + Tutelo, about a dozen mixed bloods on Grand River + Reserve, Ontario, Canada, and a few more near + Montreal (?), say, about 20 + + Biloxi: + In Louisiana, about 25 + At Atoka, Indian Territory 1 + ----- 26 + Catawba: + In York County, South Carolina, about 80 + Scattered through North Carolina, about 40? + ----- 120? + + + + +SKITTAGETAN FAMILY. + + + > Skittagets, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, + c, 1848 (the equivalent of his Queen Charlotte's Island group, p. 77). + + > Skittagetts, Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. + + > Skidegattz, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 403, 1853 + (obvious typographical error; Queen Charlotte Island). + + X Haidah, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 224, 1841 (same + as his Northern family; see below). + + = Haidah, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (Skittegats, Massets, + Kumshahas, Kyganie). Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856 + (includes Skittigats, Massetts, Kumshahas, and Kyganie of Queen + Charlotte's Ids. and Prince of Wales Archipelago). Latham, Opuscula, + 339, 1860. Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 673, 1859. Latham, + El. Comp. Phil., 401, 1862 (as in 1856). Dall in Proc. Am. Ass'n. 269, + 1869 (Queen Charlotte's Ids. and southern part of Alexander + Archipelago). Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 604, 1882. + + > Hai-dai, Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 489, 1855. Kane, Wanderings of + an Artist, app., 1859, (Work's census, 1836-'41, of northwest coast + tribes, classified by language). + + = Haida, Gibbs in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 135, 1877. Tolmie and Dawson, + Comp. Vocabs., 15, 1884 (vocabs. of Kaigani Sept, Masset, Skidegate, + Kumshiwa dialects; also map showing distribution). Dall in Proc. Am. + Ass'n, 375, 1885 (mere mention of family). + + < Hydahs, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 473, + 1878 (enumerates Massets, Klue, Kiddan, Ninstance, Skid-a-gate, + Skid-a-gatees, Cum-she-was, Kaiganies, Tsimsheeans, Nass, Skeenas, + Sebasses, Hailtzas, Bellacoolas). + + > Queen Charlotte's Island, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. + Soc., II, 15, 306, 1836 (no tribe indicated). Gallatin in Trans. Am. + Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (based on Skittagete language). Latham + in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., 1, 154, 1848. Latham, Opuscula, 349, 1860. + + X Northern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 219, 1841 + (includes Queen Charlotte's Island and tribes on islands and coast up + to 60 deg. N.L.; Haidas, Massettes, Skitteg['a]s, Cumshaw['a]s). + Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 433, 1847 (follows Scouler). + + = Kyg['a]ni, Dall in Proc. Am. Ass'n, 269, 1869 (Queen Charlotte's Ids. + or Haidahs). + + X Nootka, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 1882 (contains Quane, + probably of present family; Quactoe, Saukaulutuck). + + +The vocabulary referred by Gallatin[95] to "Queen Charlotte's Islands" +unquestionably belongs to the present family. In addition to being a +compound word and being objectionable as a family name on account of its +unwieldiness, the term is a purely geographic one and is based upon no +stated tribe; hence it is not eligible for use in systematic +nomenclature. As it appears in the Archaeologia Americana it represents +nothing but the locality whence the vocabulary of an unknown tribe was +received. + + [Footnote 95: Archaeologia Americana, 1836, II, pp. 15, 306.] + +The family name to be considered as next in order of date is the +Northern (or Haidah) of Scouler, which appears in volume XI, Royal +Geographical Society, page 218, et seq. The term as employed by Scouler +is involved in much confusion, and it is somewhat difficult to determine +just what tribes the author intended to cover by the designation. +Reduced to its simplest form, the case stands as follows: Scouler's +primary division of the Indians of the Northwest was into two groups, +the insular and the inland. The insular (and coast tribes) were then +subdivided into two families, viz, Northern or Haidah family (for the +terms are interchangeably used, as on page 224) and the Southern or +Nootka-Columbian family. Under the Northern or Haidah family the author +classes all the Indian tribes in the Russian territory, the Kolchians +(Athapascas of Gallatin, 1836), the Koloshes, Ugalentzes, and Tun Ghaase +(the Koluscans of Gallatin, 1836); the Atnas (Salish of Gallatin, 1836); +the Kenaians (Athapascas, Gallatin, 1836); the Haidah tribes proper of +Queen Charlotte Island, and the Chimesyans. + +It will appear at a glance that such a heterogeneous assemblage of +tribes, representing as they do several distinct stocks, can not have +been classed together on purely linguistic evidence. In point of fact, +Scouler's remarkable classification seems to rest only in a very slight +degree upon a linguistic basis, if indeed it can be said to have a +linguistic basis at all. Consideration of "physical character, manners, +and customs" were clearly accorded such weight by this author as to +practically remove his Northern or Haidah family from the list of +linguistic stocks. + +The next family name which was applied in this connection is the +Skittagets of Gallatin as above cited. This name is given to designate a +family on page _c_, volume II, of Transactions of the Ethnological +Society, 1848. In his subsequent list of vocabularies, page 77, he +changes his designation to Queen Charlotte Island, placing under this +family name the Skittagete tribe. His presentation of the former name of +Skittagets in his complete list of families is, however, sufficiently +formal to render it valid as a family designation, and it is, therefore, +retained for the tribes of the Queen Charlotte Archipelago which have +usually been called Haida. + +From a comparison of the vocabularies of the Haida language with others +of the neighboring Koluschan family, Dr. Franz Boas is inclined to +consider that the two are genetically related. The two languages possess +a considerable number of words in common, but a more thorough +investigation is requisite for the settlement of the question than has +yet been given. Pending this the two families are here treated +separately. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The tribes of this family occupy Queen Charlotte Islands, Forrester +Island to the north of the latter, and the southeastern part of Prince +of Wales Island, the latter part having been ascertained by the agents +of the Tenth Census.[96] + + [Footnote 96: See Petroff map of Alaska, 1880-'81.] + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + +The following is a list of the principal villages: + + Haida: Kaigani: + Aseguang. Chatcheeni. + Cumshawa. Clickass. + Kayung. Howakan. + Kung. Quiahanless. + Kun[ch]it. Shakan. + Massett. + New Gold Harbor. + Skedan. + Skiteiget. + Tanu. + Tartanee. + Uttewas. + + +_Population._--The population of the Haida is 2,500, none of whom are at +present under an agent. + + + + +TAKILMAN FAMILY. + + + = Takilma, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 1882 (Lower Rogue River). + + +This name was proposed by Mr. Gatschet for a distinct language spoken on +the coast of Oregon about the lower Rogue River. Mr. Dorsey obtained a +vocabulary in 1884 which he has compared with Athapascan, Kusan, +Yakonan, and other languages spoken in the region without finding any +marked resemblances. The family is hence admitted provisionally. The +language appears to be spoken by but a single tribe, although there is +a manuscript vocabulary in the Bureau of Ethnology exhibiting certain +differences which may be dialectic. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The Takilma formerly dwelt in villages along upper Rogue River, Oregon, +all the latter, with one exception, being on the south side, from +Illinois River on the southwest, to Deep Rock, which was nearer the head +of the stream. They are now included among the "Rogue River Indians," +and they reside to the number of twenty-seven on the Siletz Reservation, +Tillamook County, Oregon, where Dorsey found them in 1884. + + + + +TANOAN FAMILY. + + + > Tay-waugh, Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V. 689, 1855 + (Pueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara, Pojuaque, Nambe. San Il de Conso, + and one Moqui pueblo). Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. + Am.), 479, 1878. + + > Tano, Powell in Rocky Mountain Presbyterian, Nov., 1878 (includes + Sandia, T['e]wa, San Ildefonso, San Juan, Santa Clara, Pojoaque, + Namb['e], Tesuque, Sinec['u], Jemez, Taos, Picuri). + + > Tegna, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878 + (includes S. Juan, Sta. Clara, Pojuaque, Nambe, Tesugue, S. Ildefonso, + Haro). + + = T['e]wan, Powell in Am. Nat., 605, Aug., 1880 (makes five divisions: + 1. Tano (Isleta, Isleta near El Paso, Sandia); 2. Taos (Taos, Picuni); + 3. Jemes (Jemes); 4. Tewa or Tehua (San Ildefonso, San Juan, Pojoaque, + Nambe, Tesuque, Santa Clara, and one Moki pueblo); 5. Piro). + + > E-nagh-magh, Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 689, 1855 + (includes Taos, Vicuris, Zesuqua, Sandia, Ystete, and two pueblos near + El Paso, Texas). Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), + 479, 1878 (follows Lane, but identifies Texan pueblos with Lentis? and + Socorro?). + + > Picori, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 479, 1878 + (or Enaghmagh). + + = Stock of Rio Grande Pueblos, Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th + M., vii, 415, 1879. + + = Rio Grande Pueblo, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 258, 1882. + + +Derivation: Probably from "ta['i]nin," plural of t['a]-ide, "Indian," in +the dialect of Isleta and Sandia (Gatschet). + +In a letter[97] from Wm. Carr Lane to H. R. Schoolcraft, appear some +remarks on the affinities of the Pueblo languages, based in large part +on hearsay evidence. No vocabularies are given, nor does any real +classification appear to be attempted, though referring to such of his +remarks as apply in the present connection, Lane states that the Indians +of "Taos, Vicuris, Zesuqua, Sandia, and Ystete, and of two pueblos of +Texas, near El Paso, are said to speak the same language, which I have +heard called E-nagh-magh," and that the Indians of "San Juan, Santa +Clara, Pojuaque, Nambe, San Il de Conso, and one Moqui pueblo, all speak +the same language, as it is said: this I have heard called Tay-waugh." +The ambiguous nature of his reference to these pueblos is apparent from +the above quotation. + + [Footnote 97: Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, 1855, vol. 5, p. 689.] + +The names given by Lane as those he had "heard" applied to certain +groups of pueblos which "it is said" speak the same language, rest on +too slender a basis for serious consideration in a classificatory sense. + +Keane in the appendix to Stanford's Compendium (Central and South +America), 1878, p. 479, presents the list given by Lane, correcting his +spelling in some cases and adding the name of the Tusayan pueblo as Haro +(Hano). He gives the group no formal family name, though they are +classed together as speaking "Tegua or Tay-waugh." + +The Tano of Powell (1878), as quoted, appears to be the first name +formally given the family, and is therefore accepted. Recent +investigations of the dialect spoken at Taos and some of the other +pueblos of this group show a considerable body of words having +Shoshonean affinities, and it is by no means improbable that further +research will result in proving the radical relationship of these +languages to the Shoshonean family. The analysis of the language has not +yet, however, proceeded far enough to warrant a decided opinion. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The tribes of this family in the United States resided exclusively upon +the Rio Grande and its tributary valleys from about 33 deg. to about +36 deg. A small body of these people joined the Tusayan in northern +Arizona, as tradition avers to assist the latter against attacks by the +Apache--though it seems more probable that they fled from the Rio Grande +during the pueblo revolt of 1680--and remained to found the permanent +pueblo of Hano, the seventh pueblo of the group. A smaller section of +the family lived upon the Rio Grande in Mexico and Texas, just over the +New Mexico border. + + +_Population._--The following pueblos are included in the family, with a +total population of about 3,237: + + Hano (of the Tusayan group) 132 + Isleta (New Mexico) 1,059 + Isleta (Texas) few + Jemez 428 + Namb['e] 79 + Picuris 100 + Pojoaque 20 + Sandia 140 + San Ildefonso 148 + San Juan 406 + Santa Clara 225 + Senec['u] (below El Paso) few + Taos 409 + Tesuque 91 + + + + +TIMUQUANAN FAMILY. + + + = Timuquana, Smith in Hist. Magazine, II, 1, 1858 (a notice of the + language with vocabulary; distinctness of the language affirmed). + Brinton. Floridian Peninsula, 134, 1859 (spelled also Timuaca, + Timagoa, Timuqua). + + = Timucua, Gatschet in Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., XVI, April 6, 1877 (from + Cape Canaveral to mouth of St. John's River). Gatschet, Creek Mig. + Legend I, 11-13, 1884. Gatschet in Science, 413, April 29, 1887. + + = Atimuca, Gatschet in Science, ibid, (proper name). + + +Derivation: From ati-muca, "ruler," "master;" literally, "servants +attend upon him." + +In the Historical Magazine as above cited appears a notice of the +Timuquana language by Buckingham Smith, in which is affirmed its +distinctness upon the evidence of language. A short vocabulary is +appended, which was collated from the "Confessionario" by Padre Pareja, +1613. Brinton and Gatschet have studied the Timuquana language and have +agreed as to the distinctness of the family from any other of the United +States. Both the latter authorities are inclined to take the view that +it has affinities with the Carib family to the southward, and it seems +by no means improbable that ultimately the Timuquana language will be +considered an offshoot of the Carib linguistic stock. At the present +time, however, such a conclusion would not be justified by the evidence +gathered and published. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +It is impossible to assign definite limits to the area occupied by the +tribes of this family. From documentary testimony of the sixteenth and +seventeenth centuries the limits of the family domain appear to have +been about as follows: In general terms the present northern limits of +the State of Florida may be taken as the northern frontier, although +upon the Atlantic side Timuquanan territory may have extended into +Georgia. Upon the northwest the boundary line was formed in De Soto's +time by the Ocilla River. Lake Okeechobee on the south, or as it was +then called Lake Sarrape or Mayaimi, may be taken as the boundary +between the Timuquanan tribes proper and the Calusa province upon the +Gulf coast and the Tegesta province upon the Atlantic side. Nothing +whatever of the languages spoken in these two latter provinces is +available for comparison. A number of the local names of these provinces +given by Fontanedo (1559) have terminations similar to many of the +Timuquanan local names. This slender evidence is all that we have from +which to infer the Timuquanan relationship of the southern end of the +peninsula. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + +The following settlements appear upon the oldest map of the regions we +possess, that of De Bry (Narratio; Frankf. a. M. 15, 1590): + +(A) Shores of St. John's River, from mouth to sources: + + Patica. Utina. + Saturiwa. Patchica. + Atore. Chilili. + Homolua or Molua. Calanay. + Alimacani. Onochaquara. + Casti. Mayarca. + Malica. Mathiaca. + Melona. Maiera. + Timoga or Timucua. Mocoso. + Enecaqua. Cadica. + Choya. Eloquale. + Edelano (island). Aquonena. + Astina. + +(B) On a (fictitious) western tributary of St. John's River, from mouth + to source: + + Hicaranaou. + Appalou. + Oustaca. + Onathcaqua. + Potanou. + Ehiamana. + Anouala. + +(C) East Floridian coast, from south to north: + + Mocossou. + Oathcaqua. + Sorrochos. + Hanocoroucouay. + Marracou. + +(D) On coast north of St. John's River: + + Hiouacara. + +(E) The following are gathered from all other authorities, mostly from +the accounts of De Soto's expedition: + + Acquera. San Mateo (1688). + Aguile. Santa Lucia de Acuera + Basisa or Vacissa (SE. coast). + (1688). Tacatacuru. + Cholupaha. Tocaste. + Hapaluya. Tolemato. + Hirrihiqua. Topoqui. + Itafi Tucururu + (perhaps a province). (SE. coast) + Itara Ucita. + Machaua (1688). Urriparacuxi. + Napetuca. Yupaha + Osile (Oxille). (perhaps a province). + San Juan de Guacara + (1688). + + + + +TONIKAN FAMILY. + + + = Tunicas, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 115, 116, + 1836 (quotes Dr. Sibley, who states they speak a distinct language). + Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 341, 1850 (opposite mouth of Red River; quotes + Dr. Sibley as to distinctness of language). + + = Tonica, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 39, 1884 (brief account of + tribe). + + = Tonika, Gatschet in Science, 412, April 29, 1887 (distinctness as a + family asserted; the tribe calls itself T['u]ni[ch]ka). + + +Derivation: From the Tonika word ['o]ni, "man," "people;" t- is a prefix +or article; -ka, -[ch]ka a nominal suffix. + +The distinctness of the Tonika language, has long been suspected, and +was indeed distinctly stated by Dr. Sibley in 1806.[98] The statement to +this effect by Dr. Sibley was quoted by Gallatin in 1836, but as the +latter possessed no vocabulary of the language he made no attempt to +classify it. Latham also dismisses the language with the same quotation +from Sibley. Positive linguistic proof of the position of the language +was lacking until obtained by Mr. Gatschet in 1886, who declared it to +form a family by itself. + + [Footnote 98: President's message, February 19, 1806.] + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The Tonika are known to have occupied three localities: First, on the +Lower Yazoo River (1700); second, east shore of Mississippi River (about +1704); third, in Avoyelles Parish, Louisiana (1817). Near Marksville, +the county seat of that parish, about twenty-five are now living. + + + + +TONKAWAN FAMILY. + + + = Tonkawa, Gatschet, Zwoelf Sprachen aus dem Suedwesten Nordamerikas, + 76, 1876 (vocabulary of about 300 words and some sentences). Gatschet, + Die Sprache der Tonkawas, in Zeitschrift fuer Ethnologie, 64, 1877. + Gatschet (1876), in Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., XVI, 318, 1877. + + +Derivation: the full form is the Caddo or Wako term tonkaw['e]ya, "they +all stay together" (w['e]ya, "all"). + +After a careful examination of all the linguistic material available for +comparison, Mr. Gatschet has concluded that the language spoken by the +Tonkawa forms a distinct family. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The T['o]nkawa were a migratory people and a _colluvies gentium_, whose +earliest habitat is unknown. Their first mention occurs in 1719; at that +time and ever since they roamed in the western and southern parts of +what is now Texas. About 1847 they were engaged as scouts in the United +States Army, and from 1860-'62 (?) were in the Indian Territory; after +the secession war till 1884 they lived in temporary camps near Fort +Griffin, Shackelford County, Texas, and in October, 1884, they removed +to the Indian Territory (now on Oakland Reserve). In 1884 there were +seventy-eight individuals living; associated with them were nineteen +Lipan Apache, who had lived in their company for many years, though in a +separate camp. They have thirteen divisions (partly totem-clans) and +observe mother-right. + + + + +UCHEAN FAMILY. + + + = Uchees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II., 95, 1836 + (based upon the Uchees alone). Bancroft, Hist. U.S., III., 247, 1840. + Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc. II., pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Keane, + App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 472, 1878 (suggests that + the language may have been akin to Natchez). + + = Utchees, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II., 306, + 1836. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III., 401, 1853. Keane, + App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 472, 1878. + + = Utschies, Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. Ibid., 1852. + + = Uch['e], Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 338, 1850 (Coosa River). Latham in + Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., II., 31-50, 1846. Latham, Opuscula, 293, + 1860. + + = Yuchi, Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 17, 1884. Gatschet in + Science, 413, April 29, 1887. + + +The following is the account of this tribe given by Gallatin (probably +derived from Hawkins) in Archaeologia Americana, page 95: + + The original seats of the Uchees were east of Coosa and probably of + the Chatahoochee; and they consider themselves as the most ancient + inhabitants of the country. They may have been the same nation which + is called Apalaches in the accounts of De Soto's expedition, and + their towns were till lately principally on Flint River. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The pristine homes of the Yuchi are not now traceable with any degree of +certainty. The Yuchi are supposed to have been visited by De Soto during +his memorable march, and the town of Cofitachiqui chronicled by him, is +believed by many investigators to have stood at Silver Bluff, on the +left bank of the Savannah, about 25 miles below Augusta. If, as is +supposed by some authorities, Cofitachiqui was a Yuchi town, this would +locate the Yuchi in a section which, when first known to the whites, was +occupied by the Shawnee. Later the Yuchi appear to have lived somewhat +farther down the Savannah, on the eastern and also the western side, as +far as the Ogeechee River, and also upon tracts above and below Augusta, +Georgia. These tracts were claimed by them as late as 1736. + +In 1739 a portion of the Yuchi left their old seats and settled among +the Lower Creek on the Chatahoochee River; there they established three +colony villages in the neighborhood, and later on a Yuchi settlement is +mentioned on Lower Tallapoosa River, among the Upper Creek.[99] +Filson[100] gives a list of thirty Indian tribes and a statement +concerning Yuchi towns, which he must have obtained from a much earlier +source: "Uchees occupy four different places of residence--at the head +of St. John's, the fork of St. Mary's, the head of Cannouchee, and the +head of St. Tillis" (Satilla), etc.[101] + + [Footnote 99: Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, 21-22, 1884.] + + [Footnote 100: Discovery, etc., of Kentucky, 1793, II, 84-7.] + + [Footnote 101: Gatschet, Creek Mig. Legend, I, p. 20.] + + +_Population._--More than six hundred Yuchi reside in northeastern Indian +Territory, upon the Arkansas River, where they are usually classed as +Creek. Doubtless the latter are to some extent intermarried with them, +but the Yuchi are jealous of their name and tenacious of their position +as a tribe. + + + + +WAIILATPUAN. + + + = Waiilatpu, Hale, in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 199, 214, 569, 1846 + (includes Cailloux or Cayuse or Willetpoos, and Molele). Gallatin, + after Hale, in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 14, 56, 77, 1848 + (after Hale). Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Buschmann, + Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 628, 1859. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 565, + 1882 (Cayuse and Mollale). + + = Wailatpu, Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 + (Cayuse and Molele). + + X Sahaptin, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 323, 1850 (cited as including + Cay['u]s?). + + X Sahaptins, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 474, + 1878 (cited because it includes Cayuse and Mollale). + + = Molele, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 324, 1850 (includes Molele, Cayus?). + + > Cayus?, Latham, ibid. + + = Cayuse, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 166, 1877 (Cayuse and Mol['e]le). + Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 442, 1877. + + +Derivation: Way['i]letpu, plural form of Wa-['i]let, "one Cayuse man" +(Gatschet). + +Hale established this family and placed under it the Cailloux or Cayuse +or Willetpoos, and the Molele. Their headquarters as indicated by Hale +are the upper part of the Walla Walla River and the country about Mounts +Hood and Vancouver. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The Cayuse lived chiefly near the mouth of the Walla Walla River, +extending a short distance above and below on the Columbia, between the +Umatilla and Snake Rivers. The Mol['a]le were a mountain tribe and +occupied a belt of mountain country south of the Columbia River, chiefly +about Mounts Hood and Jefferson. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Cayuse. + Molale. + + +_Population._--There are 31 Molale now on the Grande Ronde Reservation, +Oregon,[102] and a few others live in the mountains west of Klamath +Lake. The Indian Affairs Report for 1888 credits 401 and the United +States Census Bulletin for 1890, 415 Cayuse Indians to the Umatilla +Reservation, but Mr. Henshaw was able to find only six old men and women +upon the reservation in August, 1888, who spoke their own language. The +others, though presumably of Cayuse blood, speak the Umatilla tongue. + + [Footnote 102: U.S. Ind. Aff., 1889.] + + + + +WAKASHAN FAMILY. + + + > Wakash, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 15, 306, + 1836 (of Nootka Sound; gives Jewitt's vocab.). Gallatin in Trans. Am. + Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (based on Newittee). Berghaus (1851), + Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, + III, 402, 1853 (includes Newittee and Nootka Sound). Latham in Trans. + Philolog. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856 (of Quadra and Vancouver's Island). + Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 403, 1862 + (Tlaoquatsh and Wakash proper; Nutka and congeners also referred + here). + + X Wakash, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 301. 1850 (includes Naspatle, proper + Nutkans, Tlaoquatsh, Nittenat, Klasset, Klallems; the last named is + Salishan). + + X Nootka-Columbian, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., XI, 221, 1841 + (includes Quadra and Vancouver Island, Haeeltzuk, Billechoola, + Tlaoquatch, Kawitchen, Noosdalum, Squallyamish, Cheenooks). Prichard, + Phys. Hist. Mankind, V, 435, 1847 (follows Scouler). Latham in Jour. + Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 162, 1848 (remarks upon Scouler's group of this + name). Latham, Opuscula, 257, 1860 (the same). + + < Nootka, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 220, 569, 1846 (proposes family + to include tribes of Vancouver Island and tribes on south side of Fuca + Strait). + + > Nutka, Buschmann, Neu-Mexico, 329, 1858. + + > Nootka, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (mentions only Makah, + and Classet tribes of Cape Flattery). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., + 446. 1877. + + X Nootkahs, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 473, + 1878 (includes Muchlahts, Nitinahts, Ohyahts, Manosahts, and + Quoquoulths of present family, together with a number of Salishan + tribes). + + X Nootka, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 607, 1882 (a heterogeneous + group, largely Salishan, with Wakashan, Skittagetan, and other + families represented). + + > Straits of Fuca, Gallatin in Trans. and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, + 134, 306, 1836 (vocabulary of, referred here with doubt; considered + distinct by Gallatin). + + X Southern, Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., XI, 224, 1841 (same as + his Noctka-Columbian above). + + X Insular, Scouler ibid. (same as his Nootka-Columbian above). + + X Haeltzuk, Latham in Jour. Eth. Soc. Lond., I, 155, 1848 (cities + Tolmie's vocab. Spoken from 50 deg. 30' to 53 deg. 30' N.L.). Latham, + Opuscula, 251, 1860 (the same). + + > Haeeltsuk and Hailtsa, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 300, 1850 (includes + Hyshalla, Hyhysh, Esleytuk, Weekenoch, Nalatsenoch, Quagheuil, + Tlatla-Shequilla, Lequeeltoch). + + > Hailtsa, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 72, 1856. Buschmann, + Neu-Mexico, 322, 1858. Latham, Opuscula, 339, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. + Phil., 401, 1862 (includes coast dialects between Hawkesbury Island, + Broughton's Archipelago, and northern part of Vancouver Island). + + > Ha-eelb-zuk, Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 487, 1855. Kane, Wand. of + an Artist, app., 1859 (or Ballabola; a census of N.W. tribes + classified by language). + + > Ha-ilt[']-z[vu]kh, Dall, after Gibbs, in Cont. N.A. Eth., I, 144, 1877 + (vocabularies of Bel-bella of Milbank Sound and of Kw['a]ki[-u]tl'). + + < Nass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt 1, c, 1848. + + < Naass, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 + (includes Hailstla, Haceltzuk, Billechola, Chimeysan). Gallatin in + Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (includes Huitsla). + + X Nass, Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, 564, 606, 1882 (includes Hailtza of + present family). + + > Aht, Sproat, Savage Life, app., 312, 1868 (name suggested for family + instead of Nootka-Columbian). + + > Aht, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 50, 1884 (vocab. of + Kaiookw[-a]ht). + + X Puget Sound Group, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), + 460, 474, 1878. + + X Hydahs, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 473, 1878 + (includes Hailtzas of the present family). + + > Kwakiool, Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 27-48, 1884 (vocabs. of + Haishilla, Hailtzuk, Kwiha, Likwiltoh, Septs; also map showing family + domain). + + > Kw[-a][']ki[-u][t_][l_] [Kwakiutl], Boas in Petermann's Mitteilungen, + 130, 1887 (general account of family with list of tribes). + + +Derivation: Waukash, waukash, is the Nootka word "good" "good." When +heard by Cook at Friendly Cove, Nootka Sound, it was supposed to be the +name of the tribe. + +Until recently the languages spoken by the Aht of the west coast of +Vancouver Island and the Makah of Cape Flattery, congeneric tribes, and +the Haeltzuk and Kwakiutl peoples of the east coast of Vancouver Island +and the opposite mainland of British Columbia, have been regarded as +representing two distinct families. Recently Dr. Boas has made an +extended study of these languages, has collected excellent vocabularies +of the supposed families, and as a result of his study it is now +possible to unite them on the basis of radical affinity. The main body +of the vocabularies of the two languages is remarkably distinct, though +a considerable number of important words are shown to be common to the +two. + +Dr. Boas, however, points out that in both languages suffixes only are +used in forming words, and a long list of these shows remarkable +similarity. + +The above family name was based upon a vocabulary of the Wakash Indians, +who, according to Gallatin, "inhabit the island on which Nootka Sound is +situated." The short vocabulary given was collected by Jewitt. Gallatin +states[103] that this language is the one "in that quarter, which, by +various vocabularies, is best known to us." In 1848[104] Gallatin +repeats his Wakash family, and again gives the vocabulary of Jewitt. +There would thus seem to be no doubt of his intention to give it formal +rank as a family. + + [Footnote 103: Archaeologia Americana, II, p. 15.] + + [Footnote 104: Trans. Am. Eth. Soc. II, p. 77.] + +The term "Wakash" for this group of languages has since been generally +ignored, and in its place Nootka or Nootka-Columbian has been adopted. +"Nootka-Columbian" was employed by Scouler in 1841 for a group of +languages, extending from the mouth of Salmon River to the south of the +Columbia River, now known to belong to several distinct families. +"Nootka family" was also employed by Hale[105] in 1846, who proposed the +name for the tribes of Vancouver Island and those along the south side +of the Straits of Fuca. + + [Footnote 105: U.S. Expl. Expd., vol. 6, p. 220.] + +The term "Nootka-Columbian" is strongly condemned by Sproat.[106] For +the group of related tribes on the west side of Vancouver Island this +author suggests Aht, "house, tribe, people," as a much more appropriate +family appellation. + + [Footnote 106: Savage Life, 312.] + +Though by no means as appropriate a designation as could be found, it +seems clear that for the so-called Wakash, Newittee, and other allied +languages usually assembled under the Nootka family, the term Wakash of +1836 has priority and must be retained. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The tribes of the Aht division of this family are confined chiefly to +the west coast of Vancouver Island. They range to the north as far as +Cape Cook, the northern side of that cape being occupied by Haeltzuk +tribes, as was ascertained by Dr. Boas in 1886. On the south they +reached to a little above Sooke Inlet, that inlet being in possession of +the Soke, a Salishan tribe. + +The neighborhood of Cape Flattery, Washington, is occupied by the Makah, +one of the Wakashan tribes, who probably wrested this outpost of the +family from the Salish (Clallam) who next adjoin them on Puget Sound. + +The boundaries of the Haeltzuk division of this family are laid down +nearly as they appear on Tolmie and Dawson's linguistic map of 1884. The +west side of King Island and Cascade Inlet are said by Dr. Boas to be +inhabited by Haeltzuk tribes, and are colored accordingly. + + +PRINCIPAL AHT TRIBES. + + Ahowsaht. Mowachat. + Ayhuttisaht. Muclaht. + Chicklesaht. Nitinaht. + Clahoquaht. Nuchalaht. + Hishquayquaht. Ohiaht. + Howchuklisaht. Opechisaht. + Kitsmaht. Pachenaht. + Kyoquaht. Seshaht. + Macaw. Toquaht. + Manosaht. Yuclulaht. + + +_Population._--There are 457 Makah at the Neah Bay Agency, +Washington.[107] The total population of the tribes of this family under +the West Coast Agency, British Columbia, is 3,160.[108] The grand total +for this division of the family is thus 3,617. + + [Footnote 107: U.S. Census Bulletin for 1890.] + + [Footnote 108: Canada Ind. Aff. Rep. for 1888.] + + +PRINCIPAL HAELTZUK TRIBES. + + Aquamish. Likwiltoh. + Belbellah. Mamaleilakitish. + Clowetsus. Matelpa. + Hailtzuk. Nakwahtoh. + Haishilla. Nawiti. + Kakamatsis. Nimkish. + Keimanoeitoh. Quatsino. + Kwakiutl. Tsawadinoh. + Kwashilla. + + +_Population._--There are 1,898 of the Haeltzuk division of the family +under the Kwawkewlth Agency, British Columbia. Of the Bellacoola +(Salishan family) and Haeltzuk, of the present family, there are 2,500 +who are not under agents. No separate census of the latter exists at +present. + + + + +WASHOAN FAMILY. + + + = Washo, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 255, April, 1882. + + < Shoshone, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 477, + 1878 (contains Washoes). + + < Snake, Keane, ibid. (Same as Shoshone, above.) + + +This family is represented by a single well known tribe, whose range +extended from Reno, on the line of the Central Pacific Railroad, to the +lower end of the Carson Valley. + +On the basis of vocabularies obtained by Stephen Powers and other +investigators, Mr. Gatschet was the first to formally separate the +language. The neighborhood of Carson is now the chief seat of the tribe, +and here and in the neighboring valleys there are about 200 living a +parasitic life about the ranches and towns. + + + + +WEITSPEKAN FAMILY. + + + = Weits-pek, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (a band + and language on Klamath at junction of Trinity). Latham, El. Comp. + Phil., 410, 1862 (junction of Klamath and Trinity Rivers). Gatschet in + Mag. Am. Hist., 163, 1877 (affirmed to be distinct from any + neighboring tongue). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 438, 1877. + + < Weitspek, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 77, 1856 (junction + of Klamath and Trinity Rivers; Weyot and Wishosk dialects). Latham, + Opuscula, 343, 1860. + + = Eurocs, Powers in Overland Monthly, VII, 530, June, 1872 (of the + Lower Klamath and coastwise; Weitspek, a village of). + + = Eurok, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 163, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, + Ind. Misc., 437, 1877. + + = Yu[']-rok, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 45, 1877 (from junction of + Trinity to mouth and coastwise). Powell, ibid., 460 (vocabs. of + Al-i-kwa, Klamath, Yu[']-rok.) + + X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 + (Eurocs belong here). + + +Derivation: Weitspek is the name of a tribe or village of the family +situated on Klamath River. The etymology is unknown. + +Gibbs was the first to employ this name, which he did in 1853, as above +cited. He states that it is "the name of the principal band on the +Klamath, at the junction of the Trinity," adding that "this language +prevails from a few miles above that point to the coast, but does not +extend far from the river on either side." It would thus seem clear that +in this case, as in several others, he selected the name of a band to +apply to the language spoken by it. The language thus defined has been +accepted as distinct by later authorities except Latham, who included as +dialects under the Weitspek language, the locality of which he gives as +the junction of the Klamath and Trinity Rivers, the Weyot and Wishosk, +both of which are now classed under the Wishoskan family. + +By the Karok these tribes are called Yurok, "down" or "below," by which +name the family has recently been known. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +For our knowledge of the range of the tribes of this family we are +chiefly indebted to Stephen Powers.[109] The tribes occupy the lower +Klamath River, Oregon, from the mouth of the Trinity down. Upon the +coast, Weitspekan territory extends from Gold Bluff to about 6 miles +above the mouth of the Klamath. The Chill['u]la are an offshoot of the +Weitspek, living to the south of them, along Redwood Creek to a point +about 20 miles inland, and from Gold Bluff to a point about midway +between Little and Mad Rivers. + + [Footnote 109: Cont. N.A. Eth., 1877, vol. 3, p. 44.] + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Chill['u]la, Redwood Creek. + Mita, Klamath River. + Pekwan, Klamath River. + Rikwa, Regua, fishing village at outlet of Klamath River. + Sugon, Shragoin, Klamath River. + Weitspek, Klamath River (above Big Bend). + + + + +WISHOSKAN FAMILY. + + + > Wish-osk, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (given + as the name of a dialect on Mad River and Humboldt Bay). + + = Wish-osk, Powell in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 478, 1877 (vocabularies of + Wish-osk, Wi-yot, and Ko-wilth). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 162, 1877 + (indicates area occupied by family). Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., + 437, 1877. + + > Wee-yot, Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 422, 1853 (given as + the name of a dialect on Eel River and Humboldt Bay). + + X Weitspek, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 77, 1856 (includes + Weyot and Wishosk). Latham, Opuscula, 343, 1860. + + < Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 + (cited as including Patawats, Weeyots, Wishosks). + + +Derivation: Wish-osk is the name given to the Bay and Mad River Indians +by those of Eel River. + +This is a small and obscure linguistic family and little is known +concerning the dialects composing it or of the tribes which speak it. + +Gibbs[110] mentions Wee-yot and Wish-osk as dialects of a general +language extending "from Cape Mendocino to Mad River and as far back +into the interior as the foot of the first range of mountains," but does +not distinguish the language by a family name. + + [Footnote 110: Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1853, vol. 3, p. 422.] + +Latham considered Weyot and Wishosk to be mere dialects of the same +language, i.e., the Weitspek, from which, however, they appeared to him +to differ much more than they do from each other. Both Powell and +Gatschet have treated the language represented by these dialects as +quite distinct from any other, and both have employed the same name. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The area occupied by the tribes speaking dialects of this language was +the coast from a little below the mouth of Eel River to a little north +of Mad River, including particularly the country about Humboldt Bay. +They also extended up the above-named rivers into the mountain passes. + + +TRIBES. + + Patawat, Lower Mad River and Humboldt Bay as far south as Arcata. + Weeyot, mouth of Eel River. + Wishosk, near mouth of Mad River and north part of Humboldt Bay. + + + + +YAKONAN FAMILY. + + + > Yakones, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 198, 218, 1846 (or Iakon, + coast of Oregon). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 612, 1859. + + > Iakon, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (or Lower + Killamuks). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 612, 1859. + + > Jacon, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 77, 1848. + + > Jakon, Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, pt. 1, 17, 1848. + Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. Gallatin in Schoolcraft, + Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (language of Lower Killamuks). Latham in + Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 78, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 340, 1860. + + > Yakon, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 324, 1850. Gatschet, in Mag. Am. + Hist., 166, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 441, 1877. Bancroft, + Nat. Races, III, 565, 640, 1882. + + > Y['a]kona, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 256, 1882. + + > Southern Killamuks, Hale in U.S. Expl. Exp., VI, 218, 569, 1846 (or + Yakones). Gallatin in Trans. Am. Eth. Soc., II, 17, 1848 (after Hale). + + > Sued Killamuk, Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. + + > Sainstskla, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 ("south of the Yakon, + between the Umkwa and the sea"). + + > Say['u]skla, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 257, 1882 (on Lower Umpqua, + Say['u]skla, and Smith Rivers). + + > Killiwashat, Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 325, 1850 ("mouth of the + Umkwa"). + + X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 + (cited as including Yacons). + + +Derivation: From yakwina, signifying "spirit" (Everette). + +The Yakwina was the leading tribe of this family. It must have been of +importance in early days, as it occupied fifty-six villages along +Yaquina River, from the site of Elk City down to the ocean. Only a few +survive, and they are with the Alsea on the Siletz Reservation, +Tillamook County, Oregon. They were classed by mistake with the +Tillamook or "Killamucks" by Lewis and Clarke. They are called by Lewis +and Clarke[111] Youikcones and Youkone.[112] + + [Footnote 111: Allen, ed. 1814, vol. 2, p. 473.] + + [Footnote 112: Ibid., p. 118.] + +The Alsea formerly dwelt in villages along both sides of Alsea River, +Oregon, and on the adjacent coast. They are now on the Siletz +Reservation, Oregon. Perhaps a few are on the Grande Ronde Reservation, +Oregon. + +The Siuslaw used to inhabit villages on the Siuslaw River, Oregon. There +may be a few pure Siuslaw on the Siletz Reservation, but Mr. Dorsey did +not see any of them. They are mentioned by Drew,[113] who includes them +among the "Kat-la-wot-sett" bands. At that time, they were still on the +Siuslaw River. The Ku-itc or Lower Umpqua villages were on both sides of +the lower part of Umpqua River, Oregon, from its mouth upward for about +30 miles. Above them were the Upper Umpqua villages, of the Athapascan +stock. A few members of the Ku-itc still reside on the Siletz +Reservation, Oregon. + + [Footnote 113: U.S. Ind. Aff. Rept., 1857, p. 359.] + +This is a family based by Hale upon a single tribe, numbering six or +seven hundred, who live on the coast, north of the Nsietshawus, from +whom they differ merely in language. Hale calls the tribe Iakon or +Yakones or Southern Killamuks. + +The Say['u]sklan language has usually been assumed to be distinct from +all others, and the comments of Latham and others all tend in this +direction. Mr. Gatschet, as above quoted, finally classed it as a +distinct stock, at the same time finding certain strong coincidences +with the Yakonan family. Recently Mr. Dorsey has collected extensive +vocabularies of the Yakonan, Sayuskla, and Lower Umpqua languages and +finds unquestioned evidence of relationship. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The family consists of four primary divisions or tribes: Yakwina, Alsea, +Siuslaw, and Ku-itc or Lower Umpqua. Each one of these comprised many +villages, which were stretched along the western part of Oregon on the +rivers flowing into the Pacific, from the Yaquina on the north down to +and including the Umpqua River. + + +TRIBES. + + Alsea (on Alseya River). + Yakw[vi][']na. + Kuitc. + Siuslaw. + + +_Population._--The U.S. Census Bulletin for 1890 mentions thirty-one +tribes as resident on the Siletz Reservation with a combined population +of 571. How many Yakwina are among this number is not known. The +breaking down of tribal distinctions by reason of the extensive +intermarriage of the several tribes is given as the reason for the +failure to give a census by tribes. + + + + +YANAN FAMILY. + + + = N['o]-zi, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 275, 1877 (or No-si; + mention of tribe; gives numerals and states they are different from + any he has found in California). + + = Noces, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 160, March, 1877 (or Nozes; + merely mentioned under Meidoo family). + + +Derivation: Yana means "people" in the Yanan language. + +In 1880 Powell collected a short vocabulary from this tribe, which is +chiefly known to the settlers by the name Noje or Nozi. Judged by this +vocabulary the language seemed to be distinct from any other. More +recently, in 1884, Mr. Curtin visited the remnants of the tribe, +consisting of thirty-five individuals, and obtained an extensive +collection of words, the study of which seems to confirm the impression +of the isolated position of the language as regards other American +tongues. + +The Nozi seem to have been a small tribe ever since known to Europeans. +They have a tradition to the effect that they came to California from +the far East. Powers states that they differ markedly in physical traits +from all California tribes met by him. At present the Nozi are reduced +to two little groups, one at Redding, the other in their original +country at Round Mountain, California. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The eastern boundary of the Yanan territory is formed by a range of +mountains a little west of Lassen Butte and terminating near Pit River; +the northern boundary by a line running from northeast to southwest, +passing near the northern side of Round Mountain, 3 miles from Pit +River. The western boundary from Redding southward is on an average 10 +miles to the east of the Sacramento. North of Redding it averages double +that distance or about 20 miles. + + + + +YUKIAN FAMILY. + + + = Yuki, Powers in Cont. N.A. Eth., III, 125-138, 1877 (general + description of tribe). + + = Y['u]-ki, Powell in ibid., 483 (vocabs. of Y['u]-ki, H[-u]chnp[-o]m, + and a fourth unnamed vocabulary). + + = Yuka, Powers in Overland Monthly, IX, 305, Oct., 1872 (same as + above). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 161, 1877 (defines habitat of + family; gives Yuka, Ashochemies or Wappos, Shumeias, Tahtoos). + Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 435, 1877. Bancroft, Nat. Races, III, + 566, 1882 (includes Yuka, Tahtoo, Wapo or Ashochemic). + + = Uka, Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 161, 1877. Gatschet in Beach, Ind. + Misc., 435, 1877 (same as his Yuka). + + X Klamath, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 475, 1878 + (Yukas of his Klamath belong here). + + +Derivation: From the Wintun word yuki, meaning "stranger;" secondarily, +"bad" or "thieving." + +A vocabulary of the Yuki tribe is given by Gibbs in vol. III of +Schoolcraft's Indian Tribes, 1853, but no indication is afforded that +the language is of a distinct stock. + +Powell, as above cited, appears to have been the first to separate the +language. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +Round Valley, California, subsequently made a reservation to receive the +Yuki and other tribes, was formerly the chief seat of the tribes of the +family, but they also extended across the mountains to the coast. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Ashochimi (near Healdsburgh). + Chumaya (Middle Eel River). + Napa (upper Napa Valley). + Tatu (Potter Valley). + Yuki (Round Valley, California). + + + + +YUMAN FAMILY. + + + > Yuma, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 94, 101, 1856 + (includes Cuchan, Coco-Maricopa, Mojave, Diegeno). Latham in Trans. + Philolog. Soc. Lond., 86, 1856. Latham, Opuscula, 351, 1860 (as + above). Latham in addenda to Opuscula, 392, 1860 (adds Cuchan to the + group). Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 420, 1862 (includes Cuchan, + Cocomaricopa, Mojave, Dieguno). Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 156, 1877 + (mentions only U.S. members of family). Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. + (Cent. and So. Am.), 460, 479, 1878 (includes Yumas, Maricopas, + Cuchans, Mojaves, Yampais, Yavipais, Hualpais). Bancroft, Nat. Races, + III, 569, 1882. + + = Yuma, Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Misc., 429, 1877 (habitat and dialects + of family). Gatschet in U.S. Geog. Surv. W. 100th M., VII, 413, 414, + 1879. + + > Dieguno, Latham (1853) in Proc. Philolog. Soc. Lond., VI, 75, 1854 + (includes mission of San Diego, Dieguno, Cocomaricopas, Cuchan, Yumas, + Amaquaquas.) + + > Cochimi, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 87, 1856 (northern + part peninsula California). Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 471, + 1859 (center of California peninsula). Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. + Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 423, 1862. Orozco y Berra, Geografia de las + Lenguas de Mexico, map, 1864. Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and + So. Am.), 476, 1878 (head of Gulf to near Loreto). + + > Layamon, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 88, 1856 (a dialect + of Waikur?). Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., + 423, 1862. + + > Waikur, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 90, 1856 (several + dialects of). Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. Latham, El. Comp. Phil., + 423, 1862. + + > Guaycura, Orozco y Berra, Geografia de las Lenguas de Mexico, map, + 1864. + + > Guaicuri, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent. and So. Am.), 476, + 1878 (between 26th and 23d parallels). + + > Ushiti, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 88, 1856 (perhaps a + dialect of Waikur). Latham, Opuscula, 353, 1860. + + > Utshiti, Latham, El. Comp. Phil., 423, 1862 (same as Ushiti). + + > Pericu, Latham in Trans. Philolog. Soc. Lond., 88, 1856. Latham, + Opuscula, 353, 1860. Orozco y Berra, Geografia de las Lenguas de + Mexico, map, 1864. + + > Pericui, Keane, App. Stanford's Comp. (Cent, and So. Am.), 476, 1878 + (from 23 deg. N.L. to Cape S. Lucas and islands). + + > Seri, Gatschet in Zeitschr. fuer Ethnologie, XV, 129, 1883, and + XVIII, 115, 1886. + + +Derivation: A Cuchan word signifying "sons of the river" (Whipple). + +In 1856 Turner adopted Yuma as a family name, and placed under it +Cuchan, Coco-Maricopa, Mojave and Diegeno. + +Three years previously (1853) Latham[114] speaks of the Dieguno +language, and discusses with it several others, viz, San Diego, +Cocomaricopa, Cuohan, Yuma, Amaquaqua (Mohave), etc. Though he seems to +consider these languages as allied, he gives no indication that he +believes them to collectively represent a family, and he made no formal +family division. The context is not, however, sufficiently clear to +render his position with respect to their exact status as precise as is +to be desired, but it is tolerably certain that he did not mean to make +Diegueno a family name, for in the volume of the same society for 1856 +he includes both the Diegueno and the other above mentioned tribes in +the Yuma family, which is here fully set forth. As he makes no allusion +to having previously established a family name for the same group of +languages, it seems pretty certain that he did not do so, and that the +term Diegueno as a family name may be eliminated from consideration. It +thus appears that the family name Yuma was proposed by both the above +authors during the same year. For, though part 3 of vol. III of Pacific +Railroad Reports, in which Turner's article is published, is dated 1855, +it appears from a foot-note (p. 84) that his paper was not handed to Mr. +Whipple till January, 1856, the date of title page of volume, and that +his proof was going through the press during the month of May, which is +the month (May 9) that Latham's paper was read before the Philological +Society. The fact that Latham's article was not read until May 9 enables +us to establish priority of publication in favor of Turner with a +reasonable degree of certainty, as doubtless a considerable period +elapsed between the presentation of Latham's paper to the society and +its final publication, upon which latter must rest its claim. The Yuma +of Turner is therefore adopted as of precise date and of undoubted +application. Pimentel makes Yuma a part of Piman stock. + + [Footnote 114: Proc. London Philol. Soc., vol. 6, 75, 1854.] + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The center of distribution of the tribes of this family is generally +considered to be the lower Colorado and Gila Valleys. At least this is +the region where they attained their highest physical and mental +development. With the exception of certain small areas possessed by +Shoshonean tribes, Indians of Yuman stock occupied the Colorado River +from its mouth as far up as Cataract Creek where dwell the Havasupai. +Upon the Gila and its tributaries they extended as far east as the Tonto +Basin. From this center they extended west to the Pacific and on the +south throughout the peninsula of Lower California. The mission of San +Luis Rey in California was, when established, in Yuman territory, and +marks the northern limit of the family. More recently and at the present +time this locality is in possession of Shoshonean tribes. + +The island of Angel de la Guardia and Tiburon Island were occupied by +tribes of the Yuman family, as also was a small section of Mexico lying +on the gulf to the north of Guaymas. + + +PRINCIPAL TRIBES. + + Cochimi. + Cocopa. + Cuchan or Yuma proper. + Diegueno. + Havasupai. + Maricopa. + Mohave. + Seri. + Waicuru. + Walapai. + + +_Population._--The present population of these tribes, as given in +Indian Affairs Report for 1889, and the U.S. Census Bulletin for 1890, +is as follows: + +Of the Yuma proper there are 997 in California attached to the Mission +Agency and 291 at the San Carlos Agency in Arizona. + +Mohave, 640 at the Colorado River Agency in Arizona; 791 under the San +Carlos Agency; 400 in Arizona not under an agency. + +Havasupai, 214 in Cosnino Canon, Arizona. + +Walapai, 728 in Arizona, chiefly along the Colorado. + +Diegueno, 555 under the Mission Agency, California. + +Maricopa, 315 at the Pima Agency, Arizona. + +The population of the Yuman tribes in Mexico and Lower California is +unknown. + + + + +ZUNIAN FAMILY. + + + = Zuni, Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., III, pt. 3, 55, 91-93, 1856 (finds + no radical affinity between Zuni and Keres). Buschmann, Neu-Mexico, + 254, 266, 276-278, 280-296, 302, 1858 (vocabs. and general + references). Keane, App. Stanford's Com. (Cent. and So. Am.), 479, + 1878 ("a stock language"). Powell in Rocky Mountain Presbyterian, + Nov., 1878 (includes Zuni, Las Nutrias, Ojo de Pescado). Gatschet in + Mag. Am. Hist., 260, 1882. + + = Zunian, Powell in Am. Nat., 604, August, 1880. + + +Derivation: From the Cochit['i] term Suinyi, said to mean "the people of +the long nails," referring to the surgeons of Zuni who always wear some +of their nails very long (Cushing). + +Turner was able to compare the Zuni language with the Keran, and his +conclusion that they were entirely distinct has been fully +substantiated. Turner had vocabularies collected by Lieut. Simpson and +by Capt. Eaton, and also one collected by Lieut. Whipple. + +The small amount of linguistic material accessible to the earlier +writers accounts for the little done in the way of classifying the +Pueblo languages. Latham possessed vocabularies of the Moqui, Zuni, +A[']coma or Laguna, Jemez, Tesuque, and Taos or Picuri. The affinity of +the Tusayan (Moqui) tongue with the Comanche and other Shoshonean +languages early attracted attention, and Latham pointed it out with some +particularity. With the other Pueblo languages he does little, and +attempts no classification into stocks. + + +GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. + +The Zuni occupy but a single permanent pueblo, on the Zuni River, +western New Mexico. Recently, however, the summer villages of +T[^a]iakwin, Heshotats['i]na, and K'iapkwainakwin have been occupied +by a few families during the entire year. + + +_Population._--The present population is 1,613. + + + * * * * * + + + CONCLUDING REMARKS. + + +The task involved in the foregoing classification has been accomplished +by intermittent labors extending through more than twenty years of time. +Many thousand printed vocabularies, embracing numerous larger lexic and +grammatic works, have been studied and compared. In addition to the +printed material, a very large body of manuscript matter has been used, +which is now in the archives of the Bureau of Ethnology, and which, it +is hoped, will ultimately be published. The author does not desire that +his work shall be considered final, but rather as initiatory and +tentative. The task of studying many hundreds of languages and deriving +therefrom ultimate conclusions as contributions to the science of +philology is one of great magnitude, and in its accomplishment an army +of scholars must be employed. The wealth of this promised harvest +appeals strongly to the scholars of America for systematic and patient +labor. The languages are many and greatly diverse in their +characteristics, in grammatic as well as in lexic elements. The author +believes it is safe to affirm that the philosophy of language is some +time to be greatly enriched from this source. From the materials which +have been and may be gathered in this field the evolution of language +can be studied from an early form, wherein words are usually not parts +of speech, to a form where the parts of speech are somewhat +differentiated; and where the growth of gender, number, and case +systems, together with the development of tense and mode systems can be +observed. The evolution of mind in the endeavor to express thought, by +coining, combining, and contracting words and by organizing logical +sentences through the development of parts of speech and their syntactic +arrangement, is abundantly illustrated. The languages are very unequally +developed in their several parts. Low gender systems appear with high +tense systems, highly evolved case systems with slightly developed mode +systems; and there is scarcely any one of these languages, so far as +they have been studied, which does not exhibit archaic devices in its +grammar. + +The author has delayed the present publication somewhat, expecting to +supplement it with another paper on the characteristics of those +languages which have been most fully recorded, but such supplementary +paper has already grown too large for this place and is yet unfinished, +while the necessity for speedy publication of the present results seems +to be imperative. The needs of the Bureau of Ethnology, in directing the +work of the linguists employed in it, and especially in securing and +organizing the labor of a large body of collaborators throughout the +country, call for this publication at the present time. + +In arranging the scheme of linguistic families the author has proceeded +very conservatively. Again and again languages have been thrown together +as constituting one family and afterwards have been separated, while +other languages at first deemed unrelated have ultimately been combined +in one stock. Notwithstanding all this care, there remain a number of +doubtful cases. For example, Buschmann has thrown the Shoshonean and +Nahuatlan families into one. Now the Shoshonean languages are those best +known to the author, and with some of them he has a tolerable speaking +acquaintance. The evidence brought forward by Buschmann and others seems +to be doubtful. A part is derived from jargon words, another part from +adventitious similarities, while some facts seem to give warrant to the +conclusion that they should be considered as one stock, but the author +prefers, under the present state of knowledge, to hold them apart and +await further evidence, being inclined to the opinion that the peoples +speaking these languages have borrowed some part of their vocabularies +from one another. + +After considering the subject with such materials as are on hand, this +general conclusion has been reached: That borrowed materials exist in +all the languages; and that some of these borrowed materials can be +traced to original sources, while the larger part of such acquisitions +can not be thus relegated to known families. In fact, it is believed +that the existing languages, great in number though they are, give +evidence of a more primitive condition, when a far greater number were +spoken. When there are two or more languages of the same stock, it +appears that this differentiation into diverse tongues is due mainly to +the absorption of other material, and that thus the multiplication of +dialects and languages of the same group furnishes evidence that at some +prior time there existed other languages which are now lost except as +they are partially preserved in the divergent elements of the group. The +conclusion which has been reached, therefore, does not accord with the +hypothesis upon which the investigation began, namely, that common +elements would be discovered in all these languages, for the longer the +study has proceeded the more clear it has been made to appear that the +grand process of linguistic development among the tribes of North +America has been toward unification rather than toward multiplication, +that is, that the multiplied languages of the same stock owe their +origin very largely to absorbed languages that are lost. The data upon +which this conclusion has been reached can not here be set forth, but +the hope is entertained that the facts already collected may ultimately +be marshaled in such a manner that philologists will be able to weigh +the evidence and estimate it for what it may be worth. + +The opinion that the differentiation of languages within a single stock +is mainly due to the absorption of materials from other stocks, often to +the extinguishment of the latter, has grown from year to year as the +investigation has proceeded. Wherever the material has been sufficient +to warrant a conclusion on this subject, no language has been found to +be simple in its origin, but every language has been found to be +composed of diverse elements. The processes of borrowing known in +historic times are those which have been at work in prehistoric times, +and it is not probable that any simple language derived from some single +pristine group of roots can be discovered. + +There is an opinion current that the lower languages change with great +rapidity, and that, by reason of this, dialects and languages of the +same stock are speedily differentiated. This widely spread opinion does +not find warrant in the facts discovered in the course of this research. +The author has everywhere been impressed with the fact that savage +tongues are singularly persistent, and that a language which is +dependent for its existence upon oral tradition is not easily modified. +The same words in the same form are repeated from generation to +generation, so that lexic and grammatic elements have a life that +changes very slowly. This is especially true where the habitat of the +tribe is unchanged. Migration introduces a potent agency of mutation, +but a new environment impresses its characteristics upon a language more +by a change in the semantic content or meaning of words than by change +in their forms. There is another agency of change of profound influence, +namely, association with other tongues. When peoples are absorbed by +peaceful or militant agencies new materials are brought into their +language, and the affiliation of such matter seems to be the chief +factor in the differentiation of languages within the same stock. In +the presence of opinions that have slowly grown in this direction, the +author is inclined to think that some of the groups herein recognized as +families will ultimately be divided, as the common materials of such +languages, when they are more thoroughly studied, will be seen to have +been borrowed. + +In the studies which have been made as preliminary to this paper, I have +had great assistance from Mr. James C. Pilling and Mr. Henry W. Henshaw. +Mr. Pilling began by preparing a list of papers used by me, but his work +has developed until it assumes the proportions of a great bibliographic +research, and already he has published five bibliographies, amounting in +all to about 1,200 pages. He is publishing this bibliographic material +by linguistic families, as classified by myself in this paper. Scholars +in this field of research will find their labors greatly abridged by the +work of Mr. Pilling. Mr. Henshaw began the preparation of the list of +tribes, but his work also has developed into an elaborate system of +research into the synonymy of the North American tribes, and when his +work is published it will constitute a great and valuable contribution +to the subject. The present paper is but a preface to the works of Mr. +Pilling and Mr. Henshaw, and would have been published in form as such +had not their publications assumed such proportions as to preclude it. +And finally, it is needful to say that I could not have found the time +to make this classification, imperfect as it is, except with the aid of +the great labors of the gentlemen mentioned, for they have gathered the +literature and brought it ready to my hand. For the classification +itself, however, I am wholly responsible. + +I am also indebted to Mr. Albert S. Gatschet and Mr. J. Owen Dorsey for +the preparation of many comparative lists necessary to my work. + +The task of preparing the map accompanying this paper was greatly +facilitated by the previously published map of Gallatin. I am especially +indebted to Col. Garrick Mallery for work done in the early part of its +preparation in this form. I have also received assistance from Messrs. +Gatschet, Dorsey, Mooney and Curtin. The final form which it has taken +is largely due to the labors of Mr. Henshaw, who has gathered many +important facts relating to the habitat of North American tribes while +preparing a synonymy of tribal names. + + + * * * * * + + + INDEX + + A. + + Abnaki, population 48 + Achastlians, Lamanon's vocabulary of the 75 + Acoma, a Keresan dialect 83 + population 83 + Adair, James, quoted on Choctaw villages 40 + Adaizan family 45-48 + Adaizan and Caddoan languages compared 46 + Adam, Lucien, on the Taensa language 96 + Agriculture, effect of, on Indian population 38 + region to which limited 41 + extent of practice of, by Indian tribes 42 + Aht division of Wakashan family 129, 130 + Ahtena tribe of Copper River 53 + population 55 + Ai-yan, population 55 + Akansa, or Quapaw tribe 113 + Akoklako, or Lower Cootenai 85 + Aleutian Islanders belong to Eskimauan family 73 + population 75 + Algonquian family 47-51 + list of tribes 48 + population 48 + habitat of certain western tribes of 113 + Alibamu, habitat and population 95 + Alsea, habitat 134 + Al-ta-tin, population 55 + Angel de la Guardia Island, occupied by Yuman tribes 138 + Apache, habitat 54 + population 56 + Apalaches, supposed by Gallatin to be the Yuchi 126 + Apalachi tribe 95 + Arapaho, habitat 48, 109 + population 48 + Arikara, habitat 60 + population 62 + Assinaboin, habitat 115 + population 117 + Atfalati, population 82 + Athapascan family 51-56 + Atnah tribe, considered distinct from Salish by Gallatin 103 + Attacapan family 56-57 + Attakapa language reputed to be spoken by the Karankawa 82 + Auk, population 87 + + B. + + Baffin Land, Eskimo population 75 + Bancroft, George, linguistic literature 13 + cited on Cherokee habitat 78, 79 + Bancroft, Hubert H., linguistic literature 24 + Bandelier, A. F., on the Keres 83 + Bannock, former habitat 108 + population 110 + Bartlett, John R., cited on Lipan and Apache habitat 54 + the Pima described by 98 + Barton, B. S., comparison of Iroquois and Cheroki 77 + Batts on Tutelo habitat in 1671 114 + Bellacoola, population 105, 131 + Bellomont, Earl of, cited on the Tutelo 114 + Beothukan family 57-58 + Berghaus, Heinrich, linguistic literature 16 + Bessels, Emil, acknowledgments 73 + Biloxi, a Siouan tribe 112 + early habitat 114 + present habitat 116 + population 118 + Blount, on Cherokee and Chickasaw habitat 79 + Boas, Franz, cited on Chimakum habitat 62 + on population of Chimmesyan tribes 64 + on the middle group of Eskimo 73 + on population of Baffin Land Eskimo 75 + Salishan researches 104 + Haida researches 120 + Wakashan researches 129 + on the habitat of the Haeltzuk 130 + Boundaries of Indian tribal lands, difficulty of fixing 43-44 + Bourgemont on the habitat of the Comanche 109 + Brinton, D. G., cited on Haumonte's Taensa grammar 96 + cited on relations of the Pima language 99 + Buschmann, Johann C. E., linguistic literature 18, 19 + on the Kiowa language 84 + on the Pima language 99 + on Shoshonean families 109 + regards Shoshonean and Nahuatlan families as one 140 + + C. + + Cabeca de Vaca, mention of Atayos by 46 + Caddoan and Adaizan languages compared 46 + Caddoan family 58-62 + Caddoan. See Southern Caddoan. + Calapooya, population 82 + California, aboriginal game laws in 42 + Calispel population 105 + "Carankouas," a part of Attacapan family 57 + Carib, affinities of Timuquana with 123 + Carmel language of Mofras 102 + Cartier, Jacques, aborigines met by 58, 77-78 + Catawba, habitat 112, 114, 116 + population 118 + Cathlascon tribes, Scouler on 81 + Caughnawaga, population 80 + Cayuga, population 80 + Cayuse, habitat and population 127, 128 + Central Eskimo, population 75 + Champlain, S. de, cited 78 + Charlevoix on the derivation of "Iroquois" 77 + Chehalis, population 105 + Chemehuevi, habitat and population 110 + Cherokees, habitat and population 78-80 + Cheyenne tribe, habitat 48, 109 + population 49 + treaty cited 114 + Chicasa, population 95 + join the Na'htchi 96 + Chilcat, population 87 + Chill['u]la tribe 132 + Chimakuan family 62, 63 + Chimakum, habitat and population 62 + Chimarikan family 63 + Chimmesyan family 63-65 + Chinookan family 65-86 + Chippewyan, population 55 + Chitimacuan family, possibly allied to the Attacapan 57 + Chitimachan family 66-67 + Choctaw Muskhogee family of Gallatin 94 + Choctaw, population 95 + Choctaw towns described by Adair 40 + Chocuyem, a Moquelumnan dialect 92 + Cholovone division of the Mariposan 90 + Chopunnish, population 107 + Chowanoc, perhaps a Tuscarora tribe 79 + Chukchi of Asia 74 + Chumashan family 67, 68 + Chumashan languages, Salinan languages held to be + dialects of 101 + Clackama, population 66 + Clallam language distinct from Chimakum 62 + Clallam, population 105 + Classification of linguistic families, rules for 8, 12 + Classification of Indian languages, literature relating to 12-25 + Clavering, Captain, Greenland Eskimo, researches of 72 + Coahuiltecan family 68, 69 + Cochitemi, a Keresan dialect 83 + Cochiti, population of 83 + Coconoon tribe 90 + Coeur d'Alene tribe, population of 105 + Cofitachiqui, a supposed Yuchi town 126 + Cognation of languages 11, 12 + Columbia River, improvidence of tribes on 37, 38 + Colville tribe, population 105 + Comanche, association of the Kiowa with 84 + habitat 109 + population 110 + Comecrudo, vocabulary of, collected by Gatschet 68 + Communism among North American Indians 34, 35 + Conestoga, former habitat of the 78 + Cook, Capt. James, names Waukash tribe 129 + Cookkoo-oose tribe of Lewis and Clarke 89 + Cootenai tribe 85 + Copehan family 69-70 + Corbusier, Wm. H., on Crow occupancy of Black Hills 114 + Corn, large quantities of, raised by certain tribes 41 + Cortez, Jose, cited 54 + Costano dialects, Latham's opinion concerning 92 + Costanoan family 70, 71 + Cotoname vocabulary, collected by Gatschet 68 + Coulter, Dr., Pima vocabulary of 98 + Coyotero Apache, population 56 + Cree, population 49 + Creeks, habitat and population 95 + Crows, habitat 114, 116 + population 118 + Curtin, Jeremiah, Chimarikan researches of 63 + Costanoan researches of 70 + Moquelumnan researches of 93 + Yanan researches of 135 + acknowledgments to 142 + Cushing, Frank H., on the derivation of "Zuni" 138 + Cushna tribe 99 + + D. + + Dahcota. See Dakota. + Dahcotas, habitat of the divisions of 111 + Dakota, tribal and family sense of name 112 + divisions of the 114 + population and divisions of the 116 + Dall, W. H., linguistic litera 21, 22, 24 + cited on Eskimo habitat 53 + Eskimo researches of 73 + on Asiatic Eskimo 74 + on population of Alaskan Eskimo 75 + Dana on the divisions of the Sacramento tribes 99 + Dawson, George M., cited on Indian land tenure 40 + assigns the Tagisch to the Koluschan family 87 + Salishan researches 104 + De Bry, Timuquanan names on map of 124 + Delaware, population 49 + habitat 79 + De L'Isle cited 60 + De Soto, Ferdinand, on early habitat of the Kaskaskias 113 + supposed to have visited the Yuchi 126 + Timuquanan towns encountered by 124 + D'Iberville, names of Taensa towns given by 96 + Diegueno, population 138 + Differentiation of languages within single stock, + to what due 141 + Digger Indian tongue compared by Powers + with the Pit River dialects 98 + Disease, Indian belief concerning 39 + Dobbs, Arthur, cited on Eskimo habitat 73 + Dog Rib, population of 55 + Dorsey, J. O., cited on Pacific coast tribes 54 + cited on Omaha-Arikara alliance 60 + Catawba studies 112 + on Crow habitat 114 + Takilman researches 121 + Yakonan researches 134 + acknowledgments to 142 + Drew, E. P., on Siuslaw habitat 134 + Duflot de Mofras, E. de, cited 92 + Duflot de Mofras E. de, Soledad, language of 102 + Dunbar, John B., quoted on Pawnee habitat 60 + Duncan, William, settlement of Chimmesyan tribes by 65 + Duponceau collection, Salishan vocabulary of the 103 + Du Pratz, Le Page, cited on Caddoan habitat 61 + on certain southern tribes 66 + on the Na'htchi language 96 + + E. + + Eaton, Captain, Zuni vocabulary of 139 + Ecclemachs. See Esselenian family. + Eells, Myron, linguistic literature 24 + on the Chimakuan language and habitat 62, 63 + E-nagh-magh language of Lane 122 + Emory, W. H., visit of, to the Pima 98 + Environment as affecting language 141 + Eskimauan family 71-75 + Eslen nation of Galiano 75 + Esselenian family 75, 76 + Etah Eskimo, habitat of 72, 73 + ['E]-ukshikni or Klamath 90 + Everette on the derivation of "Yakona" 134 + + F. + + "Family," linguistic, defined 11 + Filson, John, on Yuchi habitat 127 + Flatbow. See Kitunahan family. + Flathead Cootenai 85 + Flathead family, Salish or 102 + Fontanedo, Timuquanan, local names of 124 + Food distribution among North American Indians 34 + Friendly Village, dialect of 104 + + G. + Galiano, D. A., on the Eslen and Runsien 75, 76 + Gallatin, Albert, founder of + systematic American philology 9, 10 + linguistic literature 12, 15, 16, 17 + Attacapan researches 57 + on the Caddo and Pawnee 59 + Chimmesyan researches 64 + on the Chitimachan family 66 + on the Muskhogean family 94 + on Eskimauan boundaries 72 + comparison of Iroquois and Cheroki 77 + on the Kiowa language 84 + on the Koluschan family 86 + on Na'htchi habitat 96 + Salishan researches 102, 103 + reference to "Sahaptin" family 107 + on the Shoshonean family 108 + on the Siouan family 111 + Skittagetan researches 119, 120 + on Tonika language 135 + on the habitat of the Yuchi 126 + linguistic map 142 + Game laws of California tribes 42 + Garcia, Bartolome, cited 68 + Gatschet, A. S., work of 7, XXXIV + linguistic literature 23, 24 + comparison of Caddoan and Adaizan languages by 46 + on Pacific Coast tribes 54 + Attacapan researches 57 + Beothukan researches 57 + Chimakuan researches 62 + on the derivation of "Chitimacha" 66 + Chitimachan researches 67 + Coahuiltecan researches 68 + Mutson investigations 70 + Tonkawe vocabulary collected by 82 + on the Kitunahan family 85 + distinguishes the Kusan as a distinct stock 89 + on the habitat of the Yamasi 95 + on the Taensa language 96 + on the derivation of "Palaihnih" 97 + on the Pima language 99 + discovered radical affinity between + Wakashan and Salishan families 104 + Catawba studies 112 + surviving Biloxi found by 114 + Takilman researches 121 + on the derivation of "Tano" 122 + classes Tonkawan as a distinct stock 125 + Tonikan researches 125 + on early Yuchi habitat 127 + on the derivation of Waiilatpu 127 + Washoan language separated by 131 + Wishoskan researches 133 + on the Say['u]sklan language 134 + Gens du Lac, habitat 111 + Gibbs, George, linguistic literature 17, 22 + on the Chimakum language 62 + on the Kulanapan family 87 + the Eh-nek family of 100 + on the Weitspekan language 131 + Wishoskan researches 133 + Yuki vocabulary cited 136 + Gioloco language 108 + Gosiute, population 110 + Grammatic elements of language 141 + Grammatic structure in classification of Indian languages 11 + Gravier, Father, on the Na'htchi and Taensa 97 + Greely, A. W., on Eskimo of Grinnell Land 73 + Greenland, Eskimo of 73, 75 + Grinnell Land, Eskimo of 73 + Gros Ventres, habitat 116 + Guiloco language 92 + + H. + + Haeltzuk, habitat 129, 130 + principal tribes 131 + population 131 + Haida, divisions of 120 + population 121 + language, related to Koluschan 120 + method of land tenure 40 + Hailtzuk, population 105 + Hale, Horatio, linguistic literature 14, 25 + discovery of branches of Athapascan family in Oregon by 52 + on the affinity of Cheroki to Iroquois 77 + on the derivation of "Iroquois" 77 + on the "Kaus or Kwokwoos" 89 + on the Talatui 92 + on the Palaihnihan 97 + on certain Pujunan tribes 99, 100 + Salishan researches 104 + on the Sastean family 106 + Tutelo researches 114 + classification and habitat of Waiilatpuan tribes 127 + on the Yakonan family 134 + Hamilton manuscript cited 54 + Hanega, population 87 + Hano pueblo, Tusayan 123 + population 123 + Hare tribe, population 55 + Harrison, on early Tutelo habitat 114 + Haumonte, J. D., on the Taensa 96 + Havasupai habitat and population 138 + Hayden, Ferdinand V., linguistic literature 20 + Haynarger vocabulary cited 54 + Henshaw, H. W., Chumashan researches of 68 + Costanoan researches of 70 + Esselenian investigations of 76 + Moquelumnan researches of 93 + Salinan researches of 101 + on Salinan population 102 + on population of Cayuse 128 + acknowledgments to 142 + synonomy of tribes by 142 + Heshotats['i]na, a Zuni village 139 + Hewitt, J. N.B., on the derivation of "Iroquois" 77 + Hidatsa population 118 + Hoh, population and habitat 63 + Holm, G., Greenland Eskimo 72 + on East Greenland Eskimo population 75 + Hoodsunu, population 87 + Hoquiam, population 105 + Hospitality of American Indians, source of 34 + Howe, George, on early habitat of the Cherokee 78 + Hudson Bay, Eskimo of 73 + Humptulip, population 105 + Hunah, population 87 + Hunting claims 42, 43 + Hupa, population of 56 + + I. + + Iakon, see Yakwina 134 + Improvidence of Indians 34, 37 + Indian languages, principles of classification of 8-12 + literature relating to classification of 12-25 + at time of European discovery 44 + Indian linguistic families, paper by J. W. Powell on 1-142 + work on classification of 25, 26 + Industry of Indians 36 + Innuit population 75 + Iowa, habitat and population 116, 118 + Iroquoian family 76-81 + Isleta, New Mexico, population 123 + Isleta, Texas, population 123 + Ives, J. C., on the habitat of the Chemehuevi 110 + + J. + + Jargon, establishment of, between tribes 7 + Jemez, population of 123 + Jewett's Wakash vocabulary referred to 129 + Jicarilla Apache, population 56 + Johnson, Sir William, treaty with Cherokees 78 + Johnston, A. R., visit of, to the Pima 98 + Joutel on the location of certain Quapaw villages 113 + + K. + + Kaigani, divisions of the 121 + Kaiowe, habitat 109 + Kaiowe. See Kiowan family. + Kai Pomo, habitat 88 + Kai-yuh-kho-t['a]na, etc., population 56 + Kalapooian family 81-82 + Kane, Paul, linguistic literature 19 + Kansa or Kaw tribe 113 + population 118 + Karankawan family 82-83 + Kaskaskias, early habitat 113 + Kastel Pomo, habitat 88 + Kat-la-wot-sett bands 134 + Kato Pomo, habitat 88 + Kaus or Kwokwoos tribe of Hale 89 + Kaw, habitat 116 + Kaw. See Kansa. + Keane, Augustus H., linguistic literature 23 + on the "Tegua or Taywaugh" 122 + Kek, population 87 + Kenesti, habitat 54 + Keresan family 83 + K'iapkwainakwin, a Zuni village 139 + Kichai habitat and population 61, 62 + Kickapoo, population 49 + Kinai language asserted to bear analogies to the Mexican 86 + Kiowan family 84 + Kitunahan family 85 + Kiwomi, a Keresan dialect 83 + Klamath, habitat and population 90 + Klanoh-Klatklam tribe 85 + Klikitat, population 107 + K'nai-khotana tribe of Cook's Inlet 53 + K'naia-khot['a]na, population 56 + Koas['a]ti, population 95 + Koluschan family 85-87 + Ku-itc villages, location of 134 + Kulanapan and Chimarikan verbal correspondences 63 + Kulanapan family 87-89 + Kusan family 89 + Kutchin, population 56 + Kutenay. See Kitunahan family. + Kwaiantikwoket, habitat 110 + Kwakiutl tribe 129 + + L. + + Labrador, Eskimo of 73 + Labrador, Eskimo population 75 + Laguna, population 83 + La Harpe cited 61 + Lake tribe, Washington, population 105 + L['a]kmiut population 82 + Lamanon on the Eeclemachs 75, 76 + Land, Indian ownership of 40 + amount devoted to Indian agriculture 42 + Lane, William C., linguistic literature 17 + on Pueblo languages 122 + Languages, cognate 11, 12 + Latham, R. G., linguistic literature 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20 + cited on Beothukan language 57 + Chumashan researches 67 + proposes name for Copehan family 69 + Costanoan researches 70 + Salinas family of 75 + mention of the Kaus tribe 89 + on the Tonika language 125 + on the Weitspekan language 132 + Wishoskan researches 133 + on the Say['u]sklan language 134 + Yuman researches 137 + Pueblo researches 139 + classification of the Mariposan family 90 + on the Moquelumnan family 92 + on the Piman family 98 + on the Pujunan family 99 + on the Ehnik family of 100 + on the Salinan family 102 + Lawson, John, on Tutelo migration in 1671 114 + Lewis and Clarke cited on improvidence of + Indians of the Northwest 37 + on Pacific coast tribes 53 + on Arikari habitat 60 + authorities on Chinookan habitat 65 + on the habitat of Kalapooian tribes 82 + on the Kusan tribe 89 + Salishan tribes met by 104 + on habit of Shoshonean tribes 109 + on Crow habitat 114 + on the Yakwina 134 + Lexical elements considered in classification of + Indian languages 11, 141 + Linguistic classification, rules for 8-12 + Linguistic families of North America, + paper by J. W. Powell on 1-142 + nomenclature of 7-12 + work on classification of 25, 26 + number of 45 + Linguistic "family" defined 11 + Linguistic map, preparation of 142 + notes concerning 25, 45 + Lipan, habitat 54 + population 56 + Literature relating to classification of Indian languages 12-25 + Loucheux classed as Athapascan 52 + Lower California, native population of, unknown 138 + Lower Spokane, population 105 + Lower Umpqua villages, location of 134 + Lummi, population 105 + Lutuamian family 89-90 + + M. + + Madison tribe, population 105 + Mahican, population 51 + Makah tribe 129 + habitat 130 + population 130 + Mallery, Garrick, cited on early Indian population 33 + acknowledgments to 142 + Malthusian law, not applicable to American Indians 33-34 + Mandan habitat 116 + population 118 + Map showing Indian linguistic families, explanation of 26, 45 + Marchand on the Tshinkitani 86 + Margry on early habitat of the Biloxi 114 + Maricopa population 138 + Mariposan family 90-91 + Marquette's map, location of the Quapaw on 113 + Marriage among Indians 35 + Marys River tribe, population 82 + Maskegon, population 49 + Mdewakantonwan, population 116 + Medicine Creek treaty 84 + Medicine practice of the Indians, evils of 39 + Meherrin, joined by the Tutelo 114 + Mendewahkantoan, habitat 111 + Menominee, population 49 + Mescalero Apache, population 56 + Mexican language, Kinai bears analogies to the 86 + Miami, population 49 + Micmac, population 49 + western Newfoundland colonized by 58 + Migration of Siouan tribes westward 112 + Migration, effect of, upon language 141 + Milhau on the derivation of "Coos" 89 + Misisauga, population 49 + Missouri tribe, habitat 116 + Miwok division of Moqueluman family, tribes of 93 + "Mobilian trade Jargon" 96 + Modoc, habitat and population 90 + M['o]dokni, or Modoc 90 + Mohave, population 138 + Mohawk, population 80 + Moki. See Tusayan. + Mol['a]le, habitat and population 127, 128 + Monsoni, population 49 + Montagnais, population 49 + Monterey, Cal., natives of 71 + Montesano, population 105 + Montigny, M. de, on the Na'htchi and Taensa 96, 97 + Mooney, James, acknowledgments to 142 + Moquelumnan family 92-93 + Muekleshoot, population 105 + Murdoch, John, Eskimo researches of 73 + Muskhogean family 94-95 + + N. + + Nahanie, population 56 + Na'htchi, Taensa and Chitimacha, + supposed by Du Pratz to be kindred tribes 65-66 + Na'htchi, habitat and population 96-97 + Nahuatl, Pima a branch of the 99 + Shoshonean regarded by Buschmann as a branch of 109 + Na-isha Apache, population 56 + Namb['e], population 123 + Names, population 56 + Nascapee, population 49 + Nascapi joined by the Beothuk 58 + Natchesan family 95 + Navajo, habitat 54 + Nelson, E. W., cited on Athapascan habitat 53 + Eskimo researches of 73 + Nespilem, population 105 + Nestucca, habitat 104 + Newfoundland, aborigines of 57 + New Metlakahtla, a Chimmesyan settlement 65 + Nisqually language distinct from Chimakum 62 + Nisqually, population 105 + Noje. See Nozi. 135 + Nomenclature of linguistic families, + paper by J. W. Powell on 1-142 + Nootka-Columbian family of Scouler 129, 130 + Northwestern Innuit population 75 + Notaway tribe 79 + Notaway joined by the Tutelo 114 + Nozi tribe 135 + + O. + + Ojibwa, population 50 + Okinagan, population 105 + Olamentke dialect of Kostromitonov 92 + Olamentke division of Moquelumnan family, tribes of 93 + Omaha, habitat 115 + population 117 + Oneida, population 80 + Onondaga, population 80 + Orozco y Berra, Manuel, linguistic literature 20 + cited 54 + on the Coahuiltecan family 68 + Osage, early occupancy ot Arkansas by the 113 + Osage, habitat and population 116, 118 + Oto and Missouri, population 118 + Otoe, habitat 116 + Ottawa, population 50 + Oyhut, population 105 + + P. + + Packard, A. S., on Labrador Eskimo population 75 + Pai Ute, population 110 + Pakaw['a] tribe, habitat 68 + Palaihnihan family 97, 98 + Paloos, population 107 + Papago, a division of the Piman family 98 + population 99 + Pareja, Padre, Timuquana vocabulary of 123 + Parisot, J., et al., on the Taensa language 96 + Parry, C. C., Pima vocabulary of 98 + Patriotism of the Indian 36 + Paviotso, population 110 + Pawnee, divisions of, and habitat 60, 61, 113 + population 62 + Peoria, population of the 50 + Petroff, Ivan, Eskimo researches of 73 + on population of the Koluschan tribes 87 + Picuris, population 123 + Pike, Z., on the Kiowa language 84 + on the habitat of the Comanche 106 + Pilling, James C., work of XXX, XXXI, XXXVI, 142 + acknowledgments to 142 + Pit River dialects 97 + Pima alta, a division of the Piman family 98 + Piman family 98 + Pima, population 99 + Pimentel, Francisco, linguistic literature 21 + on the Yuman language 137 + Pinto tribe, habitat 68 + Point Barrow Eskimo, habitat 73 + Pojoaque, population 123 + Ponca, habitat 113, 115 + population 117 + Pope on the Kiowa habitat 84 + Population of Indian tribes discussed 33-40 + Pottawatomie, population of the 50 + Powell, J. W., paper of, on Indian linguistic families 1-142 + linguistic literature 22, 23, 24 + Mutsun researches 70 + Wishoskan researches 133 + Noje vocabulary of 135 + separates the Yuki language 136 + Powers, Stephen, linguistic literature 22 + cited on artificial boundaries + of Indian hunting and fishing claims 42 + cited on Pacific coast tribes 54 + on the Chimarikan family 63 + on the Meewok name of the Moquelumne River 92 + on the Pit River dialects 97 + Cahroc, tribe of 100 + Pujunan researches 100 + on Shoshonean of California 110 + Washoan vocabularies of 131 + on habitat of Weitspekan tribes 132 + on the Nozi tribe 135 + Pownall map, location of Totteroy River on 114 + Prairie du Chien, treaty of 112 + Prichard, James C., linguistic literature 14 + Priestly, Thomas, on Chinook population 66 + Pueblo languages, see Keresan, Tanoan, Zunian. + Pujunan family 99, 100 + Pujuni tribe 99 + Pur['i]sima, inhabitants of 67 + Puyallup, population 105 + + Q. + + Quaitso, population 105 + Quapaw, a southern Siouan tribe 113 + early habitat 113 + present habitat 116 + population 118 + Quarrelers classed as Athapascan 52 + "Queen Charlotte's Islands," language of, Gallatin 119 + Queniut, population 105 + Quile-ute, population and habitat 63 + Quinaielt, population 105 + Quoratean family 100, 101 + + R. + + Ramsey, J. G. M., on Cherokee habitat 78 + Rechahecrian. See Rickohockan. + Rickohockan Indians of Virginia 79 + Riggs, A. L., on Crow habitat 114 + Riggs, S. R., Salishan researches 104 + Rink, H. J., on population of Labrador Eskimo 75 + Rogue River Indians 121 + population 56 + Ross, Alexander, cited on improvidence of Indians of Northwest 38 + Ross, Sir John, acknowledgments to 73 + Royce, Charles C., map of, cited on Cherokee lands 78 + Runsien nation of Galiano 75 + Ruslen language of Mofras 102 + + S. + + Sac and Fox, population of the 50 + Sacramento tribes, Sutter and Dana on the division of 99 + Saiaz, habitat 54 + Saidyuka, population 110 + Saint Regis, population 81 + Salinan family 101 + Salishan family 102-105 + Salish, population 105 + Salish of Puget Sound 130 + San Antonio language 75 + San Antonio Mission, Cal. 101, 102 + San Buenaventura Indians 67, 68 + San Carlos Apache population 56 + Sandia, population 123 + San Felipe, population 83 + San Ildefonso, population 123 + San Juan, population 123 + San Luis Obispo, natives of 67 + San Luis Rey Mission, Cal. 138 + San Miguel language 75 + San Miguel Mission, Cal. 101, 102 + Sans Puell, population 105 + Santa Ana, population 83 + Santa Barbara applied as family name 67 + Santa Barbara language, Cal. 101 + Santa Clara, Cal., language 92 + Santa Clara, population 123 + Santa Cruz Islands, natives of 67 + Santa Cruz, Cal., natives of 71 + Santa Inez Indians 67 + Santa Rosa Islanders 67 + Santee population 116 + Santiam, population 83 + Santo Domingo, population 83 + Sastean family 105 + Satsup, population 105 + Say, Dr., vocabularies of Kiowa by 84 + Say's vocabulary of Shoshoni referred to 109 + Say['u]sklan language 134 + Schermerhorn, cited on K[:a]do hadatco 61 + on the Kiowa habitat 84 + Schoolcraft, H. R., on the Cherokee bounds in Virginia 79 + on the Tuolumne dialect 92 + on the Cushna tribe 99 + Scouler, John, linguistic literature 13-14 + on the Kalapooian family 81 + Skittagetan researches 119 + Shahaptan family of 107 + "Nootka-Columbian," family of 139 + Secumne tribe 99 + Sedentary tribes 30-33 + Seminole, population 95 + Seneca, population 80 + Senec['u], population 123 + Shahaptian family 106 + Shasta, habitat 106 + Shateras, supposed to be Tutelos 114 + Shawnee, population 50 + habitat 79 + Shea, J. G., on early habitat of the Kaskaskias 113 + Sheepeaters. See Tukuarika. + Shiwokugmiut Eskimo, population 75 + Shoshonean family 108-110 + regarded by Buschmann as identical with Nahuatlan 140 + Shoshoni, population 110 + Sia, population 83 + Sibley, John, cited on language of Adaizan family of Indians 46-47 + Attacapan researches 57 + cited on Caddo habitat 61 + on the habitat of the Karankawa 82 + states distinctness of Tonika language 125 + Siksika, population 50 + Simpson, James H., Zuni vocabulary 139 + Siouan family 111-118 + Sioux, use of the term 112 + Sisitoans, habitat 111 + Sisseton, population 116 + Sitka tribe, population 87 + Siuslaw tribe 134 + Six Nations joined by the Tutelo 114 + Skittagetan family 118 + Skokomish, population 105 + Slave, and other tribes, population 56 + Smith, Buckingham, on the Timuquana language 123 + Snohomish, population 105 + Sobaipuri, a division of the Piman family 98 + Soke tribe occupying Sooke Inlet 130 + Soledad language of Mofras 102 + Sorcery, a common cause of death among Indians 39 + Southern Caddoan group 113 + Southern Killamuks. See Yakwina 134 + Sproat, G. M., suggests Aht as name of Wakashan family 130 + Squaxon, population 105 + Stahkin, population 87 + Stevens, I. I., on the habitat of the Bannock 109 + "Stock," linguistic, defined 11 + Stockbridge, population 51 + Stoney, Lieut., investigations of Athapascan habitat 53 + Superstition the most common source of death among Indians 39 + Sutter, Capt., on the divisions of the Sacramento tribes 99 + Swinomish, population 105 + + T. + + Taensa, regarded by Du Pratz as kindred to the Na'htchi 66 + tribe and language 96 + habitat 97 + T[^a]iakwin, a Zuni village 139 + Takilman family 121 + Takilma, habitat and population 121 + Taku, population 87 + Tanoan stock, one Tusayan pueblo belonging to 110 + Tanoan family 121-123 + Taos language shows Shoshonean affinities 122 + population 123 + Taylor, Alexander S., on the Esselen vocabulary 75, 76 + Taywaugh language of Lane 122 + Teaching among Indians 35 + Tegua or Taywaugh language 122 + Tenaino, population 107 + Ten['a]n Kutchin, population 56 + Tesuque, population 123 + Teton, habitat 111 + population 117 + Tiburon Island occupied by Yuman tribes 138 + Tillamook, habitat 104 + population 105 + Timuquanan tribes, probable early habitat of 95 + family 123-125 + Tobacco Plains Cootenai 85 + Tobikhar, population 110 + Tolmie, W. F., Chimmesyan vocabulary cited 64 + Salishan researches 104 + Shahaptian vocabularies of 107 + Tolmie and Dawson, linguistic literature 25 + map cited 53, 64 + on boundaries of the Haeltzuk 130 + Tongas, population 87 + Tonikan family 125 + Tonkawan family 125-126 + Tonkawe vocabulary collected by Gatschet 82 + Tonti, cited 61 + Toteros. See Tutelo 114 + Totteroy River, location of, by Pownall 114 + Towakarehu, population 62 + Treaties, difficulties, and defects in, + regarding definition of tribal boundaries 43-44 + Treaty of Prairie du Chien 112 + Tribal land classified 40 + Trumbull, J. H., on the derivation of Caddo 59 + on the derivation of "Sioux" 111 + Tsamak tribe 99 + Tshinkitani or Koluschan tribe 86 + Tukuarika, habitat 109 + population 110 + Turner, William W., linguistic literature 18 + discovery of branches of Athapascan family in Oregon by 52 + Eskimo researches of 73 + on the Keresan language 83 + on the Kiowan family 84 + on the Piman family 98 + Yuman researches 137 + Zunian researches 138 + Tusayan, habitat and population 110 + Tewan pueblo of 122 + a Shoshonean tongue 139 + Tuscarora, an Iroquoian tribe 79 + population 81 + Tuski of Asia 74 + Tutelo, a Siouan tribe 112 + habitat in 1671 114 + present habitat 116 + population 118 + Tyigh, population 107 + + U. + + Uchean family 126-127 + Umatilla, population 107 + Umpqua, population 56 + Scouler on the 81 + Unungun, population 75 + Upper Creek join the Na'htchi 96 + Upper Spokane, population 105 + Upper Umpqua villages, location of 134 + Uta, population 110 + Ute, habitat of the 109 + + V. + + Valle de los Tulares language 92 + Villages of Indians 40 + + W. + + Waco, population 62 + Wahkpakotoan, habitat 111 + Waiilatpuan family 127-128 + Wailakki, habitat 54 + relationship of to Kulanapan tribes 88 + Wakashan family 128-131 + Wakash, habitat 129 + Walapai, population 138 + Walla Walla, population 107 + Wars, effect of, in reducing Indian population 38 + Wasco, population 66 + Washaki, habitat 109 + Washoan family 131 + Wateree, habitat and probable linguistic connection 114 + Watlala, population 66 + Wayne, Maumee valley settlements described by 41 + Weitspekan family 131 + Western Innuit population 75 + Whipple, A. W., Kiowan researches 84 + Pima vocabulary of 98 + on the derivation of "Yuma" 137 + Zuni vocabulary 139 + White Mountain Apache population 56 + Wichita, population 62 + Winnebago, former habitat 111, 112 + Winnebago, present habitat 116 + Winnebago, population 118 + Wishoskan family 132-133 + Witchcraft beliefs among Indians 39 + Woccon, an extinct Siouan tribe 112, 116 + Woccon, former habitat 114 + Wyandot, former habitat 78 + population 81 + + Y. + + Yaketahnoklatakmakanay tribe 85 + Yakonan family 133 + Yakutat population 87 + Yakut or Mariposan family 90 + Yakwina tribe 134 + Yamasi, believed to be extinct 95 + habitat 95 + Y['a]mil, population 82 + Yamkallie, Scouler on 81 + Yanan family 135 + Yanktoanans, habitat 111 + Yankton, habitat 111 + population 116 + Yanktonnais, population 117 + Yonkalla, population 82 + Youikcones or Youkone of Lewis and Clarke 134 + Youkiousme, a Moquelumnan dialect 92 + Ysleta, Texas, population 123 + Yuchi, habitat and population 126, 127 + Yuchi. See Uchean family. + Yuit Eskimo of Asia 74 + Yukian family 135-136 + Yuman family 136-138 + Yurok, Karok name for the Weitspekan tribes 132 + + Z. + + Zunian family 138-139 + + * * * * * + * * * * + +Errors and Anomalies: + + "Lewis and Clarke" + [_this spelling is standard throughout the text_] + "Zuni") + [_always written with tilde_] + + ("obvious typographical error") ("evident misprint") + [_this and similar notations are from original text_] + + + Table of Contents: + + Chimmesyan family / Principal tribes or villages + [_main text has "Principal Tribes" only_] + Tonkawan family / Geographic distribution 126 [125] + Waiilatpuan family [unchanged] + [_main text has "Waiilatpuan" only_] + Weitspekan family / Tribes + [_main text has "Principal Tribes"_] + + slight differences have been [heen] + ... kinship system, with mother-right as its chief factor + [mother-rite] + that passes by Bayau Pierre [_spelling unchanged_] + "more in the interior, towards the sources of the Willamat River." + [_'w' invisible_] + (includes Kootenais (Flatbows or Skalzi)). [_one ) missing_] + There were 769 Klamath and Modoc on the Klamath Reservation + [Klamaht Reservation] + Hawhaw's band of Aplaches [_spelling unchanged: may be right_] + Vallee de los Tulares [_spelling unchanged_] + Tshokoyem vocabulary [vobabulary] + especially in that of the Ruslen." [_close quote invisible_] + = A-cho-m[^a][']-wi, Powell ... (vocabs. + [_open parenthesis missing_] + A corruption of the Algonkin word "nadowe-ssi-wag," + [_close quote missing_] + Waukash, waukash, is the Nootka word "good" "good." + [_both repetitions in original_] + Humboldt Bay as far south as Arcata + [_text unchanged: Arcata is at the extreme north end of + Humboldt Bay_] + a change in the semantic content or meaning of words [sematic] + + + * * * * * + * * * * + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Indian Linguistic Families Of America, +North Of Mexico, by John Wesley Powell + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK INDIAN LINGUISTIC FAMILIES *** + +***** This file should be named 17286.txt or 17286.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/7/2/8/17286/ + +Produced by Louise Hope, Carlo Traverso, the Library of +Congress Geography and Map Division, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net. This +file was produced from images generously made available +by the Bibliotheque nationale de France (BnF/Gallica) at +http://gallica.bnf.fr + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |